Skip to main content

Full text of "Where is science going?"

See other formats


£  UNIVERSITE 

I  YORK 


UNIVERSITY 


LIBRARIES 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2014 


https://archive.org/details/whereissciencegoOOplan_0 


V 

I 


Date  Due 


 .. — +i  ■i*"r  

j 

\me  JUL  5  M 

MAR  1  7  fffi  ■» 

—   .V 

T^T  

MAKUi  m  SC  BA£ 

• 

MAR  1  9  19»,  w  -  mu 

p 

York  Form  —  Cooper  Graphics 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 


Books  by  Max  Planck 

WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 
THE  UNIVERSE  IN  THE  LIGHT  OF 
MODERN  PHYSICS 


WHERE  IS 
SGIENGE  GOING? 

BY  MAX  PLANCK 

PROFESSOR   OF   THEORETICAL   PHYSICS  AT 
THE   UNIVERSITY    OF  BERLIN 

* 

PROLOGUE  BY  ALBERT  EINSTEIN 
TRANSLATION  AND  BIOGRAPHICAL  NOTE 
BY  JAMES  MURPHY 


NEW  YORK 
W.  W.  NORTON  &  COMPANY,  INC. 
PUBLISHERS 


Copyright,  1932 
W.  W.  NORTON  &  COMPANY,  INC 
70  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York 


First  Edition 


PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA 
FOR  THE   PURLISHERS   D  Y   THE   VAN   REES  PRESS 


CONTENTS 


PROLOGUE  BY  ALBERT  EINSTEIN  7 

INTRODUCTION  BY  JAMES  MURPHY  13 

I.  FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  41 

II.  IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  64 

III.  THE  SCIENTIST'S  PICTURE  OF  THE  PHYSICAL 
UNIVERSE  84 

IV.  CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL:  THE  PROBLEM 
STATED  107 

V.  CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL:  THE  ANSWER 

OF  SCIENCE  i4I 

VI.  FROM  THE  RELATIVE  TO  THE  ABSOLUTE, 

Discussion   of   atomic   weights,    conceft    of  energy; 
difference  between  reversible  and  irreversible  froc esses  170 

EPILOGUE:  A  SOCRATIC  DIALOGUE.  PLANCK- 
EINSTEIN— MURPHY  201 


PROLOGUE 
BY  ALBERT  EINSTEIN 


MANY  kinds  of  men  devote  themselves  to  Sci- 
ence, and  not  all  for  the  sake  of  Science  herself. 
There  are  some  who  come  into  her  temple  because  it 
offers  them  the  opportunity  to  display  their  particular 
talents.  To  this  class  of  men  science  is  a  kind  of  sport 
in  the  practice  of  which  they  exult,  just  as  an  athlete 
exults  in  the  exercise  of  his  muscular  prowess.  There 
is  another  class  of  men  who  come  into  the  temple  to 
make  an  offering  of  their  brain  pulp  in  the  hope  of  se- 
curing a  profitable  return.  These  men  are  scientists 
only  by  the  chance  of  some  circumstance  which  offered 
itself  when  making  a  choice  of  career.  If  the  attending 
circumstance  had  been  different  they  might  have  be- 
come politicians  or  captains  of  business.  Should  an  angel 
of  God  descend  and  drive  from  the  Temple  of  Science 
all  those  who  belong  to  the  categories  I  have  men- 
tioned, I  fear  the  temple  would  be  nearly  emptied.  But 
a  few  worshipers  would  still  remain — some  from 
former  times  and  some  from  ours.  To  these  latter  be- 
longs our  Planck.  And  that  is  why  we  love  him. 

I  am  quite  aware  that  this  clearance  would  mean  the 
driving  away  of  many  worthy  people  who  have  built 

7 


8  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

a  great  portion,  and  even  perhaps  the  greatest  portion, 
of  the  Temple  of  Science.  But  at  the  same  time  it  is 
clear  that  if  the  men  who  have  devoted  themselves  to 
science  consisted  only  of  the  two  categories  I  have  men- 
tioned, the  edifice  could  never  have  grown  to  its  pres- 
ent proud  dimensions,  no  more  than  a  forest  could 
grow  if  it  consisted  only  of  creepers. 

But  let  us  forget  them.  Non  ragionam  di  lor.  And 
let  us  fix  our  gaze  on  those  who  have  found  favor  with 
the  angel.  For  the  most  part  they  are  strange,  taciturn 
and  lonely  fellows.  And,  in  spite  of  this  mutual  re- 
semblance, they  are  far  less  like  one  another  than  those 
whom  our  hypothetical  angel  has  expelled. 

What  has  led  them  to  devote  their  lives  to  the  pur- 
suit of  science?  That  question  is  difficult  to  answer  and 
could  never  be  answered  in  a  simple  categorical  way. 
Personally  I  am  inclined  to  agree  with  Schopenhauer 
in  thinking  that  one  of  the  strongest  motives  that  lead 
people  to  give  their  lives  to  art  and  science  is  the  urge 
to  flee  from  everyday  life,  with  its  drab  and  deadly 
dullness,  and  thus  to  unshackle  the  chains  of  one's  own 
transient  desires,  which  supplant  one  another  in  an 
interminable  succession  so  long  as  the  mind  is  fixed  on 
the  horizon  of  daily  environment. 

But  to  this  negative  motive  a  positive  one  must  be 
added.  Human  nature  always  has  tried  to  form  for 
itself  a  simple  and  synoptic  image  of  the  surrounding 
world.  In  doing  this  it  tries  to  construct  a  picture  which 
will  give  some  sort  of  tangible  expression  to  what  the 
human  mind  sees  in  nature.  That  is  what  the  poet  does, 


PROLOGUE  9 

and  the  painter,  and  the  speculative  philosopher  and 
the  natural  philosopher,  each  in  his  own  way.  Within 
this  picture  he  places  the  center  of  gravity  of  his  own 
soul,  so  that  he  will  find  in  it  that  rest  and  equilibrium 
which  he  cannot  find  within  the  narrow  circle  of  his 
restless  personal  reactions  to  everyday  life. 

Among  the  various  pictures  of  the  world  which  are 
formed  by  the  artist  and  the  philosopher  and  the  poet, 
what  place  does  the  world-picture  of  the  theoretical 
physicist  occupy?  Its  chief  quality  must  be  a  scrupulous 
correctness  and  internal  logical  coherence,  which  only 
the  language  of  mathematics  can  express.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  physicist  has  to  be  severe  and  self-denying 
in  regard  to  the  material  he  uses.  He  has  to  be  content 
with  reproducing  the  most  simple  processes  that  are 
open  to  our  sensory  experience,  because  the  more  com- 
plex processes  cannot  be  represented  by  the  human 
mind  with  the  subtle  exactness  and  logical  sequence 
which  are  indispensable  for  the  theoretical  physicist. 

Even  at  the  expense  of  completeness,  we  have  to 
secure  purity,  clarity  and  accurate  correspondence  be- 
tween the  representation  and  the  thing  represented. 
When  one  realizes  how  small  a  part  of  nature  can  thus 
be  comprehended  and  expressed  in  an  exact  formula- 
tion, while  all  that  is  subtle  and  complex  has  to  be 
excluded,  it  is  only  natural  to  ask,  what  sort  of  attrac- 
tion this  work  can  have?  Does  the  result  of  such  self- 
denying  selection  deserve  the  high-sounding  name  of 
World-Picture? 

I  think  it  does;  because  the  most  general  laws  on 


io         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

which  the  thought-structure  of  theoretical  physics  is 
built  have  to  be  taken  into  consideration  in  studying 
even  the  simplest  events  in  nature.  If  they  were  fully 
known  one  ought  to  be  able  to  deduce  from  them  by 
means  of  purely  abstract  reasoning  the  theory  of  every 
process  of  nature,  including  that  of  life  itself.  I  mean 
theoretically ,  because  in  practice  such  a  process  of  de- 
duction is  entirely  beyond  the  capacity  of  human  rea- 
soning. Therefore  the  fact  that  in  science  we  have  to 
be  content  with  an  incomplete  picture  of  the  physical 
universe  is  not  due  to  the  nature  of  the  universe  itself 
but  rather  to  us. 

Thus  the  supreme  task  of  the  physicist  is  the  dis- 
covery of  the  most  general  elementary  laws  from 
which  the  world-picture  can  be  deduced  logically.  But 
there  is  no  logical  way  to  the  discovery  of  these  ele- 
mental laws.  There  is  only  the  way  of  intuition,  which 
is  helped  by  a  feeling  for  the  order  lying  behind  the 
appearance  and  this  Einfuehlung  is  developed  by  ex- 
perience. Can  one  therefore  say  that  any  system  of 
physics  might  be  equally  valid  and  possible?  Theo- 
retically there  is  nothing  illogical  in  that  idea.  But  the 
history  of  scientific  development  has  shown  that  of  all 
thinkable  theoretical  structures  a  single  one  has  at  each 
stage  of  advance  proved  superior  to  all  the  others. 

It  is  obvious  to  every  experienced  researcher  that 
the  theoretical  system  of  physics  is  dependent  upon  and 
controlled  by  the  world  of  sense-perception,  though 
there  is  no  logical  way  whereby  we  can  proceed  from 
sensory  perception  to  the  principles  that  underlie  the 


PROLOGUE 


ii 


theoretical  structure.  Moreover,  the  conceptual  syn- 
thesis which  is  a  transcript  of  the  empirical  world  may 
be  reduced  to  a  few  fundamental  laws  on  which  the 
whole  synthesis  is  logically  built.  In  every  important 
advance  the  physicist  finds  that  the  fundamental 
laws  are  simplified  more  and  more  as  experimental 
research  advances.  He  is  astonished  to  notice  how 
sublime  order  emerges  from  what  appeared  to  be 
chaos.  And  this  cannot  be  traced  back  to  the  workings 
of  his  own  mind  but  is  due  to  a  quality  that  is  inherent 
in  the  world  of  perception.  Leibniz  well  expressed  this 
quality  by  calling  it  a  preestablished  harmony. 

Physicists  sometimes  reproach  the  philosophers  who 
busy  themselves  with  theories  of  knowledge,  claim- 
ing that  the  latter  do  not  appreciate  this  fact  fully. 
And  I  think  that  this  was  at  the  basis  of  the  con- 
troversy waged  a  few  years  ago  between  Ernst  Mach 
and  Max  Planck.  The  latter  probably  felt  that  Mach 
did  not  fully  appreciate  the  physicist's  longing  for 
perception  of  this  preestablished  harmony.  This  long- 
ing has  been  the  inexhaustible  source  of  that  patience 
and  persistence  with  which  we  have  seen  Planck  de- 
voting himself  to  the  most  ordinary  questions  arising 
in  connection  with  physical  science,  when  he  might 
have  been  tempted  into  other  ways  which  led  to  more 
attractive  results. 

I  have  often  heard  that  his  colleagues  are  in  the 
habit  of  tracing  this  attitude  to  his  extraordinary  per- 
sonal gifts  of  energy  and  discipline.  I  believe  they 
are  wrong.  The  state  of  mind  which  furnishes  the 


12         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

driving  power  here  resembles  that  of  the  devotee  or 
the  lover.  The  long-sustained  effort  is  not  inspired  by 
any  set  plan  or  purpose.  Its  inspiration  arises  from  a 
hunger  of  the  soul. 

I  am  sure  Max  Planck  would  laugh  at  my  childish 
way  of  poking  around  with  the  lantern  of  Diogenes. 
Well!  why  should  I  tell  of  his  greatness?  It  needs  no 
paltry  confirmation  of  mine.  His  work  has  given  one 
of  the  most  powerful  of  all  impulses  to  the  progress 
of  science.  His  ideas  will  be  effective  as  long  as  physi- 
cal science  lasts.  And  I  hope  that  the  example  which 
his  personal  life  affords  will  not  be  less  effective  with 
later  generations  of  scientists. 


INTRODUCTION 


MAX  PLANCK 
A  BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCH 
BY  JAMES  MURPHY 


ONE  day  in  June  1932  I  paid  a  visit  to  Albert 
Einstein  at  his  summer  home  in  Caputh,  some 
fifteen  miles  west  of  Berlin.  We  had  a  long-drawn-out 
tea  together  on  a  multitude  of  topics,  from  the  chances 
of  the  various  political  parties  at  the  coming  election 
to  the  chances  of  somebody  finally  discovering  a  simple 
formula  for  the  unification  of  all  physical  laws.  The 
house  is  pitched  high  on  a  terraced  slope  and  overlooks 
a  beautiful  lake.  Level  with  the  upper  story  there  is 
a  veranda  which  is  like  the  spacious  platform  of  an 
observatory  station.  And  there  is  a  telescope  with  which 
Einstein  amuses  himself  by  gazing  on  the  stars.  When 
dusk  came  on,  and  the  blazing  sunlight  that  had  been 
beating  on  the  lake  all  day  was  turning  to  a  mellow 
glow,  we  went  for  a  stroll  on  the  veranda  to  watch 
the  sunset  and  while  away  the  time  until  the  evening 
meal  would  be  ready.  Within  doors  the  political  crisis 
had  been  the  central  topic  of  conversation  $  but  here, 

13 


14         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

amid  the  natural  harmony  of  lake  and  forest  and 
sinking  sun,  a  higher  theme  made  its  appeal. 

The  name  of  Max  Planck  came  into  our  talk,  and 
the  various  philosophical  problems  which  quantum 
physics  have  given  rise  to.  To  my  more  sweeping 
generalities  Einstein  would  most  invariably  reply 
"Nein,  das  kann  man  nicht  sagen."  But  when  I  put 
forward  something  more  qualified  he  would  reflect 
for  a  while  and  say,  "Ja,  das  können  Sie  sagen"  We 
were  agreed,  I  think,  that  though  the  relativity  theory 
has  captured  the  imagination  of  the  world,  the  quantum 
theory  has  been  a  more  fundamental  force  in  bringing 
about  the  modern  revolution  in  scientific  thought. 

While  we  were  on  this  point  I  asked  Einstein  to 
write  me  an  introduction  for  a  book  of  essays  by  Planck, 
to  be  published  in  English.  Einstein  shied  at  the  sug- 
gestion. He  said  that  it  would  be  presumptuous  on 
his  part  to  introduce  Max  Planck  to  the  public  5  for  the 
discoverer  of  the  quantum  theory  did  not  need  the 
reflected  light  of  any  lesser  luminary  to  show  him 
off.  That  was  Einstein's  attitude  towards  Planck, 
expressed  with  genuine  and  naive  emphasis. 

I  explained  that  the  book  in  question  would  be  for 
the  general  public  and  that,  though  the  name  of  «Planck 
is  a  household  word  in  Germany  and  with  scientists 
all  the  world  over,  he  is  not  so  popular  in  English- 
speaking  countries  as  the  founder  of  the  relativity 
theory.  Einstein  did  not  consider  this  a  very  regrettable 
circumstance.  He  would  have  been  pleased  if  the  truth 
were  the  other  way  round.  But  my  point  was  that  it 


INTRODUCTION  15 

is  a  good  rule  of  logic  to  define  the  less  known  through 
the  better  known,  no  matter  what  the  objective  merits 
of  the  one  or  the  other  may  be.  He  submitted  to 
the  force  of  this  argument  and  agreed  to  a  short  intro- 
duction but  insisted  that  it  must  be  short,  for  anything 
long  would  be  pretentious. 

The  present  chapter  is  not  an  enlargement  on 
Einstein's  introduction.  It  is  meant  rather  to  be  a 
biographical  sketch  of  a  purely  objective  kind.  My 
first  task  here  is  to  indicate  the  place  which  the  author 
of  the  following  chapters  holds  in  the  modern  develop- 
ment of  physical  science.  Then  I  shall  endeavor  to 
describe  for  the  reader,  as  simply  and  as  vividly  as 
I  can,  the  personality  of  Max  Planck — his  scientific 
career,  his  attitude  towards  the  function  of  theoretical 
physics  as  an  intellectual  force  in  the  modern  everyday 
world,  his  philosophy  of  life,  his  contemporary  activi- 
ties as  a  citizen  and  man  of  learning,  and  finally,  his 
place  and  prestige  among  his  own  people. 

The  first  part  of  this  task  will  be  best  discharged  if 
I  leave  it  to  a  few  leaders  amongst  Planck's  colleagues 
to  define  the  place  he  holds  in  the  general  picture  of 
modern  scientific  progress. 

What  significance  has  the  name  of  Max  Planck  in 
the  history  of  Physics?  The  answer  to  that  question 
can  be  indicated  by  pointing  to  the  position  which  a 
portrait  of  Max  Planck  would  occupy  in  a  pictorial 
representation  illustrating  the  development  of  science. 
At  the  end  of  a  long  gallery  there  is  a  turning  and  a 
wide  space  or  angle  of  the  wall.  On  that  space  the 


i6         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

portrait  of  Max  Planck  hangs,  with  one  hand  taking 
grateful  leave  of  the  classical  past  and  the  other 
pointing  to  a  new  corridor  where  the  paint  is  hardly 
yet  dry  on  the  portraits  that  hang  there — Einstein, 
Niels  Bohr,  Rutherford,  Dirac,  Eddington,  Jeans, 
Millikan,  Wilson,  Compton,  Heisenberg,  Schroed- 
inger,  etc.,  etc.  Sir  James  Jeans,  in  his  popular  little 
book  The  Mysterious  Universe,  describes  the  position 
thus: 1 

"At  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century  it  first  became 
possible  to  study  the  behavior  of  single  molecules, 
atoms  and  electrons.  The  century  had  lasted  just  long 
enough  for  science  to  discover  that  certain  phenomena, 
radiation  and  gravitation  in  particular,  defied  all  at- 
tempts at  a  purely  mechanical  explanation.  While 
philosophers  were  still  debating  whether  a  machine 
could  be  constructed  to  reproduce  the  thoughts  of 
Newton,  the  emotions  of  Bach  or  the  inspiration  of 
Michelangelo,  the  average  men  of  science  were  rapidly 
becoming  convinced  that  no  machine  could  be  con- 
structed to  reproduce  the  light  of  a  candle  or  the  fall 
of  an  apple.  Then,  in  the  closing  months  of  the  cen- 
tury, Professor  Max  Planck  of  Berlin  brought  forward 
a  tentative  explanation  of  certain  phenomena  of  radia- 
tion which  had  so  far  completely  defied  interpretation. 
Not  only  was  his  explanation  non-mechanical  in  its 
nature  j  it  seemed  impossible  to  connect  it  up  with  any 
mechanical  line  of  thought.  Largely  for  this  reason, 
it  was  criticized,  attacked  and  even  ridiculed.  But  it 

1  The  Mysterious  Universe,  1932  edition,  pp.  16  and  17. 


INTRODUCTION  17 

proved  brilliantly  successful,  and  ultimately  devel- 
oped into  the  modern  'quantum  theory,'  which  forms 
one  of  the  dominating  principles  of  modern  physics. 
Also,  although  this  was  not  apparent  at  the  time,  it 
marked  the  end  of  the  mechanical  age  in  science,  and 
the  opening  of  a  new  era." 

Another  British  scientist,  Lord  Rutherford,  gives  the 
following  estimate  of  his  German  colleague: 

"The  name  of  Planck  is  a  household  word  among 
the  scientific  men  of  all  countries  and  all  unite  in  their 
admiration  for  his  great  and  enduring  contributions  to 
Physical  Science. 

"It  is  difficult  to  realize  to-day,  when  the  quantum 
theory  is  successfully  applied  in  so  many  fields  of 
science,  how  strange  and  almost  fantastic  this  new  con- 
ception of  radiation  appeared  to  many  scientific  men 
thirty  years  ago.  It  was  difficult  at  first  to  obtain 
any  convincing  proof  of  the  correctness  of  the  theory 
and  the  deductions  that  followed  from  it.  In  this  con- 
nection I  may  refer  to  experiments  made  by  Professor 
Geiger  and  myself  in  1908.  On  my  side,  the  agree- 
ment with  Planck's  deduction  of  e  (e  is  the  elementary 
electric  charge  and  the  value  is  expressed  in  electro- 
static units)  made  me  an  early  adherent  to  the  gen- 
eral idea  of  a  quantum  of  action.  I  was  in  consequence 
able  to  view  witK  equanimity  and  even  to  encourage 
Professor  Bohr's  bold  application  of  the  quantum 
theory  propounded  by  Planck."  1 

The  significance  of  Planck's  achievement  is  thus 

1  Die  Naturwissenschaften,  Vol.  26,  p.  483. 


18         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

described  by  Niels  Bohr,  the  famous  Danish  physicist: 
"Scarcely  any  other  discovery  in  the  history  of 
science  has  produced  such  extraordinary  results  within 
the  short  span  of  our  generation  as  those  which  have 
directly  arisen  from  Max  Planck's  discovery  of  the 
elementary  quantum  of  action.  This  discovery  has  been 
prolific,  to  a  constantly  increasing  degree  of  progres- 
sion, in  furnishing  means  for  the  interpretation  and 
harmonizing  of  results  obtained  from  the  study  of 
atomic  phenomena,  which  is  a  study  that  has  made 
marvelous  progress  within  the  past  thirty  years.  But 
the  quantum  theory  has  done  something  more.  It  has 
brought  about  a  radical  revolution  in  the  scientific  in- 
terpretation of  natural  phenomena.  This  revolution  is 
a  direct  development  of  theories  and  concepts  which 
originated  from  the  pioneering  work  done  by  Max 
Planck  in  studying  cavity  radiation.  Within  the  past 
thirty  years  these  theories  and  concepts  have  grown 
and  expanded  into  that  scientific  elaboration  which  is 
called  quantum  physics.  The  picture  of  the  universe 
formed  on  the  lines  of  quantum  physics  must  be  looked 
upon  as  a  generalization  that  is  independent  of  classical 
physics,  with  which  it  compares  favorably  for  its  beauty 
of  conception  and  the  inner  harmony  of  its  logic. 

"I  should  like  emphatically  to  call  attention  to  the 
consequences  of  this  new  knowledge.  It  has  shattered 
the  foundations  of  our  ideas  not  only  in  the  realm  of 
classical  science  but  also  in  our  everyday  ways  of 
thinking.  It  is  to  this  emancipation  from  inherited 
traditions  of  thought  that  we  owe  the  wonderful 


INTRODUCTION  19 

progress  which  has  been  made  in  our  knowledge  of 
natural  phenomena  during  the  past  generation.  That 
progress  has  gone  beyond  even  the  highest  hopes  to 
which  it  gave  rise  a  few  years  ago.  And  the  present 
state  of  physical  science  can  probably  be  indicated  best 
by  saying  that  nearly  all  the  lines  of  thought  which 
have  led  to  fruitful  results  in  experimental  research 
have  naturally  blended  together  into  a  common  har- 
mony without  thereby  losing  their  individual  fertility. 
For  having  placed  in  our  hands  the  means  of  bring- 
ing about  these  results  the  discoverer  of  the  quantum 
theory  deserves  the  unqualified  gratitude  of  his 
colleagues!"  1 

One  name  more  will  be  sufficient  to  add  to  this 
distinguished  list.  It  is  that  of  Professor  Heisenberg, 
the  Leipzig  physicist,  who  is  the  founder  of  the  now 
popular  Theory  of  Indeterminacy.  Heisenberg  writes 
as  follows: 

"In  1900  Max  Planck  published  the  following 
statement:  Radiant  heat  is  not  a  continuous  flow  and 
indefinitely  divisible.  It  must  be  defined  as  a  discon- 
tinuous mass  made  uf  of  units  all  of  which  are  similar 
to  one  another. 

"At  that  time  he  could  scarcely  have  foreseen  that 
within  a  span  of  less  than  thirty  years  this  theory, 
which  flatly  contradicted  the  principles  of  physics 
hitherto  known,  would  have  developed  into  a  doctrine 
of  atomic  structure  which,  for  its  scientific  comprehen- 

1  Die  'Naturwissenschaften,  Vol.  26,  p.  490. 


20         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

siveness  and  mathematical  simplicity,  is  not  a  whit 
inferior  to  the  classical  scheme  of  theoretical  physics."  1 

Let  us  come  now  to  the  personal  story  of  Max  Planck 
himself.  He  was  born  at  Kiel,  Germany,  on  April  23, 
1858.  His  father  was  Professor  of  Constitutional  Law 
at  the  University  and  was  afterwards  transferred  to 
Goettingen  in  the  same  capacity.  The  chief  work 
whereby  his  name  is  known  is  the  Prussian  Civil  Code, 
of  which  he  is  co-author.  It  is  often  said  that  the  great 
physicist  has  inherited  certain  qualities  from  his  father, 
especially  the  juridical  faculty  of  sifting  experimental 
evidence,  disentangling  the  significant  from  the  mean- 
ingless and  probing  to  the  absolute  values  hidden 
beneath  the  relative.  He  has  also  a  faculty  for  con- 
structive clarity  in  building  up  a  mathematical  syn- 
thesis. But  perhaps  the  most  striking  quality  which 
he  has  derived  from  his  early  family  associations  is 
shown  in  his  attitude  towards  physical  science  as  a 
branch  of  human  culture,  forming  an  integral  part 
with  the  other  branches  of  human  learning  and  exer- 
cising its  influence  on  the  destiny  of  humanity  not 
merely  in  a  material  way  but  even  more  deeply  in  a 
spiritual  way. 

When  Max  Planck  was  seventeen  years  old  he 
entered  the  University  of  Munich,  taking  physics  as 
his  chief  subject.  Three  years  later  he  went  to  Berlin 
to  complete  his  course  at  the  University  there.  At  that 
time  Helmholtz  and  Kirchhoff  were  the  leading  sci- 

1  Die  Naturwissenschaften,  Vol.  26,  p.  490. 


INTRODUCTION 


21 


entific  lights  of  the  Prussian  Capital.  Kirchhoff  was 
Professor  of  Physics  at  the  University  and  young 
Planck  read  under  him  there,  also  attending  the  lec- 
tures of  Helmholtz  and  Weierstrass.  He  always  asserts 
that  Kirchhoff  was  responsible  for  his  keen  interest  in 
thermodynamics,  especially  the  famous  Second  Law.  It 
was  on  this  subject  that  Max  Planck  wrote  his  treatise 
for  the  doctorate,  which  he  presented  at  the  University 
of  Munich  a  year  later,  in  1879,  when  he  received 
the  doctorate  Summa  cum  Laude.  The  treatise  was 
entitled  De  secunda  lege  fundamentale  doctrinae 
mechanicae  colons.  Perhaps  I  ought  to  explain  here 
that  in  qualifying  for  the  taking  of  degrees  all  uni- 
versities in  Germany  are  treated  as  one.  A  student  may 
take  part  of  his  course  in  one  university  and  part  in 
another  j  so  that,  in  case  he  should  wish  to  follow 
some  special  line  of  work  in  which  there  is  an  eminent 
professor  in  some  university  away  from  his  home  town, 
he  can  attend  there  and  indeed  make  the  rounds  of  all 
the  eminent  professors  if  he  likes,  from  one  university 
to  another.  The  sum-total  will  be  credited  to  him  as  if 
he  had  studied  at  the  one  university  all  along. 

Having  received  his  doctorate,  Max  Planck  became 
a  Privat  Dozent  at  the  Munich  University.  The  Privat 
Dozent  is  a  university  lecturer  who  receives  fees  but 
no  salary.  In  1885  Planck  was  appointed  Professor 
of  Physics  at  the  University  of  Kiel  and  in  1889  he 
came  to  Berlin  as  Professor  Extraordinarius  there.  In 
1892  he  was  appointed  full  professor  in  succession  to 
Kirchhoff  at  the  University  of  Berlin.  In  191 2  he 


22         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

became  Permanent  Secretary  to  the  Prussian  Academy 
of  Science.  In  19 19  he  received  the  Nobel  Prize  for 
Physics.  And  in  1926  he  became  Professor  Emeritus, 
Schroedinger  succeeding  him  in  the  Berlin  Chair  of 
Theoretical  Physics.  In  1930  Adolf  Harnack  died  and 
Max  Planck  was  elected  President  of  the  Emperor 
William  Society  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
which  is  the  highest  academic  post  in  Germany. 

What  was  it  that  first  put  Planck  on  the  trail  of  the 
quantum?  That  would  be  a  rather  long  story  to  tell j 
for  the  telling  of  it  would  involve  an  account  of  the 
various  attempts  that  were  being  energetically  made 
towards  the  end  of  the  last  century  to  solve  the  spec- 
troscopic riddle  of  heat  radiation.  As  this  expression 
may  not  convey  a  very  clear  idea  to  the  mind  of  the 
average  reader,  it  will  be  well  to  explain  it  a  little. 

Everybody  is  acquainted  with  the  solar  spectrum, 
which  results  in  the  breaking  up  of  white  light  by 
passing  it  through  a  prism,  thus  producing  a  spectrum 
of  colored  rays  which  group  themselves  on  the  screen 
and  run  continuously  from  red  to  violet.  Newton  was 
the  first  to  handle  the  phenomenon  in  a  scientific  man- 
ner, and  this  led  to  the  great  problem  of  the  nature 
of  light  itself.  In  the  case  of  heat  radiation  we  have 
a  corresponding  phenomenon.  Sir  William  Herschel 
was  the  first  to  show  that  the  solar  spectrum  is  not 
confined  to  that  part  which  is  visible  to  the  eye,  from 
the  red  to  the  violet.  In  1 800  he  discovered  that  there 
are  infra-red  solar  rays.  By  applying  a  thermometer  to 
the  successive  colors  he  discovered  an  uneven  distri- 


INTRODUCTION  23 

bution  of  heat  in  the  solar  spectrum,  the  heat  being 
greatest  below  the  red.  This  inequality  had  never 
previously  been  suspected. 

Now  it  is  a  matter  of  everyday  experience  that  a 
body  when  moderately  heated  gives  out  an  invisible 
radiation.  The  frequency  of  the  undulations  is  too  low 
to  influence  the  eye.  As  the  temperature  is  gradually 
increased,  in  a  piece  of  iron,  for  instance,  one  might 
expect  that  violet  rays  would  first  be  perceptible,  as 
these  have  the  minimum  wave-length  which  is  neces- 
sary to  stimulate  the  sense  of  sight.  But  that  is  not  what 
happens.  The  light  is  at  first  dull  red,  then  bright  red, 
and  finally  becomes  glowing  white.  Now  the  question 
here  is,  how  does  the  intensity  of  the  rays  of  different 
frequency  change  with  the  rising  temperature?  This 
is  what  is  called  the  problem  of  the  spectral  distribu- 
tion of  radiation  for  different  temperatures.  It  is  the 
problem  to  which  Max  Planck  devoted  the  first  twenty 
years  of  his  academic  career.  In  his  address  before  the 
Royal  Swedish  Academy  of  Science  in  Stockholm,  on 
the  occasion  of  receiving  the  Nobel  Prize,  he  said: 

"Looking  back  over  the  past  twenty  years  to  the 
time  when  the  idea  of  the  physical  quantum  of  action, 
and  the  measurement  of  it,  first  emerged  into  definite 
shape  from  a  mass  of  experimental  facts,  and  looking 
back  beyond  that  over  the  long  and  labyrinthine  path 
which  finally  led  to  the  discovery,  I  am  vividly  re- 
minded of  Goethe's  saying  that  men  will  always  be 
making  mistakes  as  long  as  they  are  striving  after 
something.  During  such  a  long  and  difficult  struggle 


24         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  researcher  might  be  tempted  again  and  again  to 
abandon  his  efforts  as  vain  and  fruitless,  except  that 
every  now  and  then  a  light  strikes  across  his  path 
which  furnishes  him  with  irrefutable  proof  that,  after 
all  his  mistakes  in  taking  one  by-path  after  another, 
he  has  at  least  made  one  step  forward  towards  the  dis- 
covery of  the  truth  that  he  is  seeking.  The  steadfast 
pursuance  of  one  aim  and  purpose  is  indispensable  to 
the  researcher  and  that  aim  will  always  light  his  way, 
even  though  sometimes  it  may  be  dimmed  by  initial 
failures. 

"The  aim  which  I  had  for  so  long  before  my  mind 
was  the  solution  of  the  distribution  of  energy  in  the 
normal  spectrum  of  radiant  heat.  Gustav  Kirchhoff  had 
shown  that  the  nature  of  heat  radiation  is  completely 
independent  of  the  character  of  the  radiating  bodies. 
This  pointed  to  the  existence  of  a  universal  function 
which  must  be  dependent  exclusively  on  temperature 
and  wave-length  but  in  no  way  dependent  on  the 
properties  of  the  substance  in  question.  If  this  remark- 
able function  could  be  discovered  it  might  give  a 
deeper  understanding  of  the  relationship  between 
energy  and  temperature,  which  forms  the  main  prob- 
lem of  thermodynamics  and  consequently  of  molecular 
physics  as  a  whole.  At  that  time  no  way  suggested  itself 
of  discovering  this  function  except  to  select  from  the 
various  bodies  in  nature  certain  kinds  of  bodies  whose 
capacities  for  emitting  and  absorbing  heat  are  known 
and  then  to  calculate  the  heat  radiation  when  the  ex- 
change of  temperature  is  stationary.  According  to  Kirch- 


INTRODUCTION  25 

hoff's  theory,  this  must  be  independent  of  the  nature 
of  the  body  itself." 

He  then  traced  in  a  modest  and  objective  way  the 
rocky  road  that  he  had  followed,  the  slips  and  falls  by 
the  wayside,  the  discouragement,  but  always  the  per- 
sistent effort  and  the  determination  to  win  through. 
Finally  the  goal  was  reached,  after  a  long  journey  of 
twenty  years. 

Planck  first  presented  the  results  of  his  discovery 
in  a  communication  to  the  German  Physical  Society, 
on  December  14,  1900.  His  paper  was  entitled  "On 
the  Distribution  of  Energy  in  a  Normal  Spectrum." 
The  discovery  of  the  function  mentioned  above  had 
been  arrived  at  in  the  shape  of  a  formula  for  measuring 
radiant  energy.  He  had  experimented  with  what  is 
known  as  cavity  radiation.  This  means  that  he  heated 
a  hollow  body  to  incandescence  and  allowed  a  beam 
of  radiation  to  issue  through  a  small  opening  and 
analyzed  the  beam  in  the  spectroscope.  In  this  way  it 
was  found  that  radiant  energy  is  not  a  continuous  flow. 
It  is  emitted  in  integral  quantities,  or  quanta,  which 
can  be  expressed  in  integral  numbers.  In  other  words, 
the  measurement  always  results  in  integral  multiples 
of  h  v,  where  v  is  the  frequency  and  h  is  a  universal 
constant,  now  known  as  Planck's  constant.  His  greatest 
triumph  of  technical  skill  was  in  deducing  the  value  of 
this  constant  to  be  6.55  X  io-27  erg-seconds.  No  radia- 
tion can  be  emitted  unless  it  is  of  at  least  that  amount 
or  an  integral  multiple  thereof.  That  is  to  say,  our 
stove  cannot  give  us  any  heat  until  it  has  accumulated 


26         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

at  least  that  amount.  Then  it  will  not  increase  the 
radiation  of  its  heat  until  it  accumulates  another  in- 
tegral packet  which  is  exactly  double  that  amount,  and 
so  on.  We  can  have  1  h  v  and  3  h  v  and  4  h  v;  but 
we  cannot  have  any  fractional  parts  of  h  v.  This  in- 
volved a  revolutionary  concept  for  radiation  of  heat, 
and  the  concept  was  eventually  shown  to  extend  to  all 
radiation  and  finally  to  the  interior  structure  of  the 
atom  itself. 

It  soon  became  evident  that  Planck  had  brought  to 
light  something  that  not  merely  explained  the  puzzle 
of  the  spectrum  of  radiant  heat  but  something  that  is 
universally  fundamental  in  nature.  This  was  shown 
by  the  gradual  application  of  his  theory  in  all  directions. 
Within  a  few  years  after  its  promulgation  Einstein 
applied  the  quantum  theory  to  explain  the  constitution 
of  light  and  showed  that  light  follows  the  same 
process  as  heat  radiation  and  is  emitted  in  parcels  or 
quanta,  called  photons.  Physicists  in  every  country 
began  to  practice  the  technique  of  "Quantizing"  and 
achieved  very  remarkable  results.  H.  A.  Lorentz,  the 
famous  Dutch  scientist,  put  the  case  thus  in  1925: 

"We  have  now  advanced  so  far  that  this  constant 
(Planck's  universal  h)  not  only  furnishes  the  basis  for 
explaining  the  intensity  of  radiation  and  the  wave- 
length for  which  it  represents  a  maximum,  but  also 
for  interpreting  the  quantitative  relations  existing  in 
several  other  cases  among  the  many  physical  quantities 
it  determines.  I  shall  mention  only  a  fewj  namely, 
the  specific  heat  of  solids,  the  photo-chemical  effects 


INTRODUCTION  27 

of  light,  the  orbits  of  electrons  in  the  atom,  the  wave- 
lengths of  the  lines  of  the  spectrum,  the  frequency  of 
the  Roentgen  rays  which  are  produced  by  the  impact 
of  electrons  of  given  velocity,  the  velocity  with  which 
gas  molecules  can  rotate,  and  also  the  distances  be- 
tween the  particles  which  make  up  a  crystal.  It  is  no 
exaggeration  to  say  that  in  our  picture  of  nature  now- 
adays it  is  the  quantum  conditions  that  hold  matter 
together  and  prevent  it  from  completely  losing  its 
energy  by  radiation.  It  is  convincingly  clear  that  we 
are  here  dealing  with  real  relations  because  the  values 
of  h  as  derived  from  the  different  phenomena  always 
agree,  and  these  values  differ  only  by  slight  shades 
from  the  number  which  Planck  computed  twenty-five 
years  ago  on  the  experimental  data  that  were  then 
available."  1 

It  is  not  the  place  here  to  attempt  an  explanation 
of  the  scientific  aspects  of  the  quantum  theory.  The 
reader  will  find  several  popular  accounts — some  of 
them  perhaps  all  too  popular — of  Planck's  revolu- 
tionary theory  in  various  books  on  modern  science. 
My  task  here  is  rather  to  indicate  the  source  from 
which  the  material  of  this  book  has  originated  and  try 
to  explain  why  it  is  that  Planck  has  felt  the  need  to 
assert  himself  so  strongly  in  dealing  with  certain  philo- 
sophical aspects  of  contemporary  science.  Most  of  the 
essays  here — the  discussion  on  positivism  and  the  dis- 
cussion on  determinism  and  free  will — are  outside  the 
sphere  of  pure  physics.  Why  is  it  that  the  doyen  of 

1  Die  Naturwissenschaften,  Vol.  35,  1925,  p.  1008. 


28  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

German  physicists  has  felt  himself  called  upon  to  take 
so  strong  a  stand? 

A  great  deal  has  been  written  about  the  philosophical 
implications  of  the  quantum  theory.  Some  of  the  physi- 
cists declare  categorically  that  the  development  of  the 
quantum  theory  has  led  to  the  overthrow  of  the  prin- 
ciple of  causation  as  an  axiom  in  scientific  research. 
Sir  James  Jeans  puts  this  side  of  the  question  as 
follows: 

"Einstein  showed  in  19 17  that  the  theory  founded 
by  Planck  appeared,  at  first  sight  at  least,  to  entail 
consequences  far  more  revolutionary  than  mere  dis- 
continuity. It  appeared  to  dethrone  the  law  of  causation 
from  the  position  it  had  heretofore  held  as  guiding 
the  course  of  the  natural  world.  The  old  science  had 
confidently  proclaimed  that  nature  could  follow  only 
one  road,  the  road  which  was  mapped  out  from  the 
beginning  of  time  to  its  end  by  the  continuous  chain 
of  cause  and  effect;  state  A  was  inevitably  succeeded 
by  state  B.  So  far  the  new  science  has  only  been  able 
to  say  that  state  A  may  be  followed  by  state  B  or  C 
or  D  or  by  innumerable  other  states.  It  can,  it  is  true, 
say  that  B  is  more  likely  than  C,  C  than  D,  and  so 
on;  it  can  even  specify  the  relative  probabilities  of 
states  B,  C  and  D.  But,  just  because  it  has  to  speak 
in  terms  of  probabilities,  it  cannot  predict  with  cer- 
tainty which  state  will  follow  which;  this  is  a  matter 
which  lies  on  the  knees  of  the  gods — whatever  gods 
there  be." 1 

1  The  Mysterious  Universe,  1932,  pp.  17  and  18. 


INTRODUCTION  29 

Further  on  Sir  James  Jeans  states: 

"Or  again,  to  take  another  analogy,  it  is  almost  as 
though  the  joints  of  the  universe  had  somehow  worked 
loose,  as  though  its  mechanism  had  developed  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  'play,'  such  as  we  find  in  a  well-worn 
engine.  Yet  the  analogy  is  misleading  if  it  suggests 
that  the  universe  is  in  any  way  worn  out  or  imperfect. 
In  an  old  or  worn  engine,  the  degree  of  'play'  or  'loose 
jointedness'  varies  from  point  to  point  j  in  the  natural 
world  it  is  measured  by  the  mysterious  quantity  known 
as  'Planck's  constant  hyy  which  proves  to  be  absolutely 
uniform  throughout  the  universe.  Its  value,  both  in 
the  laboratory  and  in  the  stars,  can  be  measured  in 
innumerable  ways,  and  always  proves  to  be  precisely 
the  same.  Yet  the  fact  that  'loose  jointedness,'  of  any 
type  whatever,  pervades  the  whole  universe  destroys 
the  case  for  absolutely  strict  causation,  this  latter  being 
the  characteristic  of  perfectly  fitting  machinery."  1 

The  italics  are  mine.  Sir  James  Jeans's  assertion  is 
illustrative  of  an  attitude  that  is  fairly  common  among 
modern  physicists.  But  it  is  an  attitude  to  which  Planck 
is  stoutly  opposed.  Scientifically  considered,  it  is  pre- 
mature $  and,  logically  considered,  it  is  too  much  of 
a  jump  towards  a  sweeping  conclusion.  Planck  would 
claim,  and  so  would  Einstein,  that  it  is  not  the  prin- 
ciple of  causation  itself  which  has  broken  down  in 
modern  physics,  but  rather  the  traditional  formulation 
of  it.  The  principle  of  causation  is  one  thing  $  but  the 
way  in  which  it  was  formulated  by  Aristotle  and  the 

1The  Mysterious  Universe,  1932,  p.  24. 


30         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

Scholastics  and  Newton  and  Kant  is  quite  another 
thing.  As  applied  to  happenings  in  nature,  whether  in 
the  sphere  of  mind  or  of  matter,  the  traditional  formu- 
lation must  be  considered  rather  too  rough-and-ready. 
In  the  discussion  appended  to  this  book  the  latter  point 
will  be  examined  somewhat  more  sharply.  What  is  of 
chief  interest  here  is  to  ask  why  Planck  considers  the 
causal  controversy  of  so  much  importance  that  he 
spends  a  considerable  portion  of  his  time  to-day — and 
he  is  a  very  busy  man — in  the  delivery  of  lectures  and 
the  writing  of  essays  on  it.  Why  does  he  assert  him- 
self so  emphatically  on  this  point?  The  answer  cannot 
be  that  he  is  a  stickler  for  the  authority  of  tradition  5 
because,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  he  has  headed  the  greatest 
revolt  in  modern  science.  The  answer  therefore  must 
be  looked  for  in  a  different  direction. 

At  the  present  time  there  is  a  wave  of  public  inter- 
est in  physical  science.  It  arose  immediately  after  the 
war  and  shows  no  signs  of  receding.  This  is  undoubt- 
edly due  to  the  fact  that  physical  science  is  the  most 
vital  expression  of  the  higher  activities  of  human 
thought  to-day.  Moreover  the  metaphysical  content  of 
the  higher  speculations  in  theoretical  physics  seems  to 
be  the  favorite  modern  pabulum  for  the  soul-hunger 
which  was  formerly  appeased  by  the  ideals  of  art  and 
religion.  From  many  points  of  view,  this  may  be  a 
fortunate  thing ;  but  from  other  points  of  view  it  may 
be  a  misfortune,  especially  from  the  scientific  point  of 
view.  Edwin  Schroedinger  has  recently  published  a 
brilliant  essay  (Ist  die  Naturwissenschaft  Milieube- 


INTRODUCTION  $i 

dingt?  Barth,  Leipzig,  1932)  in  which  he  suggests 
that  physical  science  has  fallen  a  victim  to  the  Zeitgeist. 
To-day  the  Umsturzbedürfnis  (The  need  for  some- 
thing radically  different  from  the  established  order) 
is  a  universal  feature  of  our  civilization.  The  authority 
of  tradition  is  a  drawback  rather  than  a  recommenda- 
tion in  the  case  of  principles  or  methods  hitherto  domi- 
nant in  art  or  music  or  even  politics  and  business.  And 
we  find  this  same  devaluation  influencing  scientific 
ideas.  When  Einstein  promulgated  his  relativity  theory 
much  of  the  enthusiasm  with  which  it  was  proclaimed 
was  associated  with  the  impression  that  it  constituted 
a  complete  overthrow  of  Newtonian  doctrines ;  whereas, 
as  a  matter  of  fact,  relativity  is  an  expansion  and  re- 
finement of  Newtonian  physics.  And  so  when  Heisen- 
berg proclaimed  his  Principle  of  Indeterminacy  it  was 
almost  immediately  interpreted,  even  among  physicists 
themselves,  as  definitely  effecting  an  overthrow  of  the 
causation  principle.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  we  have  no 
means  whatsoever  of  proving  or  disproving  the  ex- 
istence of  causation  in  the  external  world  of  nature. 
And  the  aim  which  Heisenberg  had  before  his  mind 
in  formulating  the  Principle  of  Indeterminacy  was  to 
find  a  rule  whereby  we  can  deal  with  minute  processes 
in  natural  phenomena,  such  as  those  in  which  the 
elementary  quantum  of  action  is  involved.  Here  the 
causal  principle  is  not  applicable.  That  is  to  say,  we 
cannot  estimate  simultaneously  both  the  velocity  and 
position  in  time-space  of  a  particle  and  say  where  it 
will  be  a  moment  hence.  But  this  does  not  mean  that 


32         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  causal  sequence  is  not  actually  verified  objectively. 
It  means  that  we  cannot  detect  its  operation  j  because, 
as  things  stand  to-day,  our  research  instruments  and 
our  mental  equipment  are  not  adequate  to  the  task. 
The  Principle  of  Indeterminacy  is  in  reality  an  alter- 
native working  hypothesis  which  takes  the  place  of  the 
strictly  causal  method  in  quantum  physics.  But  Heisen- 
berg himself  would  be  one  of  the  first  to  protest 
against  the  idea  of  interpreting  his  Principle  of  Inde- 
terminacy as  tantamount  to  a  denial  of  the  principle 
of  causation. 

Why  is  it  then  that  this  hasty  conclusion  is  so  much 
in  vogue?  It  is  probably  due  to  two  things:  First  the 
Zeitgeist.  The  spirit  of  the  age  does  not  want  to  be 
considered  the  heir  of  the  old  order  and  wants  to 
consider  itself  free  from  all  laws  handed  down  through 
the  authority  of  tradition.  Secondly,  the  standardization 
of  modern  life,  with  its  mass  production  and  high- 
powered  salesmanship  and  advertisement  and  transport 
and  mass  housing  and  insurance  undertakings,  etc.,  has 
evolved  a  system  of  statistical  rules  which  are  true 
when  masses  of  events  are  concerned,  though  they  are 
not  at  all  applicable  to  the  individual.  People  call  this 
the  principle  of  statistical  causality.  Physicists  have 
brought  it  over  into  their  science  and  often  speak  of 
it  as  the  opposite  of  strict  causation  in  the  classical 
sense.  They  speak  of  statistical  causation  as  opposed  to 
dynamical  causation.  But,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  statis- 
tical causality  and  even  what  are  called  the  laws  of 
probability  are  all  based  on  the  presupposition  of  strict  j 


INTRODUCTION  33 

causation  in  the  individual  cases  dealt  with.  According 
to  the  statistical  causality  principle  of  insurance  com- 
panies, so  many  thousand  people  die  of  certain  diseases 
in  the  year,  at  certain  ages  and  in  certain  professions. 
It  is  on  the  basis  of  these  statistics  that  insurance  poli- 
cies are  drawn  up.  But  these  statistics  have  nothing  to 
do  with  the  actual  cause  of  death  in  the  case  of  the 
individual  insured. 

Now,  anybody  who  has  the  interests  of  his  own  art 
or  science  at  heart  will  strive  to  protect  it  against  adul- 
teration through  the  intrusion  of  principles  and  methods 
which  are  foreign  to  it.  That  is  exactly  Planck's  posi- 
tion in  regard  to  physical  science.  If  we  are  living 
at  a  time  that  is  breaking  away  from  the  old  political 
and  social  traditions,  this  is  fundamentally  because  the 
old  traditions  are  not  suitable  to  the  changed  economic, 
and  therefore  social,  order  in  which  we  live.  But 
scientific  research  is  something  that  has  to  be  carried  on 
apart  from  the  changing  circumstances  of  human  ex- 
istence. It  is  natural,  of  course,  that  the  public  mind 
should  turn  to  that  branch  of  our  spiritual  culture 
which  is  the  most  vital  to-day,  namely  physical  science, 
and  seek  in  it  a  foint  d'appui  for  the  general  world- 
outlook.  But  this  very  fact  alone,  flattering  as  it  may 
be  for  the  individual  scientist,  endangers  the  integrity 
of  the  science  in  question. 

It  is  from  this  source  that  Planck's  interest  in  the 
causality  controversy  arises.  And  it  is  in  this  light  too 
that  we  are  to  view  his  attitude  towards  the  positivist 
thesis.  The  undue  popularization  of  physical  science 


34  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

has  probably  tempted  some  physicists  hastily  to  build 
up  a  theoretical  structure  wherein  the  public  mind  may 
find  a  congenial  object  of  awe  and  wonderment  and, 
in  a  sense,  worship,  such  as  in  former  days  was  sup- 
plied by  the  mysteries  of  religion.  This  may  explain 
that  phase  of  modern  theoretical  science  which  some- 
what resembles  the  sophist  phase  into  which  Greek 
philosophy  degenerated  and  which  also  characterized 
the  decadence  of  the  scholastic  movement.  It  was  this 
latter  decadence  that  instigated  the  founding  of  the 
empiricist  school  in  England  at  the  time  of  Locke,  for 
the  purpose  of  reconstructing  a  reliable  basis  of  philo- 
sophic thought.  We  have  a  similar  movement  in  physi- 
cal science  to-day,  with  a  similar  purpose  in  view. 
There  are  some  physicists  who  would  reduce  the  scope 
of  physical  science  to  a  bald  description  of  the  events 
scientifically  discovered  as  occurring  in  nature,  and 
would  entirely  exclude  all  theory  and  hypothesis- 
building.  Planck  feels  that  this  restriction  of  scope  is 
anti-scientific  and  very  much  to  the  detriment  of 
physics.  That  is  why  he  is  so  stoutly  opposed  to  it.  As 
the  doyen  of  international  physicists  he  feels  within 
his  rights  in  taking  up  the  cudgels  against  the  renun- 
ciatory movement.  That  he  voices  the  mind  of  leading 
German  scientists  in  this  regard  I  am  quite  convinced. 
Not  long  ago  I  happened  to  be  at  dinner  with  a  num- 
ber of  Planck's  colleagues  at  Goettingen.  Hermann 
Weyl  was  there,  and  Max  Born,  and  James  Franck.  i 
Planck  was  mentioned  a  great  deal  and  there  was  some  I 
rather  lively  discussion  about  his  intransigence  on  the 


INTRODUCTION  35 

causation  principle,  but  one  and  all  agreed  in  cham- 
pioning his  stand  against  the  positivist  teaching. 

As  this  is  a  sort  of  close-up  sketch,  for  the  purpose 
of  bringing  the  personality  of  the  author  of  the 
quantum  theory  vividly  before  the  mind  of  the  reader, 
I  shall  conclude  with  a  few  remarks  on  Planck's  per- 
sonal standing  among  his  colleagues.  He  is  undoubtedly 
the  most  popular  figure  in  the  academic  world  of  Ger- 
many. Indeed  one  may  say  without  the  slightest  fear 
of  exaggeration  that  he  is  the  beloved  of  his  colleagues. 
Professor  Sommerfeld  of  Munich,  whose  name  is  also 
renowned  in  the  realm  of  quantum  physics,  wrote  of 
Planck  some  time  ago:  "His  doctor's  diploma  (in 
1879)  bore  the  superscription  Summa  Cum  Laude.  We 
would  write  the  same  superscription  over  his  work 
during  the  whole  fifty  years  that  have  elapsed  since 
then,  and  not  for  his  scientific  work  alone  but  also  for 
his  human  example.  He  has  never  written  a  word  that 
was  not  genuine.  And  in  polemical  questions  he  has 
always  been  chivalrous  to  his  opponent.  When  the  Ger- 
man Physical  Society  was  being  reorganized  there  was 
dissension  and  antagonism;  but  Planck  was  the  trusted 
representative  of  both  sides,  the  naturally  fair-minded 
arbiter." 

Sommerfeld  tells  a  story  about  Planck  that  is  illus- 
trative of  the  unselfish  and  modest  manner  in  which 
he  is  always  ready  to  collaborate  with  his  colleagues. 
Sommerfeld  was  once  engaged  on  some  research  con- 
cerning what  is  known  as  Phase-space  in  atomic 
physics.  He  wrote  to  Planck  for  assistance  and  Planck 


36         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

immediately  placed  at  his  disposal  the  results  of  his 
own  experiments  in  the  same  field.  Sommerfeld  fell 
into  a  poetical  strain  and  sent  a  couplet  to  Planck  in 
which  he  explained  that  he  himself  was  only  putting 
forth  a  humble  endeavor  to  gather  a  few  flowers  in 
the  great  new  land  of  quantum  physics  which  Planck 
had  turned  from  an  unknown  wilderness  into  arable 
ground. 

Der  sorgsam  urbar  macht  das  neue  Land 

Dieweil  ich  hier  und  da  ein  Blumenstraueschen  fand. 

To  this  delightful  compliment  Planck  replied  with  a 
quatrain  in  a  still  more  gentle  spirit. 

Was  Du  gefflueckt,  was  ich  gefflueckt 
Das  wollen  wir  verbinden^ 
Und  weil  sich  eins  zum  andern  schickt 
Den  sc  ho  ens  ten  Kranz  draus  winden. 

(What  you  have  picked  and  I  have  picked, 
These  we  shall  bind  together. 
Entwining  thus  a  fair  bouquet 
From  gifts  we  send  each  other.) 

In  the  modest  little  account  which  Planck  gave  of 
himself  before  the  Royal  Swedish  Academy  on  the 
occasion  of  receiving  the  Nobel  Prize,  he  mentioned 
a  tragedy  which  has  afflicted  his  family  life.  This  was 
the  loss  of  his  two  daughters,  both  of  whom  died  soon 
after  marriage,  one  might  almost  say  in  their  bridal 
robes,  and  the  loss  of  a  very  gifted  son  in  the  war. 
Another  son  was  wounded  but  has  survived  and  is 
now  a  Minister  in  the  von  Papen  Cabinet. 


INTRODUCTION  37 

When  conversing  with  Planck  even  on  scientific  sub- 
jects one  often  feels  that  this  tragedy  of  his  children 
has  made  a  deep  impress  on  his  soul.  The  memory  of 
it  seems  to  evoke  a  certain  wistful  quality  which  is 
profound  in  his  nature  and  gives  it  the  warmer  glow 
that  one  is  inclined  to  call  mystic.  And  indeed,  though 
a  scientist  and  a  perfectly  practical  man  of  the  world 
and  an  up-to-date  gentleman  in  manner  and  dress  and 
also  a  sportsman,  who  climbed  the  Jungfrau  to  cele- 
brate his  seventy-second  birthday  a  few  years  ago — 
still  one  often  thinks  of  him  in  conjunction  with 
Beethoven,  I  don't  know  why,  and  one  remembers 
that  at  the  beginning  of  Planck's  career  there  was  a 
question  whether  he  would  develop  the  musical  side 
of  his  genius  or  the  scientific  side.  He  developed  the 
latter.  But  he  could  not  develop  the  one  without  en- 
riching the  other  also,  because  the  pursuit  of  theoretical 
science  demands  as  its  first  prerequisite  the  construc- 
tive imagination  of  the  artist.  And  the  constant  seeking 
after  nature's  harmonies  responds  to  the  longing  for 
musical  expression.  Anyhow  it  is  a  significant  fact  that 
the  two  greatest  scientists  in  Germany,  Einstein  and 
Planck,  are  musicians  also. 

On  visiting  his  home  in  the  Wangenheimer  Strasse, 
Berlin,  and  chatting  with  him  in  that  big  room  which 
is  at  once  his  reception  parlor  and  study,  I  often  think 
that  his  own  private  trials  have  been  sublimated  by  the 
tragedy  of  his  country  and  this  in  its  turn  sublimated 
by  the  universal  tragedy  of  the  modern  world.  For  on 
this  he  broods  more  than  most  busy  men  do.  But  the 


38  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

moment  the  first  cloud  of  depression  shows  itself  he 
counters  it  with  his  favorite  motto,  Man  muss  optimist 
sein.  We  must  be  optimists.  He  has  said  that  the  in- 
scription on  the  gate  of  the  temple  of  science  indi- 
cating the  condition  on  which  alone  her  devotees  may 
enter,  is:  Ye  must  have  Faith.  Running  through  all  his 
work  and  all  that  he  has  said  or  says  there  is  always 
this  golden  thread  of  a  living  faith  in  the  ultimate 
purposes  of  creation. 


WHERE  IS 
SCIENCE  GOING? 


CHAPTER  I 
FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE 


HERE  I  shall  give  a  short  sketch  of  physical  science 
in  Germany  during  the  period  of  my  own  active 
work  in  that  field.  For  the  sake  of  clarity  it  will  be  better 
if  we  ignore  the  chronological  sequence  of  events  and  try 
to  trace  the  main  lines  along  which  the  various  specific 
groups  of  ideas  have  developed.  While  doing  this  I  shall 
take  into  account  also  the  cooperative  work  done  by 
scientists  in  other  countries.  And  if  I  mention  certain 
names,  while  leaving  out  many  others  quite  as  eminent  if 
not  more  so,  these  names  will  be  cited  merely  as  land- 
marks to  indicate  a  particular  stage  or  turning-point, 
without  any  suggestion  whatsoever  of  making  a  personal 
valuation  of  the  work  done  by  the  scientist  mentioned. 

Let  us  take  the  year  1 8  80  as  our  starting-point.  At  that 
time  four  great  names  shone  out  above  all  others  to 
illuminate  the  direction  along  which  physical  inquiry  was 
advancing.  These  were:  Hermann  von  Helmholtz, 
Gustav  Kirchhoff,  Rudolf  Clausius  and  Ludwig  Boltz- 
mann.  The  two  former  were  the  chief  luminaries  in  the 
contiguous  provinces  of  mechanics  and  electrodynamics, 
while  the  two  latter  were  prominent  in  the  associated 
spheres  of  thermodynamics  and  atomic  physics.  But  there 

41 


42         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

was  really  no  dividing  space  between  the  activities  of 
those  four  pioneers.  They  represented  a  concept  of  the 
physical  universe  which  was  common  to  them  all  and 
towards  which  their  attitudes  were  in  the  closest  harmony. 
That  common  concept  rested  on  a  twofold  foundation. 
One  part  of  the  foundation  consisted  of  Hamilton's 
Principle  of  Least  Action,  which  includes  the  Principle 
of  Conservation  of  Energy.  The  second  part  of  the 
foundation  represented  the  Second  Law  of  Thermo- 
dynamics. 

At  that  time  it  was  considered  by  all  physicists  as  prac- 
tically certain  that  any  subsequent  development  in 
theoretical  physics  must  necessarily  be  in  the  direction  of 
working  out  those  two  universal  principles  to  their  final 
conclusion  and  application.  Nobody  then  dreamt  that 
within  a  short  period  of  time  the  two  principles  which 
stood  so  proudly  alone  in  supporting  the  structure  of 
physical  science  would  have  to  take  other  principles  into 
partnership  on  an  independent  and  equal  footing. 

The  advent  of  these  new  principles  was  already  fore- 
shadowed in  some  of  the  ideas  put  forward  by  the  older 
pioneers  whom  I  have  mentioned  and  also  in  the  tenden- 
cies of  those  who  then  represented  the  rising  generation. 
Heinrich  Hertz  was  the  most  outstanding  among  the  lat- 
ter. He  stands  at  the  opening  of  the  new  era  and  it  would 
be  impossible  to  overestimate  his  services  to  the  cause  of 
modern  physics.  Unfortunately  his  work  was  cut  short 
by  an  early  death,  at  the  age  of  thirty-four,  while  he  was 
still  active  as  Professor  of  Theoretical  Physics  at  the 
University  of  Bonn.  Despite  his  epoch-making  discovery 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  43 

of  the  propagation  of  electromagnetic  waves  through  a 
vacuum,  Hertz  was  not  the  founder  of  a  new  scientific 
doctrine.  What  he  achieved  was  to  bring  an  already  exist- 
ing theory  to  its  completion,  for  he  finally  established  the 
Maxwell  theory  of  light  and  thus  displaced  all  the  various 
other  theories  which  for  a  long  time  had  been  struggling 
against  one  another  for  precedence  in  the  field  of  electro- 
dynamics. By  reason  of  these  achievements  Hertz  must 
be  credited  with  the  accomplishment  of  a  very  important 
advance  towards  the  unification  of  theoretical  physics,  for 
he  thus  brought  optics  and  electrodynamics  under  the  one 
doctrinal  discipline. 

His  last  work  was  the  simplification  of  Newtonian 
mechanics  to  an  ideal  degree.  In  Newtonian  mechanics 
the  distinction  had  always  been  drawn  between  kinetic 
and  potential  energy  as  essentially  different  entities. 
Hertz  succeeded  in  unifying  this  bipartite  concept,  which 
he  did  by  fundamentally  eliminating  the  idea  of  a  force. 
The  Newtonian  force  was  identified  by  Hertz  with  in- 
ternal motion  in  matter,  so  that  what  had  hitherto  been 
called  potential  energy  was  now  replaced  by  the  kinetic 
concept.  Hertz  however  never  attempted  to  explain  the 
nature  of  these  inner  motions  in  any  particular  direction, 
such  as  gravitation  for  instance.  He  contented  himself 
with  establishing  in  principle  the  hypothesis  of  unifica- 
tion. 

If  we  make  allowance  for  certain  theories  that  were 
still  only  in  what  may  be  called  a  rudimentary  stage  of 
development,  we  can  say  that  at  the  end  of  the  last  cen- 
tury the  science  of  theoretical  physics  as  a  whole  presented 


44  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  imposing  aspect  of  a  complete  and  perfectly  articu- 
lated structure.  A  penetrating  observer  however  could 
not  have  failed  to  notice  that  in  some  sections  of  the 
foundation  there  were  open  flaws  which  could  not  be 
looked  upon  with  anything  like  satisfaction.  Hertz  did 
not  fail  to  see  this.  And  he  did  not  fail  to  call  attention 
to  the  fact  that  the  integration  of  the  structure  here  would 
prove  at  least  very  difficult  if  not  impossible.  These  flaws 
soon  became  the  object  of  attack  on  the  part  of  scientific 
criticism.  And  this  criticism  developed  into  a  creative 
movement  which  eventually  brought  about  the  most  im- 
portant expansion  that  theoretical  physics  has  experienced 
since  the  time  of  Newton. 

No  doctrinal  system  in  physical  science,  or  indeed  per- 
haps in  any  science,  will  alter  its  content  of  its  own  accord. 
Here  we  always  need  the  pressure  of  outer  circumstances. 
Indeed  the  more  intelligible  and  comprehensive  a  theo- 
retical system  is  the  more  obstinately  it  will  resist  all  at- 
tempts at  reconstruction  or  expansion.  And  this  is  because 
in  a  synthesis  of  thought  where  there  is  an  all-round  logi- 
cal coherence  any  alteration  in  one  part  of  the  structure  is 
bound  to  upset  other  parts  also.  For  instance,  the  main 
difficulty  about  the  acceptance  of  the  relativity  theory  was 
not  merely  a  question  of  its  objective  merits  but  rather  the 
question  of  how  far  it  would  upset  the  Newtonian  struc- 
ture of  theoretical  dynamics.  The  fact  is  that  no  alteration 
in  a  well-built  synthesis  of  thought  can  be  effected  unless 
strong  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  upon  it  from  outside. 
This  strong  pressure  must  come  from  a  well-constructed 
body  of  theory  which  has  been  firmly  consolidated  by 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  45 

the  test  of  experimental  research.  It  is  only  thus  that  we 
can  bring  about  the  surrender  of  theoretical  dogmas 
hitherto  universally  accepted  as  correct.  And  thus  only 
can  we  succeed  in  forcing  a  fundamental  revision  of  the 
whole  doctrinal  structure.  Following  a  reconstruction  of 
this  type  there  invariably  arises  a  fresh  series  of  problems 
for  experimental  research  to  tackle.  It  is  in  the  tackling 
of  these  problems  that  new  ideas  are  suggested  which 
subsequently  lead  to  the  formulations  of  further  theories 
and  hypotheses. 

This  alternative  play  of  theory  and  experiment,  of 
theoretical  constructions  on  the  side  of  abstract  reason  and 
the  testing  of  these  by  their  application  to  objective 
reality,  is  a  special  characteristic  of  modern  physics.  In- 
deed it  is  of  enormous  significance  in  all  scientific  prog- 
ress, for  it  is  the  one  safe  and  sound  source  from  which 
reliable  and  enduring  results  can  be  produced. 

There  were  two  problems  of  theoretical  physics  which 
may  be  said  to  have  absorbed  almost  the  whole  of  Hertz's 
attention  towards  the  end  of  his  life.  But  they  defied  all 
his  attempts  at  solution.  And  these  two  problems  eventu- 
ally became  the  nucleus  out  of  which  the  physics  of  our 
day  have  developed.  These  problems  were:  (i)  the 
nature  of  the  cathode  rays,  and  (2)  electrodynamic 
motion.  Each  of  these  two  problems  has  its  own  history  -y 
for  each  furnished  the  starting-point  of  an  independent 
development.  The  former  led  to  the  theory  of  electrons, 
the  latter  to  the  relativity  theory. 


46 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 


THE   ELECTRONIC  THEORY 

The  cathode  rays  were  first  discovered  by  von  Pleucker 
in  the  year  1859.  This  discovery  naturally  opened  the 
question  as  to  the  nature  of  the  rays  themselves.  Were 
they  the  carriers  of  electric  charges  or  were  they  undula- 
tory,  like  the  rays  of  light?  The  fact  that  the  X-rays  could 
not  be  deflected  by  bringing  a  magnet  to  bear  on  them 
seemed  to  point  to  their  electrical  character.  But  Hertz 
decided  in  favor  of  the  opposite  view.  He  came  to  this 
conclusion  after  numerous  experiments  in  which  he  had 
tested  the  cathode  rays  by  bringing  them  to  bear  on  a 
magnetic  needle  and  found  in  each  case  that  the  needle 
remained  in  its  position  of  equilibrium.  Hertz  accord- 
ingly was  inclined  to  identify  the  cathode  rays  with  the 
waves  of  light-ether,  which  scientists  had  for  a  long  time 
been  vainly  trying  to  discover.  If  Hertz  were  right  here 
his  theory  would  mean  that  one  of  the  awkward  voids  in 
the  structure  of  theoretical  physics  would  thus  be  filled  in. 

But,  contrary  to  Hertz's  suggestion,  there  were  indica- 
tions which  pointed  to  the  assumption  that  the  cathode 
rays  are  corpuscular  and  the  carriers  of  electric  charges. 
With  the  advance  of  experimental  methods  scientists  be- 
gan to  believe  more  and  more  that  the  cathode  rays  would 
eventually  be  found  to  be  the  carriers  of  negative  elec- 
tricity. Indications  pointed  definitively  in  this  direction 
once  W.  Wien  had  discovered  the  electric  charge  in  the 
rays  and  D.  Wiechert  their  velocity.  Therewith  the 
foundation  of  the  electronic  theory  was  laid. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  how  in  this  case  theory  and 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  47 

experiment  worked  hand  in  hand,  one  taking  the  leader- 
ship to-day  and  the  other  to-morrow.  Experiment  first 
appears  in  the  lead,  represented  especially  by  Philippe 
Lenard.  In  1892  he  showed  that  the  cathode  rays  could 
pass  through  very  thin  metal  foils  and  he  succeeded  in 
obtaining  them  outside  the  tube  in  which  they  were  gen- 
erated. Later  on  the  experimental  impulse  produced  a 
marvelous  and  unexpected  result,  in  1895,  when  W. 
Roentgen,  while  working  on  the  cathode  rays,  discovered 
the  X-rays  and  thus  with  one  blow  opened  up  a  new 
kingdom  for  physical  science.  At  the  same  time  his  dis- 
covery placed  a  completely  new  task  before  the  theoret- 
ical physics  of  the  time.  This  led  indirectly  to  the 
discovery  of  uranium  rays  on  the  part  of  the  French 
physicist,  Henri  Becquerel.  A  further  development  in 
the  same  experimental  field  eventuated  in  the  discovery 
of  the  radioactive  substances  and  the  establishment  of 
the  theory  of  radioactivity,  on  the  part  of  Rutherford 
and  Soddy. 

Experimental  investigation  into  the  nature  of  the 
various  phenomena  connected  with  cathode  rays  and 
X-rays  and  radioactivity  progressed  on  all  sides.  The 
special  problem  to  be  solvea  was  that  of  their  origin  and 
the  nature  of  their  activity.  But  the  Roentgen  rays  for  a 
long  time  absolutely  defied  all  attempts  at  quantitative 
analysis.  In  the  early  experimental  stages  it  was  readily 
established  that  the  X-rays  were  of  an  electromagnetic 
nature,  through  the  fact  that  when  we  put  a  piece  of 
metal  opposite  the  cathode  inside  the  tube — the  so-called 
anti-cathode — streams  of  electrons  are  shot  off  from  the 


48         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

anti-cathode.  Yet  it  was  for  a  long  time  impossible  to 
arrive  at  any  satisfactory  results  in  measuring  the  wave- 
length of  the  X-rays.  Here  it  was  that  the  work  of  a 
theorist,  Professor  von  Laue,  opened  the  way  for  the 
next  decisive  step. 

In  the  year  19 12  von  Laue  in  collaboration  with  the 
experimental  physicists,  W.  Friedrich  and  P.  Kipping, 
succeeded  in  ascertaining  the  wave-length  of  the  X-rays 
by  passing  them  through  crystalline  media  and  thus 
bringing  about  the  phenomena  of  interference.  In  this 
way  it  was  found  possible  to  measure  the  wave-length, 
but  the  experiment  holds  good  of  course  only  for  homo- 
geneous Roentgen  rays,  because  otherwise  confusion 
would  arise  from  the  various  interference  positions  over- 
lapping one  another. 

Von  Laue's  discovery  turned  out  quite  as  valuable  in 
the  sphere  of  atomic  physics  as  in  the  sphere  of  optics. 
It  enabled  physicists  definitely  to  classify  the  Roentgen 
rays  and  the  Gamma  rays  with  the  radioactive  substances 
in  electrodynamics.  On  the  other  hand,  the  carriers  of  the 
cathode  rays — that  is  to  say,  the  free  electrons — with 
their  relatively  small  mass,  proved  to  be  something  en- 
tirely new  to  physical  science.  It  was  the  introduction  of 
these  electrons  that  made  it  possible  to  understand  various 
physical  phenomena  which  hitherto  had  remained  in  the 
region  of  mystery. 

As  far  back  as  1881  Helmholtz  pointed  out,  in  his 
famous  Faraday  lecture,  that  from  the  standpoint  of 
chemical  atomics  the  empirically  deduced  laws  of  chemi- 
cal decomposition  by  galvanic  action  could  be  explained 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  49 

only  in  case  we  attribute  an  atomic  structure  to  electricity 
as  well  as  to  matter.  The  atom  of  electricity  postulated  by 
Helmholtz  first  appeared  in  the  cathode  rays,  free  and 
detached  from  all  matter,  and  was  again  located  in  the 
Beta  rays  of  radioactive  substances.  In  contradistinction 
to  chemical  atoms,  all  electric  atoms  are  found  to  be 
uniform  and  to  differ  from  one  another  only  in  their 
velocity.  The  discovery  of  electrons  and  the  introduction 
of  them  into  the  scientific  picture  of  the  universe  threw  a 
new  light  on  the  nature  of  metallic  conduction.  It  is  well 
known  that  an  electric  current  when  passing  through  a 
metal  conductor,  such  as  an  ordinary  piece  of  copper  wire, 
produces  no  chemical  change.  Once  the  existence  of  elec- 
trons became  known  it  seemed  natural  to  consider  these 
free  electrons  as  carriers  of  the  electric  current  through 
the  metal.  This  opinion,  which  had  previously  been  put 
forward  by  Wm.  Weber,  was  now  revived  and  further 
developed  by  E.  Riecke  and  P.  Drude. 

Once  the  free  electrons  had  been  accepted  by  physical 
science  as  veritable  factors  in  nature,  an  attempt  was  made 
to  prove  that  these  electrons  also  existed  in  a  "bound" 
condition.  This  attempt  put  the  investigators  on  the  track 
of  a  whole  new  series  of  physical  and  chemical  properties 
of  matter.  P.  Drude  explained  the  optical  dispersion  and 
chemical  valency  of  a  substance  by  referring  these  to  the 
electrons  in  the  atoms  and  for  this  purpose  he  differen- 
tiated between  firmly  bound  and  loosely  bound  electrons. 
The  former  cause  dispersion  of  light  and  the  latter  ac- 
count for  the  property  of  chemical  valency.  Subsequently 
H.  A.  Lorentz  formulated  the  whole  electronic  theory 


50         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

as  a  complete  and  independent  synthesis.  His  special 
endeavor  was  to  ascertain  if  and  how  far  all  material 
constants  of  a  substance  can  be  accounted  for  by  the 
arrangement  and  interaction  of  the  atoms  and  electrons 
contained  in  them. 

Taking  the  results  thus  obtained,  together  with  the 
work  done  in  the  sphere  of  radioactivity,  the  final  conse- 
quence of  the  researches  which  were  directed  towards 
discovering  the  inner  constitution  of  matter  within  the 
past  fifty  years  is  the  knowledge  that  all  matter  is  made 
up  of  two  primordial  elements:  negative  electricity  and 
positive  electricity.  Both  consist  of  uniform  minute  par- 
ticles containing  uniform  but  opposite  charges.  The  posi- 
tive particle,  which  is  the  heavier,  is  called  the  proton  and 
the  negative,  the  lighter,  is  called  the  electron.  The  union 
of  both  is  called  the  neutron.  Every  electrically  neutral 
chemical  atom  is  made  up  by  a  certain  number  of  protons 
held  fast  together  and  by  an  equal  number  of  electrons  of 
which  some  are  bound  to  the  proton  and  form  together 
with  it  the  nucleus  of  the  atom,  while  the  others — that 
is  to  say,  the  free  electrons — move  in  orbits  around  the 
nucleus.  The  number  of  these  latter,  which  are  called  free 
or  orbital  electrons,  gives  in  each  case  what  is  called  the 
atomic  number.  It  is  on  this  number  that  all  the  chemical 
properties  of  the  various  elements  depend. 

THE  RELATIVITY  THEORY 

I  have  spoken  at  length  of  Hermann  Hertz  and  his 
work  in  the  movement  which  eventually  led  to  the  es- 
tablishment of  the  electronic  theory.  Now  we  come  to  the 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  51 

second  great  theory  which  I  have  mentioned  as  forming, 
with  the  electronic  theory,  one  of  the  twin  principles 
which  were  entirely  undreamt  of  fifty  years  ago  and  are 
now  among  the  main  piles  supporting  the  scientific  struc- 
ture. This  second  principle  is  the  relativity  theory.  And 
here  again  we  find  that  Hertz  was  among  the  pioneers. 
The  last  and  most  fruitful  period  of  his  life's  work  was 
devoted  largely  to  the  study  of  electrodynamic  phenom- 
ena in  moving  bodies.  In  this  work  Hertz  chose  as  his 
starting-point  the  principle  that  all  movement  is  relative. 
Adopting  Maxwell's  theory  as  his  groundwork,  he  for- 
mulated for  the  phenomena  of  electrodynamic  move- 
ment a  system  of  equations  in  which  the  velocity  of  the 
bodies  concerned  is  taken  only  in  a  relative  sense.  This  is 
expressed  by  the  fact  that  the  equations,  just  as  the  New- 
tonian laws  of  motion,  remain  unchanged  if  the  velocity 
of  the  body  in  question  be  taken  in  relation  to  a  moving 
reference  system  or,  in  other  words,  a  moving  observer. 
There  is  no  necessity  in  the  Hertzian  theory  to  introduce 
the  idea  of  a  special  substantial  medium  of  transmission 
for  the  electrodynamic  waves.  If  we  should  think  of  in- 
troducing ether  as  a  substantial  medium  of  transmission 
here,  then  we  must  assume  that  it  has  no  independent 
motion  of  its  own  in  relation  to  matter  but  is  completely 
carried  forward  with  it. 

The  Hertzian  theory  was  excellent  in  its  inner  coher- 
ence, but  from  the  beginning  he  recognized  that  it  had 
considerable  drawbacks.  A  wave  of  light  passing  through 
air  which  is  also  in  motion  must  be  considered  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  movement  of  the  air,  just  as  in  the  case  of 


52         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

sound  waves,  no  matter  how  rarefied  the  air  may  be.  This 
was  a  necessity  of  the  Hertzian  theory  but  it  was  con- 
tradicted through  a  decisive  discovery  made  by  Fizeau, 
who  proved  that  light  passes  through  moving  air  with 
just  the  same  velocity  as  through  still  air.  In  other  words 
it  goes  against  the  wind  or  in  a  perfect  calm  or  with  the 
wind  at  the  same  rate  of  speed. 

H.  Lorentz  endeavored  to  smooth  out  this  contradic- 
tion between  the  Hertzian  theory  and  Fizeau's  discovery 
by  putting  forward  the  idea  of  a  stationary  ether  permeat- 
ing the  whole  of  space.  This  was  suggested  as  the  carrier 
and  transmitter  of  all  electrodynamic  action.  In  this  ether 
the  atoms  and  electrons  move  about  as  distinct  particles. 
Thus  the  advantages  of  Hertz's  theory  were  retained  and 
at  the  same  time  the  theory  could  be  harmonized  with 
Fizeau's  findings.  On  the  other  hand,  however,  this  in- 
volved the  renunciation  of  the  idea  of  relativity ;  because 
it  established  a  definite  object  of  reference  absolutely  at 
rest.  This  was  a  static  ether  and  the  hypothesis  of  its 
existence  seemed  more  satisfactory  than  any  that  had 
hitherto  been  put  forward. 

The  relativity  principle  in  this  way  received  a  setback. 
But  reprisals  were  soon  forthcoming,  inasmuch  as  new 
defects  arose  which  the  Hertzian  theory  could  not  cope 
with.  All  attempts  to  measure  the  absolute  velocity  of  the 
earth  had  failed.  In  other  words  it  turned  out  impossible 
to  measure  the  velocity  of  the  earth  in  relation  to 
the  hypothetically  static  ether.  Even  the  most  delicate 
of  all  experiments,  namely  that  carried  out  by  Michelson 
and  Morley,  could  detect  no  trace  whatsoever  of  the  in- 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  53 

fluence  of  the  earth's  motion  on  the  velocity  of  light 
although,  according  to  the  Lorentzian  doctrine,  this 
should  have  made  itself  felt. 

Under  these  circumstances  theoretical  physics,  at  the 
end  of  the  last  century,  was  faced  with  the  alternative 
of  renouncing  either  the  remarkably  useful  Lorentzian 
theory  or  the  theory  of  relativity.  The  crisis  came  into 
public  notice  very  strikingly  at  a  meeting  of  the  Society 
of  German  Physicists  and  Physicians,1  which  was  held  at 
Dusseldorf  in  the  August  of  1898.  On  that  occasion  the 
whole  question  was  discussed  in  a  debate  which  centered 
around  two  papers  that  were  read  there  ;  one  by  W.  Wien 
and  the  other  by  H.  A.  Lorentz.  The  controversy  re- 
mained open  for  seven  years.  Then,  in  the  year  1905,  a 
solution  was  put  forward  by  Albert  Einstein  in  his  Theory 
of  Relativity.  The  Einsteinian  hypothesis  allowed  the 
Lorentzian  theory  to  stand,  but  only  at  the  cost  of  intro- 
ducing what  at  first  sight  appeared  to  be  an  entirely  alien 
hypothesis,  namely,  that  the  dimensions  of  time  and  space 
cannot  be  taken  independently  of  one  another  but  must 
be  welded  together  when  there  is  question  of  the  velocity 
of  light  in  vacuo.  This  hypothesis  was  logically  unassail- 
able, because  it  was  expressed  in  a  mathematical  formula- 
tion that  was  flawless  in  itself.  Yet  the  relativity  thesis 
completely  contradicted  all  hitherto  accepted  opinions. 

Only  a  few  years  after  Einstein  had  published  his  first 
presentation  of  the  relativity  hypothesis  Minkowski  suc- 
ceeded in  bringing  a  corroborative  light  to  bear  on  the 
suggestion.  He  showed  that  if  we  look  upon  time  as 

1  Gesellschaft  deutscher  Naturforscher  und  Aerzte. 


54  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

something  imaginary  and  assume  the  unit  of  time  to  be 
the  amount  of  time  which  a  beam  of  light  takes  to  travel 
over  the  unit  of  length,  then  all  our  electrodynamic  equa- 
tions in  relation  to  space  and  time  will  be  symmetrical ; 
because  the  one  dimension  for  time  and  the  three  dimen- 
sions for  space  enter  as  factors  on  an  equal  footing  in  the 
formulation  of  every  law  of  electrodynamics.  Thus  the 
three-dimensional  "space"  is  expanded  into  the  four- 
dimensional  "world"  and  the  mathematical  laws  that 
govern  the  whole  field  of  electrodynamics  remain  in- 
variable when  the  reference  system — that  is  to  say,  the 
observer — changes  its  velocity,  just  as  they  remain  in- 
variable when  the  reference  system  changes  its  motion 
from  one  direction  to  another. 

Now  the  next  question  to  arise  was  this:  If  the  relativity 
hypothesis  in  its  new  formulation  is  to  have  meaning  and 
validity  for  physical  science  as  a  whole,  it  must  apply  not 
merely  to  electrodynamics  but  also  to  mechanics.  If,  how- 
ever, the  relativity  theory  be  applicable  and  valid  in  the 
field  of  mechanics,  then  we  must  change  the  laws  of 
motion  formulated  by  Newton  3  because  the  Newtonian 
laws  do  not  remain  constant  when  the  four-dimensional 
reference  system  is  changed.  Out  of  these  problems  arose 
what  is  called  relativist  mechanics,  which  are  an  expansion 
and  refinement  of  Newtonian  mechanics.  The  theory  of 
relativist  mechanics  was  verified  by  experiment  in  the 
case  of  rapidly  moving  electrons,  for  this  experiment 
showed  that  mass  is  not  independent  of  velocity.  In  other 
words  it  was  shown  that  the  mass  of  a  rapidly  moving 
body  increases  with  the  increase  of  velocity.  And  thus  a 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  55 

further  corroboration  of  the  Einstein  hypothesis  was 
provided. 

Beyond  the  achievement  of  welding  space  and  time 
together  with  the  mechanical  laws  of  motion,  the  rela- 
tivity theory  accomplished  another  and  no  less  important 
amalgamation.  This  was  the  identification  of  mass  with 
energy.  The  unification  of  these  two  concepts  establishes 
for  all  equations  in  physical  science  the  same  kind  of 
symmetry  as  the  four  coordinates  of  the  space-time  con- 
tinuum, the  momentum  vector  corresponding  to  the  place 
vector  and  the  energy  scalar  corresponding  to  the  time 
scalar.  Another  important  consequence  of  the  relativity 
theory  is  that  the  energy  of  a  body  at  rest  is  given  a  quite 
positive  value,  which  is  expressed  through  the  multipli- 
cation of  its  mass  by  the  square  of  the  velocity  of  light ; 
so  that  in  general  mass  is  to  be  considered  under  the 
concept  of  energy. 

But  Einstein  did  not  rest  content  with  this  success  of 
his  theory.  Once  it  had  been  shown  that  all  reference  sys- 
tems, or  standpoints  of  observation,  are  equally  valid  as 
long  as  they  are  interchanged  with  one  another  through 
linear  rectangular  transformation,  Einstein  was  led  to  ask 
whether  and  how  far  such  an  equivalence  would  hold 
good  for  a  quite  arbitrary  reference  system.  The  trans- 
formation of  simple  mechanical  equations  to  any  other 
reference  system  generally  involves  certain  additional 
factors  such  as  that  of  a  centrifugal  force  where  there  is 
question  of  a  rotating  reference  system,  such  as  the  earth, 
and  these  additional  factors  appear  as  the  effect  of  gravity 
in  so  far  as  ponderable  mass  is  identified  with  inertial 


56         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

mass.  Now  the  hypothesis  that,  from  the  viewpoint  of 
physical  science,  no  geometrical  reference  system  has 
from  the  outset  any  advantage  over  any  other  system, 
and  that  the  property  of  invariance  can  be  explained  only 
on  the  basis  of  the  Riemann  fundamental  tensor — which 
on  its  part  depends  on  the  distribution  of  matter  in  space 
— led  to  the  formulation  of  the  general  relativity  theory. 
This  general  theory  of  relativity  includes  the  former 
theory  as  a  special  case  and  holds  the  same  relation  to  the 
special  theory  of  relativity  as  Riemann's  geometry  holds 
to  Euclid's  geometry. 

The  practical  significance  of  the  general  theory  of 
relativity  is  naturally  confined  to  very  powerful  gravita- 
tional fields  such  as  that  of  the  sun,  whereby  the  color 
and  the  light  are  affected,  or  to  movements  which  have 
secular  periods,  such  as  the  perihelion  displacement  of 
the  orbit  of  Mercury.  The  general  theory  of  relativity 
represents  the  first  great  step  towards  the  ideal  goal  of 
geometrizing  the  whole  of  physics.  Einstein  has  recently 
devoted  himself  to  the  task  of  opening  the  way  for  the 
second  step,  which  would  unite  mechanics  and  electro- 
dynamics under  the  one  system  of  equations.  To  this  end 
he  has  undertaken  the  task  of  formulating  a  single  field 
theory,  based  on  a  different  geometry  from  that  of 
Riemann.  We  have  yet  to  await  the  final  success  of  this 
attempt. 


THE  QUANTUM  THEORY 

Apart  from  and  quite  independent  of  the  relativity 
theory,  the  quantum  theory  has  given  a  new  impress  to 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  57 

theoretical  physics  during  the  past  thirty  years.  Just  as  in 
the  case  of  the  relativity  theory,  its  origin  and  foundation 
arose  from  recognition  of  the  fact  that  the  old  classical 
theory  had  to  be  abandoned  because  it  failed  to  explain 
results  which  had  been  established  through  experimental 
means.  These  results,  however,  were  not  obtained  in  the 
region  of  optics  but  rather  in  that  of  thermodynamics  and 
arose  from  the  measurement  of  radiant  energy  in  the 
emission  spectrum  of  black  bodies. 

According  to  the  Kirchhof?  law  this  radiant  energy  is 
independent  of  the  nature  of  the  radiating  substance  and 
therefore  has  a  universal  significance.  In  this  direction 
indeed  the  classical  theory  had  already  led  to  important 
results.  In  the  first  place  L.  Boltzmann  deduced  from 
Maxwell's  discoveries  in  regard  to  the  pressure  exerted 
by  radiation,  and  from  the  laws  of  thermodynamics,  the 
dependence  of  all  types  of  radiation  on  temperature.  W. 
Wien  extended  the  same  principle  further  and  showed 
that  the  curve  of  the  distribution  of  energy  on  the  spec- 
trum, especially  in  its  location  and  maximum  extent,  is 
displaced  by  a  change  of  temperature.  This  was  in  full 
harmony  with  the  most  delicate  measurements.  But  in 
relation  to  the  shape  of  this  curve  there  resulted  a  very 
strong  discrepancy  between  the  conclusions  arrived  at 
theoretically  and  the  measurements  carried  out  by  von 
Lummer  and  Pringsheim,  Rubens  and  Kurlbaum.  Then 
Max  Planck,  taking  the  laws  of  thermodynamics  as  the 
basis  upon  which  an  explanation  of  the  experimental  re- 
sults could  be  obtained,  arrived  at  the  revolutionary 
hypothesis  that  the  manifold  features  which  an  oscillating 


58  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

and  radiating  picture  possesses  are  complete  entities  in 
themselves  and  that  the  difference  between  any  two  fea- 
tures of  the  picture  is  characterized  by  a  definite  universal 
constant,  namely  the  elementary  quantum  of  action. 

The  establishment  of  this  hypothesis  involved  a  funda- 
mental break  with  the  opinions  hitherto  held  in  physical 
science ;  because  until  then  it  had  been  an  accepted  dogma 
that  the  state  of  a  physical  picture  could  be  indefinitely 
altered.  The  fruitfulness  of  the  new  hypothesis  showed 
itself  immediately  in  the  fact  that  it  led  to  a  law  which 
explained  the  distribution  of  energy  on  the  spectrum  and 
was  in  perfect  harmony  with  the  measurements.  But  it 
also  supplied  a  means  for  determining  the  absolute 
weights  of  molecules  and  atoms.  Up  to  then,  in  so  far  as 
atomic  realities  had  been  measured  at  all,  science  had  to 
be  content  with  more  or  less  rough  estimates.  Einstein 
readily  showed  that  the  new  theory  had  a  further  conse- 
quence inasmuch  as  it  applied  to  the  energy  and  specific 
heat  of  material  bodies.  Hitherto  it  had  been  only  a  mere 
supposition  that  specific  heat  decreases  illimitably  with 
decrease  of  temperature,  but  this  now  became  established 
by  experimental  proof.  Max  Born  and  Th.  von  Karman, 
on  the  one  hand,  and  P.  Debye,  on  the  other,  began  to 
study  carefully  from  the  standpoint  of  the  quantum 
theory  the  problem  of  the  dependence  of  specific  heat  on 
temperature,  and  succeeded  in  formulating  a  law  accord- 
ing to  which  it  is  possible  to  reckon  the  variation  of  specific 
heat  with  temperature  from  the  elastic  constants  of  the 
substance  in  question.  The  most  striking  proof,  however, 
for  the  universality  of  the  quantum  of  action  is  to  be 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  59 

found  in  the  circumstance  that  not  only  the  whole  of  the 
heat  theory  put  forward  by  W.  Nernst  in  the  year  1906, 
independently  of  the  quantum  theory,  is  in  harmony  with 
the  quantum  theory,  but  also  that  the  chemical  constant 
introduced  by  Nernst  depends  on  the  quantum  of  action. 
This  was  clearly  demonstrated  by  O.  Sackur  and  H. 
Tetrode. 

Belief  in  the  soundness  of  the  quantum  theory  has 
nowadays  become  so  strong  and  widespread  that  if  the 
measurement  of  a  chemical  constant  does  not  tally  with 
the  theoretical  reckoning  the  discrepancy  is  attributed, 
not  to  the  quantum  theory  as  such,  but  to  the  manner  of 
its  application,  namely  the  assumption  of  certain  atomic 
conditions  in  regard  to  the  substance  in  question.  But  the 
laws  of  thermodynamics  are  only  of  a  summary  and 
statistical  nature  and  can  give  only  summary  results  when 
applied  to  electronic  processes  in  the  atom.  Now  if  the 
quantum  of  action  has  the  significance  which  has  come 
to  be  ascribed  to  it  to-day  in  thermodynamics  it  must  make 
itself  felt  also  in  every  single  process  within  the  atom,  in 
every  case  of  emission  and  absorption  of  radiation  and  in 
the  free  dispersion  of  light  radiation.  Here  it  was  Einstein 
once  again  who  formulated  the  hypothesis  that  the  light 
quanta  have  an  independent  existence  and  exercise  an  in- 
dependent activity. 

This  led  to  the  putting  forward  of  a  whole  series  of 
new  questions  and  started  correspondingly  new  investi- 
gations in  physics  and  chemistry.  These  dealt  with  the 
emission  of  light  quanta  on  the  one  hand  and  with  elec- 
trons, atoms,  and  molecules,  on  the  other.  The  first 


6o         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

direct  measurement  of  the  quantum  of  action  was  ob- 
tained by  J.  Franck  and  G.  Hertz  by  liberating  quanti- 
ties of  light  through  electronic  impulses.  Niels  Bohr 
succeeded  in  further  elucidating  the  theory  and  extended 
its  application  beyond  the  thermodynamic  sphere.  On 
the  basis  of  the  quantum  he  was  able  to  lay  down  the 
laws  which  are  followed  by  the  minute  activities  taking 
place  in  the  interior  world  of  the  atom.  By  the  construc- 
tion of  his  atom  model  he  showed  mathematically  that 
if  the  electrons  of  the  atom  be  held  to  revolve  at  enor- 
mous speeds,  the  change  of  energy  involved  in  the  dis- 
placement of  an  electron  from  one  orbit  to  another 
exactly  corresponds  to  the  quantum  theory  that  the 
variation  of  the  physical  state  does  not  take  place  gradu- 
ally but  in  integral  jumps.  This  was  the  first  time  that 
the  quantum  theory  came  to  be  applied  outside  of  the 
region  of  thermodynamics. 

The  quantum  way  of  solving  physical  problems  was 
further  extended  by  A.  Sommerfeld,  who  in  this  manner 
succeeded  in  solving  the  riddle  of  delicate  spectral 
structures  which  had  hitherto  defied  explanation.  Inde- 
pendently entirely  of  spectral  phenomena,  the  Bohr 
model  of  the  atom  proved  effective  in  the  elucidation  of 
chemical  laws,  including  those  underlying  the  periodi- 
cally occurring  functions  of  elements  in  chemical 
structures. 

Professor  Bohr  himself  has  never  claimed  that  his 
model  of  the  atom  provides  the  final  solution  of  the 
quantum  problem ;  but  the  correspondence  principle 
which  he  introduced  has  proved  remarkably  fruitful 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  61 

because,  in  combination  with  the  classical  theory,  it 
points  out  the  direction  for  the  further  development  of 
the  quantum  theory. 

In  point  of  fact  a  certain  amount  of  uncertainty 
lingered  on  because  the  discontinuous  character  of  the 
Bohr  atom,  the  so-called  stationary  electron  orbits,  did 
not  accord  in  their  peculiarities  with  the  laws  of  classical 
mechanics.  Professor  Heisenberg  discovered  a  way  out 
of  this  difficulty  by  formulating  a  detailed  description  of 
electronic  motion  in  a  sense  entirely  foreign  to  classical 
theories.  He  showed  that  only  dimensions  which  in  prin- 
ciple were  directly  measurable  should  be  treated  theo- 
retically, and  thus  he  succeeded  in  formulating  certain 
equations  by  which  the  problem  of  applying  the  quan- 
tum theory  has  been  solved  in  regard  to  its  universal 
validity.  The  close  relation  between  this  particular 
method  of  reckoning  and  that  of  matrix  computation 
was  brought  to  light  by  the  collaboration  of  Max  Born 
and  P.  Jordan,  and  a  further  significant  step  in  this  di- 
rection was  accomplished  by  W.  Pauli  and  P.  Dirac. 

It  is  remarkable  how  such  a  roundabout  way,  which 
even  sometimes  appeared  to  run  in  opposite  directions, 
led  to  the  selfsame  goal  and  opened  up  new  territory 
which  has  extended  the  basis  of  the  quantum  theory. 
A  further  extension  followed,  with  the  founding  of  the 
wave-theory.  The  Heisenberg  theory  originally  recog- 
nized only  integral  magnitudes  in  the  quantities  meas- 
ured. That  is  to  say,  his  results  verified  the  condition  of 
discontinuity  postulated  by  the  quantum  theory.  But 
another  and  complementary  interpretation  developed 


62  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

independently  of  Heisenberg,  out  of  suggestions  first 
made  by  L.  de  Broglie.  The  Einstein  light  quanta  are 
of  a  twofold  nature.  Looked  at  from  the  viewpoint  of 
energy,  they  act  as  discrete  and  invisible  particles — that 
is  to  say,  they  are  concentrated  quanta,  or  photons  j  but 
if  we  consider  them  from  the  electromagnetic  standpoint 
all  experiment  has  shown  that  they  are  like  a  spherical 
wave  or  pulse  spreading  in  all  directions,  completely 
corresponding  to  the  Maxwellian  wave-theory  of  light. 
This  is  one  of  the  great  dilemmas  of  modern  physics. 
And  the  hypothesis  of  wave-mechanics  is  an  attempt  to 
solve  it.  It  was  E.  Schroedinger  who  first  presented  an 
exact  analytical  formulation  of  wave-mechanics,  in  the 
partial  differential  equations  adduced  by  him.  For  the 
integral  values  of  energy,  on  the  one  hand,  this  led 
directly  to  the  quantizing  rules  which  Heisenberg  had 
laid  down,  while  on  the  other  hand  it  extended  the 
grounds  of  application  of  the  quantum  theory  to  dis- 
integrating processes  and  even  more  tangled  problems. 
At  the  present  stage  of  its  development  we  can  safely 
say  that  the  theory  of  wave-mechanics  has  definitely 
established  itself  as  a  generalization  and  expansion  of 
the  classical  corpuscular  mechanics.  The  difference  be- 
tween classical  mechanics  and  wave-mechanics  arises 
principally  from  the  circumstances  that  the  laws  of  mo- 
tion in  respect  of  a  physical  picture  cannot  be  formulated 
as  they  were  formulated  in  classical  mechanics — that  is 
to  say,  the  picture  cannot  be  broken  up  into  infinitesi- 
mally  small  fractions  and  the  movement  of  each  fraction 
dealt  with  independently  of  the  others.  On  the  contrary, 


FIFTY  YEARS  OF  SCIENCE  63 

according  to  wave-mechanics,  the  picture  must  be  held 
before  the  eye  as  a  whole  and  its  movement  must  be 
looked  upon  as  arising  from  the  individual  and  mutually 
differentiated  integral  movements.  From  this  it  follows 
closely  that,  not  the  local  force — as  in  Newtonian 
mechanics — but  the  integral  force — that  is  to  say,  the 
potential — enters  the  fundamental  equations.  Moreover 
it  follows  that  there  can  be  no  sense  in  talking  about  the 
state  of  a  particle  in  the  sense  of  meaning  its  position  and 
velocity.  This  state  at  best  is  rather  a  certain  underlying 
space  for  the  play  of  dimensional  ordering  of  the  quan- 
tum of  action.  Therefore  in  principle  every  method  of 
measurement  involves  an  uncertainty  in  regard  to  the 
corresponding  sum-total. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  the  laws  of  nature  are  in 
themselves  independent  of  the  properties  of  the  instru- 
ments with  which  they  are  measured.  Therefore  in  every 
observation  of  natural  phenomena  we  must  remember 
the  principle  that  the  reliability  of  the  measuring  ap- 
paratus must  always  play  an  important  role.  For  this 
reason  many  researchers  in  quantum  physics  are  inclined 
to  set  aside  the  principle  of  causation  in  the  measurement 
of  natural  processes  and  to  adopt  a  statistical  method  in 
its  place.  But  instead  of  this  I  think  it  may  be  suggested 
with  equal  justice  that  we  might  alter  the  formulation  of 
the  causal  principle  as  we  have  received  it  from  classical 
physics,  so  that  it  may  again  have  its  strict  validity.  But 
this  question  as  to  the  rival  merits  of  the  strictly  causal 
and  statistical  methods  will  depend  upon  how  far  the 
one  proves  more  fruitful  of  results  than  the  other. 


CHAPTER  II 
IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL? 


WE  are  living  in  a  very  singular  moment  of 
history.  It  is  a  moment  of  crisis,  in  the  literal 
sense  of  that  word.  In  every  branch  of  our  spiritual 
and  material  civilization  we  seem  to  have  arrived  at 
a  critical  turning-point.  This  spirit  shows  itself  not 
only  in  the  actual  state  of  public  affairs  but  also  in  the 
general  attitude  towards  fundamental  values  in  per- 
sonal and  social  life. 

Many  people  say  that  these  symptoms  mark  the  be- 
ginnings of  a  great  renaissance,  but  there  are  others 
who  see  in  them  the  tidings  of  a  downfall  to  which 
our  civilization  is  fatally  destined.  Formerly  it  was 
only  religion,  especially  in  its  doctrinal  and  moral 
systems,  that  was  the  object  of  skeptical  attack.  Then 
the  iconoclast  began  to  shatter  the  ideals  and  principles 
that  had  hitherto  been  accepted  in  the  province  of  art. 
Now  he  has  invaded  the  temple  of  science.  There  is 
scarcely  a  scientific  axiom  that  is  not  nowadays  denied 
by  somebody.  And  at  the  same  time  almost  any  non- 
sensical theory  that  may  be  put  forward  in  the  name 
of  science  would  be  almost  sure  to  find  believers  and 
disciples  somewhere  or  other. 

64 


IS  THE    EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  65 

In  the  midst  of  this  confusion  it  is  natural  to  ask 
whether  there  is  any  rock  of  truth  left  on  which  we  can 
take  our  stand  and  feel  sure  that  it  is  unassailable  and 
that  it  will  hold  firm  against  the  storm  of  skepticism 
raging  around  it.  Science,  in  general,  presents  us  with 
the  spectacle  of  a  marvelous  theoretical  structure  which 
is  one  of  the  proudest  achievements  of  constructive 
reasoning.  The  logical  coherence  of  the  scientific  struc- 
ture was  hitherto  the  object  of  unstinted  admiration  on 
the  part  of  those  who  criticized  the  fundamentals  of 
art  and  religion.  But  this  logical  quality  will  not  avail 
us  now  against  the  skeptics'  attack.  Logic  in  its  purest 
form,  which  is  mathematics,  only  coordinates  and  ar- 
ticulates one  truth  with  another.  It  gives  harmony  to 
the  superstructure  of  science ;  but  it  cannot  provide  the 
foundation  or  the  building-stones. 

Where  shall  we  look  for  a  firm  foundation  upon 
which  our  outlook  on  nature  and  the  world  in  general 
can  be  scientifically  based?  The  moment  this  question 
is  asked  the  mind  turns  immediately  to  the  most  exact 
of  our  natural  sciences,  namely,  Physics.  But  even 
physical  science  has  not  escaped  the  contagion  of  this 
critical  moment  of  history.  It  is  not  merely  that  the 
claim  to  reliability  put  forward  by  physical  science  is 
questioned  from  the  outside  5  but  even  within  the 
province  of  this  science  itself  the  spirit  of  confusion 
and  contradiction  has  begun  to  be  active.  And  this 
spirit  is  remarkably  noticeable  in  regard  to  questions 
that  affect  the  very  fundamental  problem  of  how  far 
and  in  what  way  the  human  mind  is  capable  of  coming 


66  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

to  a  knowledge  of  external  reality.  To  take  one  instance : 
Hitherto  the  principle  of  causality  was  universally 
accepted  as  an  indispensable  postulate  of  scientific  re- 
search, but  now  we  are  told  by  some  physicists  that 
it  must  be  thrown  overboard.  The  fact  that  such  an 
extraordinary  opinion  should  be  expressed  in  respon- 
sible scientific  quarters  is  widely  taken  to  be  significant 
of  the  all-round  unreliability  of  human  knowledge. 
This  indeed  is  a  very  serious  situation,  and  for  that 
reason  I  feel,  as  a  physicist,  that  I  ought  to  put  forward 
my  own  views  on  the  situation  in  which  physical  science 
now  finds  itself.  Perhaps  what  I  shall  have  to  say  may 
throw  some  light  on  other  fields  of  human  activity 
which  the  cloud  of  skepticism  has  also  darkened. 

Let  us  get  down  to  bedrock  facts.  The  beginning 
of  every  act  of  knowing,  and  therefore  the  starting- 
point  of  every  science,  must  be  in  our  own  personal 
experiences.  I  am  using  the  word,  experience,  here  in 
its  technical  philosophical  connotation,  namely,  our 
direct  sensory  perception  of  outside  things.  These  are 
the  immediate  data  of  the  act  of  knowing.  They  form 
the  first  and  most  real  hook  on  which  we  fasten  the 
thought-chain  of  science  5  because  the  material  that  fur- 
nishes, as  it  were,  the  building-stones  of  science  is 
received  either  directly  through  our  own  perception  of 
outer  things  or  indirectly,  through  the  information  of 
others,  that  is  to  say  from  former  researchers  and 
teachers  and  publications  and  so  on.  There  are  no 
other  sources  of  scientific  knowledge.  In  physical 
science  we  have  to  deal  specially  and  exclusively  with 


IS  THE    EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  67 

that  material  which  is  the  result  of  observing  natural 
phenomena  through  the  medium  of  our  senses,  with 
of  course  the  help  of  measuring  instruments  such  as 
telescopes,  oscillators  and  so  on.  The  reactions  thus 
registered  in  observing  external  nature  are  collated 
and  schematized  on  the  basis  of  repeated  observations 
and  calculations.  This  subject-matter  of  our  scientific 
constructions,  being  the  immediate  reactions  of  what 
we  see,  hear,  feel,  and  touch,  forms  immediate  data 
and  indisputable  reality.  If  physical  science  could  dis- 
charge its  function  by  merely  concatenating  these  data 
and  reporting  them,  then  nobody  could  question  the 
reliability  of  its  foundations. 

But  the  problem  is:  Does  this  foundation  fully  meet 
the  needs  of  physical  science?  If  we  may  say  that  it 
is  the  business  of  physical  science,  solely  and  exclu- 
sively, in  the  most  accurate  and  most  simple  way,  to 
describe  the  order  observed  in  studying  various  natural 
phenomena,  then  is  the  task  of  physical  science  ade- 
quately and  exhaustively  fulfilled?  There  is  a  certain 
school  of  philosophers  and  physicists  who  hold  that 
this  and  this  alone  forms  the  scope  of  physical  science. 
Many  outstanding  physicists  have  been  induced  to  ac- 
cept this  view  because  of  the  general  confusion  and 
insecurity  that  arises  from  the  skeptical  spirit  of  the 
times.  They  feel  that  here  at  any  rate  is  a  foundation 
that  is  impregnable.  The  school  which  puts  forward 
this  view  is  generally  called  the  Positivist  School  $  and 
in  all  that  I  have  to  say  here  I  shall  take  the  word 
Positivism  in  that  sense.  Since  the  time  of  Auguste 


68         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

Comte,  the  founder  of  Positivism,  many  meanings 
have  been  given  to  the  word.  Therefore  I  think  it 
well  to  declare  here  at  the  outset  that  I  am  restricting 
its  application  to  the  definite  meaning  which  I  have 
already  indicated.  This  happens  also  to  be  the  meaning 
in  which  the  word,  Positivism,  is  most  generally  used. 

Now  let  us  ask,  is  the  foundation  which  Positivism 
offers  broad  enough  to  support  the  whole  structure  of 
physical  science?  The  best  test  that  can  be  applied  in 
finding  an  answer  to  this  question  is  to  ask  where  Posi- 
tivism would  lead  if  we  once  were  to  accept  it  as 
offering  the  sole  groundwork  of  physical  science. 

Suppose  for  the  moment  that  we  are  positivists. 
And  let  us  take  the  trouble  to  control  ourselves  so 
that  we  shall  hold  strictly  to  its  logical  implications 
and  not  allow  commonplaces  and  considerations  of 
sentiment  to  lure  us  from  the  logical  train  of  positivist 
thought.  Let  us  here  and  now  decide  that  no  matter 
what  singular  consequences  we  may  encounter  in  deal- 
ing with  the  positivist  line  of  thought  we  shall  stick 
steadfastly  to  it.  And  we  shall  be  sure  that  in  doing 
so  we  cannot  be  faced  with  logical  contradictions  di- 
rectly emerging  from  the  field  of  observation  -y  because 
obviously  two  actually  observed  facts  in  nature  can- 
not be  in  logical  contradiction  to  one  another.  On  the 
other  hand  as  long  as  we  remain  positivists  we  must 
deal  with  every  kind  of  experience  and  ignore  no 
source  of  human  knowledge  whatsoever.  Therein  lies 
the  strength  of  the  positivist  theory.  As  long  as  physi- 
cal science  sticks  to  the  positivist  rule  it  occupies  itself 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  69 

with  all  the  problems  that  can  be  answered  through 
direct  observation.  Every  problem  that  has  a  meaning 
of  definite  importance  comes  within  the  ambit  of 
physical  science  under  the  positivist  rule.  If  we  are 
to  content  ourselves  with  a  direct  observation  of  natu- 
ral phenomena  and  the  recording  of  them,  we  shall 
obviously  have  no  fundamental  riddles  to  solve  nor 
any  obscure  questions.  Everything  will  lie  in  the  open 
daylight.  Thus  far  the  state  of  affairs  looks  quite 
simple.  But  it  is  no  simple  matter  at  all  to  carry  out 
the  principle  when  we  begin  to  deal  with  individual 
cases.  Our  daily  habits  of  speech  make  it  rather  diffi- 
cult for  us  to  observe  the  strict  positivist  rule.  In  ordi- 
nary life  when  we  speak  of  an  outer  object — a  table, 
for  instance — we  mean  something  that  is  different  from 
the  table  as  actually  observed  by  physical  science.  We 
can  see  the  table  and  we  can  touch  it  and  we  can  try 
its  firmness  by  leaning  on  it  and  its  hardness  and  if  we 
give  it  a  thump  with  our  knuckles  we  shall  feel  a  hurt. 
In  the  light  of  positivist  science  the  table  is  nothing 
more  than  a  complex  of  these  sensory  perceptions  and 
we  have  merely  got  into  the  habit  of  associating  them 
with  the  word  table.  Remove  these  sensory  perceptions 
and  absolutely  nothing  remains.  In  the  positivist  theory 
we  must  entirely  ignore  everything  beyond  what  is 
registered  by  the  senses  and  therefore  we  are  impreg- 
nable in  this  clearly  defined  realm.  For  the  positivist, 
to  ask  what  a  table  in  reality  is  has  no  meaning  what- 
soever -y  and  this  is  so  with  our  other  physical  concepts. 
The  whole  world  around  us  is  nothing  but  an  analogue 


70  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

of  experiences  we  have  received.  To  speak  of  this  world 
as  existing  independently  of  these  experiences  is  to 
make  a  statement  that  has  no  meaning.  If  a  problem 
dealing  with  the  external  world  does  not  admit  of  being 
referred  immediately  to  some  kind  of  sensory  experi- 
ence and  does  not  allow  of  being  placed  under  observa- 
tion, then  it  has  no  meaning  and  must  be  ruled  out. 
Therefore  within  the  scope  of  the  positivist  system 
there  is  no  place  for  any  kind  of  metaphysics.  If  we 
glance  upwards  at  the  star-strewn  firmament  we  see 
innumerable  points  or  patines  of  light  which  move  in 
a  more  or  less  regular  way  through  the  heavens.  We 
can  measure  the  intensity  and  the  color  of  their  rays. 
According  to  the  positivist  theory,  these  measurements 
are  not  merely  the  raw  material  of  astronomy  and 
astrophysics,  but  they  are  the  sole  and  exclusive  sub- 
ject-matter of  these  sciences.  Beyond  merely  recording 
these  measurements,  astronomy  and  astrophysics  have 
nothing  more  to  say.  If  they  draw  any  inferences  from 
the  measurements,  these  inferences  cannot  be  con- 
sidered as  legitimate  science.  That  is  the  positivist 
standpoint.  The  mental  constructions  that  we  make  in 
collating  and  selecting  and  systematizing  the  measure- 
ment data,  and  the  theories  which  we  advance  to  explain 
why  they  should  be  so  and  not  otherwise,  are  an  un- 
warranted human  intrusion  on  the  scene.  They  are 
mere  arbitrary  inventions  of  human  reason.  They  may 
be  convenient,  just  as  the  habit  of  thinking  in  similes 
is  a  convenient  help  to  the  mind,  but  we  have  no  right 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  71 

to  put  them  forward  as  representing  anything  that 
really  happens  in  nature. 

All  we  know  is  the  bare  result  of  the  sensory  meas- 
urements and  we  have  no  right  to  attach  an  ulterior 
significance  to  these. 

Supposing  we  say,  with  Ptolemy,  that  the  earth  is 
the  fixed  center  of  the  universe  and  that  the  sun  and 
all  the  stars  move  around  it;  or  supposing  we  say, 
with  Copernicus,  that  the  earth  is  a  small  particle  of 
matter  which  is  relatively  insignificant  in  relation  to 
the  whole  universe,  turning  on  its  axis  once  every 
twenty-four  hours  and  revolving  around  the  sun  once 
in  every  twelve  months — on  the  positivist  principle 
the  one  theory  is  as  good  as  the  other,  when  con- 
sidered from  the  scientific  viewpoint.  They  are  merely 
two  different  ways  of  making  a  mental  construction 
out  of  sensory  reactions  to  some  outer  phenomena; 
but  they  have  no  more  right  to  be  looked  upon  as 
scientifically  significant  than  the  mental  construction 
which  the  mystic  or  poet  may  make  out  of  his  sensory 
impressions  when  face  to  face  with  nature.  It  is  true 
that  the  Copernican  theory  of  astronomy  is  more 
widely  accepted;  but  that  is  because  it  is  a  simpler 
way  of  formulating  a  synthesis  of  sensory  observations 
and  it  does  not  give  rise  to  so  many  difficulties  about 
astronomical  laws  as  would  arise  from  the  acceptance 
of  the  Ptolemaic  theory.  Therefore  Copernicus  is  not 
to  be  judged  as  a  pioneer  discoverer  in  the  realms  of 
science,  no  more  than  a  poet  is  to  be  judged  as  a 
pioneer  discoverer  when  he  gives  fanciful  and  attractive 


72         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

expression  to  sentiments  that  are  known  to  every 
human  breast.  Copernicus  discovered  nothing.  He  only 
formulated,  in  the  shape  of  a  fanciful  mental  construc- 
tion, a  mass  of  facts  that  were  already  known.  He  did 
not  add  anything  to  the  store  of  scientific  knowledge 
already  in  existence.  A  tremendous  mental  revolution 
was  caused  by  his  theory  and  bitter  battles  were  waged 
around  it.  For  the  logical  consequence  of  it  was  to 
give  an  entirely  different  account  of  man's  place  in 
the  universe  from  that  generally  held  at  the  time  by 
the  religion  and  philosophy  of  Europe.  But  for  the 
positivist  scientist  all  the  fuss  and  trouble  made  over 
the  Copernican  theory  were  quite  as  senseless,  from 
the  scientific  point  of  view,  as  if  one  were  to  quarrel 
with  the  rapture  of  a  contemplative  who  gazes  on  the 
Milky  Way  and  ponders  over  the  fact  that  each  star 
in  that  Milky  Way  is  a  sun  somewhat  like  ours  and 
that  each  spiral  nebula  is  again  a  Milky  Way  from 
which  the  light  has  taken  many  millions  of  years  to 
reach  our  earth,  while  the  earth  itself,  with  its  human 
race  on  it,  sinks  away  into  an  insignificant  speck  which 
is  hardly  discernible  in  the  boundless  space. 

Incidentally  we  must  remind  ourselves  that  to  look 
at  nature  in  this  way  is  to  look  at  it  from  the  aesthetic 
and  ethical  standpoints.  These,  of  course,  have  no 
direct  relation  to  physical  science.  Therefore  they  are 
excluded.  But  in  excluding  them  there  is  a  fundamental 
difference  between  the  attitude  of  the  non-positivist  and 
that  of  the  positivist  physicist.  The  ordinary  scientist, 
who  does  not  believe  in  the  positivist  attitude,  admits 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  73 

the  validity  of  the  aesthetic  standpoint  and  the  ethical 
standpoint  j  but  he  recognizes  these  as  belonging  to 
another  way  of  looking  at  nature.  Such  a  way  does  not 
come  within  the  province  of  physical  science.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  positivist  does  not  admit  any  such 
values  as  real  at  all,  even  in  other  provinces  than 
physical  science.  For  him  a  beautiful  sunset  is  merely 
a  sequence  of  sensory  impressions.  Therefore,  as  I 
said  at  the  beginning,  as  long  as  we  logically  pursue 
the  positivist  teaching  we  must  exclude  every  influence 
of  a  sentimental,  aesthetic  or  ethical  character  from 
our  minds.  We  have  to  keep  to  the  logical  track.  That 
is  the  indispensable  guarantee  of  certainty  which  the 
positivist  teaching  has  to  offer.  And  here  I  may  remind 
the  reader  once  again  that  we  are  examining  a  system 
which  has  been  put  forward  with  the  very  laudable 
motive  of  furnishing  a  sure  basis  for  the  reliability  of 
science.  Therefore  the  whole  position  must  be  dis- 
cussed entirely  objectively  and  free  from  any  polemical 
feeling. 

In  the  positivist  way  of  looking  at  nature  sensory 
impressions  are  the  primary  data  and  therefore  signify 
immediate  reality.  From  this  it  follows  that  in  principle 
it  would  be  a  mistake  to  speak  of  the  senses  themselves 
being  deceived.  What  under  certain  circumstances  can 
be  deceptive  are  not  the  sensory  impressions  themselves 
but  the  conclusions  we  so  often  draw  from  them.  If 
we  plunge  a  straight  stick  into  water  and  hold  it  slant- 
wise, and  notice  the  apparent  bend  at  the  point  of  im- 
mersion, we  are  not  deceived  by  the  sense  of  sight  into 


74  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

thinking  that  the  stick  is  thereby  bent.  There  is  an 
actual  bending  present  as  an  optical  perception  ;  but 
that  is  quite  a  different  thing  from  concluding  that  the 
stick  itself  is  bent.  The  positivist  will  not  allow  us  to 
conclude  anything.  We  have  a  sensory  impression  of 
the  part  of  the  stick  that  is  in  water  and  a  contiguous 
sensory  impression  of  the  part  that  is  in  air;  but  we 
have  no  right  to  say  anything  about  the  stick  itself. 
The  most  that  the  positivist  principle  will  allow  us 
to  say  is  that  the  stick  looks  "as  if"  it  were  bent.  If 
we  explain  the  whole  phenomenon  by  saying  that  the 
light  rays  which  are  reflected  in  the  air  from  the  stick 
to  the  eye  pass  through  a  less  dense  medium  than  that 
through  which  the  rays  pass  when  reflected  from  the 
part  of  the  stick  immersed  in  water,  and  that  therefore 
the  latter  are  more  strongly  deflected,  that  way  of 
stating  the  case  is  useful  from  many  points  of  view 
but  it  is  no  closer  to  reality  than  to  say  that  the  senses 
perceive  the  stick  "as  if"  it  were  bent. 

The  essential  point  here  is  that,  from  the  standpoint 
of  Positivism,  both  ways  of  stating  the  case  are  funda- 
mentally of  equal  validity.  And  there  would  be  no 
sense  in  attempting  to  judge  their  rival  validities  by 
asking  how  far  one  is  more  appropriate  than  the  other, 
by  appealing  to  the  sense  of  touch  to  rectify  the  ap- 
parent anomaly  of  a  stick  which  was  straight  in  air 
being  bent  in  water.  In  the  positivist  system  there  would 
be  no  meaning  in  a  decision  one  way  or  another;  be- 
cause a  strictly  logical  positivist  science  would  have  to 
be  content  with  merely  noting  the  sensory  impressions 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  75 

and  leaving  the  matter  at  that.  We  could  say  that  the 
stick  looks  "as  if"  it  were  bent.  In  practice,  of  course, 
anything  like  a  serious  attempt  at  an  all-round  appli- 
cation of  this  "as  if"  theory  would  lead  to  ridiculous 
consequences.  But  here  we  are  not  testing  the  positivist 
theory  by  any  such  grounds.  We  are  considering  it  on 
its  own  chosen  ground  of  logical  consistency,  which  is 
its  bedrock  foundation.  It  must  stand  or  fall  by  the 
consequences  that  would  result  for  physical  science  by 
the  logical  application  of  the  positivist  premises. 

What  I  have  said  here  in  regard  to  the  stick  applies 
equally  to  all  the  surrounding  objects  of  inanimate 
nature.  In  the  positivist  view  a  tree  is  nothing  more 
than  a  complex  of  sense-impressions.  We  can  see  it 
grow.  We  can  hear  the  rustle  of  its  leaves  and  inhale 
the  perfumes  of  its  blossoms.  But  if  we  take  away  all 
these  sensory  impressions  then  nothing  remains  to  cor- 
respond to  what  may  be  called  the  "tree  in  itself." 

What  holds  good  for  the  world  of  plant  life  must 
also  have  meaning  for  the  animal  world.  We  speak 
of  this  world  as  a  special  and  independent  realm  of 
being,  but  that  is  solely  because  it  is  a  convenient  way 
of  thinking  and  talking.  If  we  tread  on  a  worm  it 
squirms.  That  we  can  see.  But  there  would  be  no  sense 
in  asking  if  the  worm  suffers  pain  thereby.  For  a  man 
can  feel  only  his  own  pain  and  he  cannot  with  any 
certainty  of  knowledge  extend  that  same  feeling  to 
the  animal  world.  To  say  that  an  animal  suffers  pain 
is  an  assumption  based  on  a  summary  of  various  char- 
acteristics that  correspond  to  what  happens  in  our  own 


76         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

case  under  similar  circumstances.  In  the  case  of  a  worm 
we  notice  a  squirming  or  shrugging.  In  the  case  of 
other  animals  we  notice  contortions  of  the  face  and 
body.  These  are  analogous  to  what  happens  in  our  case 
under  like  conditions.  And  there  are  certain  cries  in 
I  the  animal  world  which  are  analogous  to  the  sounds 
we  utter  when  we  suffer  pain. 

When  we  come  from  the  animal  world  to  the  world 
of  human  beings  we  find  the  positivist  scientists  making 
a  clear  distinction  between  one's  own  impressions  and 
the  impressions  of  others.  One's  own  impressions  are 
the  sole  reality  and  they  are  realities  only  for  oneself. 
The  impressions  of  another  person  are  only  indirectly 
knowable  to  us.  As  objects  of  knowledge  they  signify 
something  fundamentally  different  from  our  own  im- 
pressions. Therefore  in  speaking  of  them  we  are  merely 
following  the  same  sort  of  useful  analogy  as  when  we 
speak  of  the  suffering  of  animals.  But,  in  the  strict 
positivist  view,  we  have  no  reliable  knowledge  what- 
soever of  other  people's  impressions.  Because  they  are 
not  a  direct  sensory  perception,  they  do  not  furnish  a 
basis  for  the  certainty  of  our  knowledge. 

It  is  quite  clear  that  the  positivist  outlook  cannot 
be  accused  of  logical  inconsistency.  So  long  as  we  stick 
closely  to  its  principles  we  do  not  find  ourselves  up 
against  any  contradiction.  That  is  the  strong  point  of 
the  whole  system.  But  when  we  come  to  apply  it  as 
the  exclusive  foundation  on  which  scientific  research 
can  be  carried  on  we  shall  find  that  the  result  would 
be  of  very  significant  import  for  physical  science.  If 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  77 

the  scope  of  physical  science  extends  no  further  than 
the  mere  description  of  sensory  experiences,  then  strictly 
only  one's  own  experiences  can  be  taken  as  the  object 
of  such  description  5  because  only  one's  own  experiences 
are  primary  data.  Now  it  is  clear  that  on  the  basis  of 
a  mere  individual  complex  of  experience  not  even  the 
most  gifted  of  men  could  construct  anything  like  a 
comprehensive  scientific  system.  So  we  are  faced  with 
the  alternative  of  either  renouncing  the  idea  of  a  com- 
prehensive science,  which  will  hardly  be  agreed  to  even 
by  the  most  extreme  positivist,  or  to  admit  a  compro- 
mise and  allow  the  experiences  of  others  to  enter  into 
the  groundwork  of  scientific  knowledge.  But  we  should 
thereby,  strictly  speaking,  give  up  our  original  stand- 
point, namely,  that  only  primary  data  constituted  a 
reliable  basis  of  scientific  truth.  The  sensory  impressions 
of  others  are  secondary  and  they  are  data  for  us  only 
through  the  reports  we  have  of  them.  This  brings  a 
new  factor  into  play  here,  namely,  the  trustworthiness 
of  oral  and  written  information  in  scientific  reports. 
Therewith  we  break  at  least  one  link  of  the  logical 
chain  which  holds  the  positivist  system  together ;  for  the 
foundational  principle  of  the  system  is  that  only  imme- 
diate perception  can  be  considered  as  offering  material 
for  scientific  certainty. 

Let  us,  however,  pass  over  this  difficulty  and  let  us 
assume  that  all  reports  furnished  by  scientific  research- 
ers are  reliable  or  at  least  that  we  have  an  infallible 
means  of  excluding  those  which  are  unreliable.  In  this 
case  it  is  obvious  that  the  reports  furnished  by  the 


78  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

numerous  scientists  who  were  and  are  acknowledged  as 
honorable  and  reliable  both  in  the  past  and  to-day  must 
be  taken  into  scientific  consideration  j  and  there  are  no 
grounds  whereon  some  should  be  excluded  in  favor  of 
others.  It  would  be  quite  wrong  to  devaluate  the  claims 
of  any  investigators  on  the  grounds  that  his  findings 
have  not  been  corroborated  by  others. 

If  we  should  stick  to  this  idea  then  it  would  be  diffi- 
cult to  explain  or  to  justify  the  conduct  of  physical 
science  in  regard  to  certain  individual  researchers.  Let 
us  take  one  instance  as  illustrative. 

The  so-called  N-rays  which  were  discovered  by  the 
French  physicist,  Blondlot,  in  the  year  1903,  and  at 
that  time  studied  on  all  sides,  are  to-day  entirely 
ignored.  Rene  Blondlot,  who  was  professor  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Nancy,  was  admittedly  an  excellent  and 
reliable  investigator.  His  discovery  was  for  him  an  ex- 
perience as  great  as  that  of  any  other  physicist.  We 
cannot  say  that  he  was  fooled  by  his  sense-perceptions  $ 
for  in  positivist  physics,  as  we  have  seen,  there  is  no 
such  thing  as  delusion  in  sensuous  perception.  It  would 
be  only  proper  and  right  to  look  upon  the  N-rays  as 
primary  reality-data,  something  that  directly  struck  the 
perception  of  one  man.  And  if  since  the  time  of  Blond- 
lot  and  his  school  no  man  throughout  all  the  years 
between  has  succeeded  in  reproducing  them,  that  is  no 
reason  for  saying — at  least  from  the  positivist  stand- 
point— that  they  will  not  one  day,  under  some  special 
circumstances,  yet  again  become  discernible. 

Under  the  positivist  test  we  should  have  to  agree 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  79 

that  the  number  of  those  researchers  whose  findings  are 
of  value  for  physical  science  is  indeed  very  small.  We 
should  have  to  admit  only  those  who  devote  themselves 
specially  to  this  science,  because  the  discoveries  which 
outsiders  have  made  in  this  field  are  more  or  less 
insignificant.  Moreover,  we  must  from  the  outset  ex- 
clude all  theoretical  physicists  j  for  their  experiences 
are  restricted  essentially  to  the  use  of  pen,  ink,  and 
paper  and  abstract  reasoning.  And  thus  we  have  only 
the  experimental  physicists  remaining,  and  in  the  first 
line  only  those  who  confine  themselves  to  the  operation 
of  extremely  sensitive  instruments  for  special  investi- 
gation. Therefore  in  the  positivist  hypothesis  only  a 
small  roll  of  specially  qualified  physicists  come  into 
the  picture  when  we  speak  of  the  contributions  of 
those  who  have  devoted  themselves  to  the  progress  of 
physical  science. 

From  this  standpoint  how  are  we  to  explain  the 
extraordinary  impression  made  and  the  revolution 
which  was  created  in  the  world  of  international  science 
by  the  findings,  for  instance,  of  Oersted,  who  detected 
the  influence  of  a  galvanic  current  on  the  compass 
needle,  or  of  Faraday,  who  first  discovered  the  effect 
of  electromagnetic  induction,  or  of  Hertz,  who  discov- 
ered small  electric  sparks  in  the  focus  of  his  parabolic 
reflector  by  the  use  of  the  magnifying  glass?  How  and 
why  did  these  individual  sensory  impressions  create 
such  a  furore  and  lead  to  such  a  world  revolution  in 
the  theory  and  application  of  scientific  methods?  To 
this  question  the  upholders  of  positivism  can  give  only 


8o         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

a  roundabout  and  entirely  unsatisfactory  answer.  They 
have  to  fall  back  upon  the  theory  that  these  individual 
experiences,  which  were  insignificant  in  themselves, 
merely  opened  up  a  viewpoint  as  a  result  of  which 
other  researchers  were  led  to  the  discovery  of  a  series 
of  much  greater  and  more  portentous  results.  That  is 
a  rather  lame  answer  but  it  illustrates  very  well  the 
positivist  position,  because  the  upholder  of  positivism 
will  admit  nothing  except  a  bald  description  of  results 
experienced  in  research ;  and  if  we  ask  why  it  is  that 
certain  findings  of  a  few  obscure  individuals,  carried 
out  under  quite  primitive  conditions,  had  such  an  im- 
mediate and  world-wide  significance  for  all  other 
physicists — that  question  has  no  meaning  for  physical 
science  as  viewed  from  the  positivist  standpoint. 

The  reason  for  taking  up  this  striking  attitude  is 
quite  easy  to  understand.  Those  who  lean  towards  the 
discipline  that  I  have  been  describing  deny  the  idea 
and  the  necessity  of  an  objective  physical  science  which 
is  independent  of  the  actually  experiencing  and  sense- 
perceiving  investigator.  They  cling  to  this  attitude  be- 
cause they  are  bound  logically  to  acknowledge  no  other 
i  reality  save  that  of  the  factual  experience  of  the  indi- 
vidual physicist.  Now  I  think  it  is  obvious  here  that 
if  physical  science  as  such  were  to  accept  this  position, 
as  the  exclusive  basis  of  its  research,  then  it  would  find 
itself  trying  to  support  a  huge  structure  on  a  very 
inadequate  foundation.  A  science  that  starts  off  by  pre- 
dicting the  denial  of  objectivjty  has  already  passed 
sentence  on  itself.  Of  what  value  to  the  world  are 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  81 

the  sensory  impressions  of  a  mere  individual?  Yet  that 
is  the  foundation  to  which  in  the  last  analysis  physical 
science  is  reduced  in  looking  for  a  basis  for  its  struc- 
ture. This  plot  is  entirely  too  small  for  such  a  building. 
It  has  to  be  extended  by  the  addition  of  other  ground. 
No  science  can  rest  its  foundation  on  the  dependability 
of  single  human  individuals.  And  the  moment  we  have 
made  that  statement  we  have  taken  a  step  which  puts 
us  off  the  logical  pathway  of  the  positivist  system.  We 
have  followed  the  call  of  common  sense.  We  have  taken 
a  jump  into  the  metaphysical  realm ;  because  we  have 
accepted  the  hypothesis  that  sensory  perceptions  do  not 
of  themselves  create  the  physical  world  around  us,  but 
rather  that  they  bring  news  of  another  world  which 
lies  outside  of  ours  and  is  entirely  independent  of  us. 

And  thus  we  strike  out  the  positivist  als-ob  (As-If)  j 
and  attribute  a  higher  kind  of  reality  than  that  of  mere 
description  of  immediate  sensory  impressions  to  the 
practical  discoveries  that  have  been  already  mentioned 
— Faraday's,  etc.  Once  we  take  this  step  we  lift  the 
goal  of  physical  science  to  a  higher  level.  It  is  not 
restricted  to  the  mere  description  of  bare  facts  of  ex- 
perimental discovery  j  but  it  aims  at  furnishing  an 
ever  increasing  knowledge  of  the  real  outer  world 
around  us. 

At  this  point  a  new  epistemological 1  difficulty  enters. 
The  basic  principle  of  the  positivist  theory  is  that  there 
is  no  other  source  of  knowledge  except  within  the  re- 
stricted range  of  perception  through  the  senses.  Now 

1  Epistemology  is  the  Science  of  the  Nature  of  Knowledge. 


82  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

there  are  two  theorems  that  form  together  the  cardinal 
hinge  on  which  the  whole  structure  of  physical  science 
turns.  These  theorems  are:  (i)  There  is  a  real  outer 
world  which  exists  independently  of  our  act  of  know- 
ing) and,  (2)  The  real  outer  world  is  not  directly  know- 
able.  To  a  certain  degree  these  two  statements  are 
mutually  contradictory.  And  this  fact  discloses  the 
presence  of  an  irrational  or  mystic  element  which  ad- 
heres to  physical  science  as  to  every  other  branch  of 
human  knowledge.  The  knowable  realities  of  nature 
cannot  be  exhaustively  discovered  by  any  branch  of 
science.  This  means  that  science  is  never  in  a  position 
completely  and  exhaustively  to  explain  the  problems  it 
has  to  face.  We  see  in  all  modern  scientific  advances 
that  the  solution  of  one  problem  only  unveils  the  mys- 
tery of  another.  Each  hilltop  that  we  reach  discloses 
to  us  another  hilltop  beyond.  We  must  accept  this  as 
a  hard  and  fast  irrefutable  fact.  And  we  cannot  remove 
this  fact  by  trying  to  fall  back  upon  a  basis  which  would 
restrict  the  scope  of  science  from  the  very  start  merely 
to  the  description  of  sensory  experiences.  The  aim  of 
science  is  something  more.  It  is  an  incessant  struggle 
towards  a  goal  which  can  never  be  reached.  Because 
the  goal  is  of  its  very  nature  unattainable.  It  is  some- 
thing that  is  essentially  metaphysical  and  as  such  is 
always  again  and  again  beyond  each  achievement. 

But  if  physical  science  is  never  to  come  to  an  ex- 
haustive knowledge  of  its  object,  then  does  not  this 
seem  like  reducing  all  science  to  a  meaningless  activity? 
Not  at  all.  For  it  is  just  this  striving  forward  that 


IS  THE  EXTERNAL  WORLD  REAL?  83 

brings  us  to  the  fruits  which  are  always  falling  into 
our  hands  and  which  are  the  unfailing  sign  that  we 
are  on  the  right  road  and  that  we  are  ever  and  ever 
drawing  nearer  to  our  journey's  end.  But  that  journey's 
end  will  never  be  reached,  because  it  is  always  the  still 
far  thing  that  glimmers  in  the  distance  and  is  unattain- 
able. It  is  not  the  possession  of  truth,  but  the  success 
which  attends  the  seeking  after  it,  that  enriches  the 
seeker  and  brings  happiness  to  him.  This  is  an  acknowl- 
edgment made  long  ago  by  thinkers  of  deepest  insight, 
even  before  Lessing  gave  it  the  classic  stamp  of  his 
famous  phrase. 


CHAPTER  III 

THE  SCIENTIST'S  PICTURE  OF  THE 
PHYSICAL  UNIVERSE 


THE  ideal  aim  before  the  mind  of  the  physicist  is 
to  understand  the  external  world  of  reality.  But 
the  means  which  he  uses  to  attain  this  end  are  what  are 
known  in  physical  science  as  measurements,  and  these 
give  no  direct  information  about  external  reality.  They 
are  only  a  register  or  representation  of  reactions  to 
physical  phenomena.  As  such  they  contain  no  explicit 
information  and  have  to  be  interpreted.  As  Helmholtz 
said,  measurements  furnish  the  physicist  with  a  sign 
which  he  must  interpret,  just  as  a  language  expert  in- 
terprets the  text  of  some  prehistorical  document  that  be- 
longs to  a  culture  utterly  unknown.  The  first  thing  which 
the  language  expert  assumes — and  must  assume  if  his 
work  is  to  have  any  practical  meaning — is  that  the  docu- 
ment in  question  contains  some  reasonable  message 
which  has  been  stated  according  to  some  system  of 
grammatical  rules  or  symbols.  In  the  same  way  the 
physicist  must  assume  that  the  physical  universe  is  gov- 
erned by  some  system  of  laws  which  can  be  understood, 
even  though  he  cannot  hold  out  to  himself  the  prospect 
of  being  able  to  understand  them  in  a  comprehensive 

84 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  85 

way  or  to  discover  their  character  and  manner  of  opera- 
tion with  anything  like  a  full  degree  of  certitude. 

Taking  it,  then,  that  the  external  world  of  reality 
is  governed  by  a  system  of  laws,  the  physicist  now  con- 
structs a  synthesis  of  concepts  and  theorems  5  and  this 
synthesis  is  called  the  scientific  picture  of  the  physical 
universe.  It  is  a  representation  of  the  real  world  itself 
in  so  far  as  it  corresponds  as  closely  as  possible  to  the 
information  which  the  research  measurements  have  sup- 
plied. Once  he  has  accomplished  this  the  researcher  can 
assert,  without  having  to  fear  the  contradiction  of  facts, 
that  he  has  discovered  one  side  of  the  outer  world  of 
reality,  though  of  course  he  can  never  logically  demon- 
strate the  truth  of  the  assertion. 

If  we  consider  the  efforts  that  have  been  made  by 
physicists,  ever  since  the  days  of  Aristotle,  to  describe 
the  external  universe,  I  think  we  need  have  no  hesita- 
tion in  expressing  unqualified  admiration  for  the  ex- 
traordinary degree  of  perfection  achieved  in  this  re- 
spect by  the  inventive  mind  of  the  scientific  researcher. 
From  the  positivist  standpoint,  of  course,  this  idea  of 
constructing  a  scientific  picture  of  the  physical  universe 
— this  continual  striving  after  a  knowledge  of  external 
reality — is  something  foreign  and  meaningless.  For 
where  there  is  no  outer  object  there  is  nothing  that  can 
be  portrayed  or  described. 

The  chief  quality  to  be  looked  for  in  the  physicist's 
world-picture  must  be  the  closest  possible  accord  be- 
tween the  real  world  and  the  world  of  sensory  experi- 
ence. What  is  taken  in  through  the  senses  is  the  first 


86  WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

material  that  the  physicist  has  to  work  upon.  And  the 
first  process  which  this  raw  material  must  undergo  is 
one  of  elimination  and  refinement.  From  the  whole 
complex  of  sensory  data  everything  must  be  cut  away 
and  discarded  which  may  have  arisen  from  the  sub- 
jective constructive  tendencies  of  the  sensory  organs 
themselves.  And,  furthermore,  everything  must  be 
eliminated  which  can  be  attributed  to  the  accident  of 
special  circumstances.  In  this  latter  connection  attention 
must  be  paid  to  the  fact  that  measuring  instruments 
may  affect  the  results  that  are  being  arrived  at  during 
the  process  of  observation.  That  is  all  the  more  likely 
to  be  the  case  in  the  observation  of  minutiae. 

Supposing  all  the  above  conditions  to  have  been 
verified,  then  the  physicist's  picture  of  the  external 
universe  has  only  one  further  requirement  to  fulfill. 
Throughout  its  whole  composition  it  must  be  free  from 
everything  in  the  nature  of  a  logical  incoherence.  Other- 
wise the  researcher  has  an  entirely  free  hand.  He  may 
give  rein  to  his  own  spirit  of  initiative  and  allow  the 
constructive  powers  of  the  imagination  to  come  into 
play  without  let  or  hindrance.  This  naturally  means  that 
he  has  a  significant  measure  of  freedom  in  making  his 
mental  constructions ;  but  it  must  be  remembered  that 
this  freedom  is  only  for  the  sake  of  a  specific  purpose 
and  is  a  constructive  application  of  the  imaginative 
powers.  It  is  not  a  mere  arbitrary  flight  into  the  realms 
of  fancy. 

The  physicist  is  bound,  by  the  very  nature  of  the 
task  in  hand,  to  use  his  imaginative  faculties  at  the  very 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  87 

first  step  he  takes.  For  the  first  stage  of  his  work  must 
be  to  take  the  results  furnished  by  a  series  of  experi- 
mental measurements  and  try  to  organize  these  under 
one  law.  That  is  to  say,  he  must  select  according  to  a 
plan  which  will  in  the  first  instance  be  hypothetical  and 
therefore  a  construction  of  the  imagination.  And  when 
he  finds  that  the  given  results  will  not  fit  into  one  plan 
he  discards  it  and  tries  another.  This  means  that  his 
imaginative  powers  must  always  be  speculating  on  the 
significance  of  the  data  which  have  been  furnished 
through  experimental  measurements.  He  is  in  the  same 
position  as  a  mathematician  who  is  presented  with  a 
number  of  single  points  that  have  to  be  joined  together 
with  a  curve.  The  closer  together  and  the  more 
numerous  these  points  are,  the  more  innumerable  will 
be  the  possible  kinds  of  alternative  curves  that  present 
themselves  to  the  mind.  We  meet  with  practically  the 
same  task  when  we  follow  the  movements  of  a  sensitive 
registering  instrument  which  is  designed  to  mark  only 
one  independent  and  definite  curve,  such  as  the  tem- 
perature curve  y  for  we  find  that  this  curve  is  never 
sharply  defined  but  is  always  a  more  or  less  broad  stroke 
in  which  an  endless  number  of  sharp  curves  find  their 
place. 

As  to  how  one  may  reach  a  decision  in  the  midst  of 
this  uncertainty,  no  general  rule  of  procedure  can  be 
laid  down.  One  must  simply  choose  a  definite  line  of 
thought.  And  that  line  of  thought  ought  to  be  directed 
towards  founding,  on  the  basis  of  a  selected  combination 
of  ideas,  a  hypothesis  in  the  light  of  which  we  can  out- 


88         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

line  the  curve  we  are  seeking  for,  and  outline  it  in  such 
a  way  that  it  will  have  a  clarity  and  definiteness  of  its 
own  that  distinguishes  it  from  the  numberless  other 
curves  intruding  on  the  scene.  In  other  words,  where 
the  spectrum  shows  for  instance  a  diversified  picture, 
and  where  we  are  seeking  for  the  cause  of  only  one 
element  in  that  picture,  we  have  to  imagine  a  number  of 
hypothetical  causes  and  examine  them  one  after  the 
other  until  we  hit  upon  something  that  will  accord  with 
a  certain  series  of  results  that  are  pictured  on  the  spec- 
trum. The  line  of  thought  which  leads  to  these  various 
alternatives  has  its  origin  entirely  outside  the  ambit  of 
logic.  In  order  to  formulate  this  kind  of  hypothesis  the 
physicist  must  possess  two  characteristics.  He  must  have 
a  practical  knowledge  of  his  whole  field  of  work  and 
he  must  have  a  constructive  imagination.  This  means 
that,  in  the  first  place,  he  must  be  acquainted  with  other 
kinds  of  measurements  besides  the  one  that  he  is  actually 
using.  And,  in  the  second  place,  he  must  have  the  knack 
of  combining  under  one  viewpoint  the  results  obtained 
through  two  different  kinds  of  measurement. 

Every  hypothesis  that  is  productive  of  results  has  its 
origin  in  some  fortunate  juxtaposition  of  two  different 
ways  in  which  observations  have  presented  themselves. 
We  see  this  truth  very  clearly  illustrated  in  the  famous 
historical  cases  that  have  led  to  epoch-making  dis- 
coveries. 

When  Archimedes  had  noted  the  loss  of  weight 
registered  by  his  own  body  in  water  he  connected  this 
fact  with  the  loss  of  weight  which  various  other  bodies 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  89 

would  undergo  on  being  placed  in  water,  and  thus  he 
arrived  at  a  means  of  finding  out  the  specific  gravities 
of  various  metals.  This  came  into  his  head  one  day  while 
in  his  bath  and  meditating  how  he  could  assay  the  golden 
crown  of  the  King  of  Syracuse,  which  was  suspected 
of  containing  a  silver  alloy,  though  it  purported  to  be  of 
pure  gold.  Applying  the  experience  of  his  own  loss  of 
weight  in  the  bath,  it  struck  him  that  the  excessive  bulk 
occasioned  by  the  alloy  could  be  detected  by  putting  the 
crown,  and  equal  weights  of  gold  and  silver,  separately 
in  a  vessel  of  water  and  measuring  the  difference  of  the 
overflow.  Newton  noticed  the  movement  of  an  apple 
falling  from  a  tree  in  his  orchard  and  he  connected  that 
observation  with  the  motion  of  the  moon  in  relation  to 
the  earth.  Einstein  observed  the  state  of  a  gravitating 
body  in  a  fixed  box,  and  considered  this  in  juxtaposition 
with  the  state  of  a  body  free  from  gravitation  in  a  box 
subjected  to  a  process  of  upward  acceleration.  Niels 
Bohr  associated  the  orbital  rotation  of  the  electrons 
around  the  nucleus  of  an  atom  with  the  movement  of 
planets  around  the  sun.  All  these  combinations  were 
productive  of  famous  results.  Indeed  it  would  be  an 
interesting  mental  exercise  if  one  were  to  take  as  many 
as  possible  of  the  hypotheses  which  have  proved  sig- 
nificant of  results  in  the  pursuit  of  physical  science  and 
then  try  to  discover  the  respective  combinations  of  ideas 
to  which  the  hypotheses  owed  their  origin.  But  the  task 
would  be  a  difficult  one  because,  generally  speaking, 
creative  master  minds  have  felt  a  personal  aversion 
to  the  idea  of  unfolding  before  the  public  gaze  those 


90         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

delicate  threads  of  thought  out  of  which  their  produc- 
tive hypotheses  were  woven,  and  the  myriad  other 
threads  which  failed  to  be  interwoven  into  any  final 
pattern. 

The  utility  of  an  hypothesis,  once  it  has  been  put 
forward,  can  be  tested  only  by  following  out  the  logical 
results  that  flow  from  its  application.  This  has  to  be 
done  in  a  purely  logical — and  primarily  mathematical 
— way,  whereby  the  hypothesis  is  used  as  a  starting- 
point  and  as  complete  a  theoretical  system  as  possible  is 
developed  from  it.  Once  the  theoretical  system  has  thus 
been  fully  developed  it  will  be  put  to  the  test  of  the 
measurements  which  have  been  furnished  by  factual 
experiment.  According  as  the  system  closely  corresponds 
with  these  measurements  we  can  judge  whether  the 
hypothesis  from  which  we  started  was  or  was  not  suc- 
cessfully chosen. 

Such  being  the  actual  method  of  procedure  adopted 
by  the  physicist,  we  can  understand  at  once  how  it  is 
that  the  progress  of  physical  science  does  not  follow 
a  regular  curve  of  development,  which  might  mark  an 
all-round  process  of  increasing  depth  and  precision  in 
the  knowledge  we  are  gaining  of  the  external  world. 
It  is  rather  a  zigzag  pattern  that  the  curve  of  scientific 
progress  follows ;  indeed  I  might  say  that  the  forward 
movement  is  of  an  explosive  type,  where  the  rebound 
is  an  attendant  characteristic  of  the  advance.  Every 
applied  hypothesis  which  succeeds  in  throwing  the 
searchlight  of  a  new  vision  across  the  field  of  physical 
science  represents  a  plunge  into  the  darkness ;  because 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  91 

we  cannot  at  first  reduce  the  vision  to  a  logical  state- 
ment. Then  follows  the  birth-struggle  of  a  new  theory. 
Once  this  has  seen  the  light  of  day  it  has  to  go  forward 
willy-nilly  until  the  stamp  of  its  destiny  is  put  on  it 
when  the  test  of  the  research  measurements  is  applied. 
If  the  hypothesis  survives  this  test,  then  it  advances  in 
prestige  and  acceptance  and  the  theory  arising  from  its 
application  develops  and  expands  to  a  more  and  more 
comprehensive  ambit. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  if  the  application  of  research 
measurements  places  difficulties  to  the  viability  of  our 
hypothesis,  then  fears  and  misgivings  and  critical  birth 
conditions  set  in.  But  these  are  the  signs  of  the  breaking 
up  of  old  acceptances  and  the  bringing  to  birth  of  a  new 
hypothesis.  The  task  of  the  latter  will  be  to  push  for- 
ward to  the  solution  of  the  crisis  out  of  which  it  was 
born,  and  to  construct  a  new  theory  which  will  preserve 
what  was  genuine  in  the  old  order  of  things,  while  cor- 
recting and  discarding  the  mistakes.  So,  in  the  everlast- 
ing interplay  of  change  succeeding  upon  change,  the 
knowledge  which  physical  science  brings  to  us  comes  at 
one  time  with  hesitating  step  and  at  another  with  a  for- 
ward bound,  in  its  way  towards  the  discovery  of  the  real 
external  universe. 

This  has  been  a  regularly  recurrent  feature  through- 
out the  historical  development  of  physical  science.  Take 
the  case  of  the  Lorentzian  theory  of  electrodynamic 
motion.  The  conflicts  and  contradictions  which  were  set 
afoot  by  the  application  of  actual  research  measure- 
ments in  this  case  are  well  known ,  but  only  those  who 


92         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

have  closely  followed  the  thorny  path  of  the  Lorentzian 
theory  step  by  step  can  rightly  appraise  the  relief  which 
came  to  hand  when  the  Relativity  hypothesis  was  first 
established.  An  almost  exactly  similar  experience  has 
been  encountered  in  the  history  of  the  quantum  theory ; 
but  in  this  latter  case  the  crisis  is  not  yet  entirely  passed. 

It  has  already  been  said  that  in  the  statement  of  any 
hypothesis  the  author  of  it  has  a  free  hand  from  the 
very  start.  He  has  full  and  free  choice  of  the  concepts 
and  theorems  which  he  will  employ  in  framing  his 
synthesis,  provided,  of  course,  that  there  is  no  logical  con- 
tradiction between  them.  It  is  not  true,  as  has  often  been 
stated  in  physicist  circles,  that  in  the  exposition  of  an 
hypothesis  the  explorer  must  draw  the  material  for  his 
ideas  solely  and  strictly  from  those  original  data  which 
have  been  definitely  furnished  by  the  results  of  the  re- 
search measurements.  This  would  mean  that  the  forma- 
tive concepts  which  give  shape  to  an  hypothesis  must  be 
strictly  independent  of  all  theoretical  origin.  That  is  not 
so.  For,  on  the  one  hand,  every  hypothesis — as  a  factor 
in  the  picture  of  the  external  universe  presented  by  the 
physicist — is  a  product  of  the  freely  speculating  human 
mind;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  there  are  no  physical 
formulae  whatsoever  which  are  the  immediate  results  of 
research  measurements.  The  opposite  is  the  case.  Every 
measurement  first  acquires  its  meaning  for  physical  sci- 
ence through  the  significance  which  a  theory  gives  it. 
Anybody  who  is  familiar  with  a  precision  laboratory  will 
agree  that  even  the  finest  and  most  direct  measurements 
— such  as  those  of  weight  and  current — have  to  be  cor- 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  93 

rected  again  and  again  before  they  can  be  employed 
for  any  practical  purpose.  It  is  obvious  that  these  cor- 
rections cannot  be  suggested  by  the  measurement  process 
itself.  They  must  first  be  discovered  through  the  light 
which  some  theory  or  other  throws  upon  the  situation  j 
that  is  to  say,  they  must  arise  from  an  hypothesis. 

The  truth  of  the  whole  matter  is  that  the  inventor  of 
an  hypothesis  has  unlimited  scope  in  the  choice  of  what- 
ever means  he  may  deem  helpful  to  his  ultimate  pur- 
pose. He  is  not  hindered  by  the  physiological  tendencies 
towards  constructive  picturing  which  are  a  feature  of 
the  activity  of  his  own  sense-organs.  Nor  is  he  restricted 
by  the  guiding  hand  of  his  physical  measuring-gear. 
With  the  eye  of  the  spirit  he  penetrates  and  supervises 
the  most  delicate  processes  that  unfold  themselves  in  the 
pattern  of  the  physical  universe  which  unrolls  before 
him.  He  follows  the  movements  of  every  electron  and 
watches  the  frequency  and  form  of  every  wave.  He 
even  invents  his  own  geometry  as  he  goes  along.  And  so 
with  his  spiritual  working-gear,  with  these  instruments 
of  ideal  exactitude,  he  takes  a  personal  part,  as  it  were, 
in  every  physical  process  that  happens  before  him.  And 
all  this  is  for  the  purpose  of  pushing  through  these  dif- 
ficult thought  experiments — which  are  a  factor  of  every 
research  process — to  the  final  establishment  of  conclu- 
sions that  will  be  of  wide  application.  Naturally  all  such 
conclusions  have,  at  the  outset  of  their  statement,  noth- 
ing to  do  with  the  real  research  measurements.  And 
therefore  an  hypothesis  can  never  be  declared  true  or 
false  in  the  light  of  such  measurements.  All  that  can  be 


94         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

asked  about  it  is  how  far  it  reaches  or  falls  short  of  serv- 
ing some  practical  purpose  or  other. 

And  now  we  come  to  the  other  side  of  the  picture. 
This  ideal  clear-sightedness  of  the  spiritual  eye,  in  see- 
ing behind  the  various  processes  of  physical  nature,  is 
due  exclusively  to  the  fact  that  the  nature  of  the  physi- 
cal world  in  this  case  is  something  that  is  fashioned  by 
the  mind  of  the  observer  himself.  As  long  as  this  world 
of  his  intuitive  construction  remains  a  hypothetical 
world,  the  creator  has  full  knowledge  of  it,  and  full 
dominion  over  it  and  can  shape  it  what  way  he  will; 
because  as  far  as  concerns  reality  it  has  as  yet  no  value. 
The  first  value  comes  the  moment  the  theoretical  system 
on  which  this  hypothetical  world  has  been  planned  is 
brought  into  touch  with  actual  results  that  have  been 
furnished  through  research  measurements. 

Now,  a  merely  physical  measuring  process  tells  us 
just  as  little  about  the  account  which  we  are  to  give  of 
the  physical  universe  as  it  does  about  the  reality  of  that 
universe  itself.  Indeed  the  process  of  research  measure- 
ment rather  represents  a  happening  in  the  sense-organs 
of  the  researcher  in  relation  to  the  happening  that  takes 
place  in  the  apparatus  that  he  is  using.  All  that  can  be 
definitely  said  about  this  relation  in  respect  of  outer 
reality  is  that  there  is  some  connection  or  other  between 
them.  The  measurement  itself  gives  no  immediate  re- 
sults that  have  a  meaning  of  their  own.  And  it  is 
the  task  of  science  to  try  to  establish  the  meaning  of  the 
above-mentioned  connection,  quite  as  much  as  it  is  the 
task  of  the  scientific  explorer  to  carry  out  the  actual 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  95 

physical  measurements  themselves.  The  former  task  can 
be  accomplished  only  by  the  speculative  mind  of  the 
researcher. 

The  epistemological  difficulties  which  have  arisen  in 
the  sphere  of  theoretical  physics  through  the  develop- 
ment of  the  quantum  theory  seem  to  be  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  bodily  eye  of  the  measuring  physicist  has  been 
identified  with  the  spiritual  eye  of  the  speculative  scien- 
tist. As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  bodily  eye,  being  part  of 
the  physical  process  of  nature  itself,  is  the  object  rather 
than  the  subject  of  scientific  exploration.  For  as  every 
act  of  research  measurement  has  a  more  or  less  causal 
influence  on  the  very  process  that  is  under  observation, 
it  is  practically  impossible  to  separate  the  law  that  we 
are  seeking  to  discover  behind  the  happening  itself  from 
the  methods  that  are  being  used  to  bring  about  the  dis- 
covery. 

It  is  true  that  where  there  is  question  of  natural 
phenomena  in  the  lump,  such  as  a  group  of  atoms  taken 
together,  the  method  of  measurement  is  not  so  likely 
to  influence  the  course  of  the  events  observed.  And  it  is 
for  this  reason  that  in  the  earlier  stages  of  physical 
science,  which  are  now  called  the  classical  physics,  the 
opinion  held  sway  that  the  actual  measurement  itself 
furnishes  a  direct  glimpse  into  the  real  happenings  of 
nature.  But  in  this  assumption,  as  we  have  already  seen, 
there  was  a  fundamental  mistake  which  is  the  counter- 
part of  the  positivist  error,  namely,  the  paying  of  atten- 
tion solely  to  the  results  given  by  experimental  measure- 
ments and  entirely  ignoring  the  inner  reality  of  natural 


96         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

processes.  Yet  while  we  recognize  this  as  a  mistake  on 
the  one  side  we  must  also  realize  on  the  other  side  that 
if  we  are  to  abandon  the  measuring  method  we  have 
no  way  of  coming  into  touch  with  the  real  happenings 
themselves.  But  when  we  are  faced  with  the  indivisible 
quantum  of  action,  the  limit  is  laid  with  mathematical 
accuracy,  beyond  which  the  most  delicate  physical  meas- 
urement is  unable  to  give  a  satisfactory  answer  to  ques- 
tions connected  with  the  individual  behavior  of  the  more 
minute  processes.  The  result  is  that  the  problem  of  these 
infinitesimal  processes  has  no  longer  a  meaning  for 
purely  physical  research.  Here  we  come  to  the  point 
where  such  problems  have  to  be  dealt  with  by  the  specu- 
lative reason.  And  it  is  in  this  abstract  way  that  they 
must  be  taken  into  account  in  our  attempt  to  complete 
the  physicist's  picture  of  the  universe  and  thus  bring  us 
nearer  to  the  discovery  of  external  reality  itself. 

Taking  a  glance  backwards  over  the  road  along  which 
physical  science  has  hitherto  advanced  we  must  admit 
that  further  progress  will  depend  essentially  on  the  de- 
velopment and  wider  application  of  our  methods  of 
measurement.  Thus  far  I  am  at  one  with  the  positivist 
outlook.  But  the  difference  between  us  is  that  positivism 
holds  research  measurement,  through  sensory  percep- 
tion, as  the  be-all  and  end-all  of  the  processes  through 
which  physical  science  advances,  whereas  I  hold  that  the 
study  of  physical  realities  treats  measurement  results  as 
a  more  or  less  intricate  complex  representing  the  regis- 
tration of  reactions  to  happenings  in  the  external  world, 
the  accuracy  of  which  registration  is  relatively  depend- 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  97 

ent  on  what  takes  place  in  the  registering  instruments 
themselves  and  in  the  interpretative  sensory  organs  of 
the  researcher.  The  adequate  analysis  and  correction 
of  this  complex  report  is  one  of  the  chief  functions  of 
scientific  research.  Therefore  from  the  results  that  are 
given  by  experimental  measurements  we  must  choose 
those  which  will  have  a  practical  bearing  on  the  object 
of  our  inquiry,  because  each  particular  attempt  at  dis- 
covering reality  in  the  physical  universe  represents  a 
special  form  of  a  certain  question  which  we  put  to 
nature. 

Now  you  cannot  put  a  reasonable  question  unless  you 
have  a  reasonable  theory  in  the  light  of  which  it  is 
asked.  In  other  words,  one  must  have  some  sort  of 
theoretical  hypothesis  in  one's  mind  and  one  must  put 
it  to  the  test  of  research  measurements.  This  is  why  it 
often  happens  that  a  certain  line  of  research  has  a  mean- 
ing in  the  light  of  one  theory  but  not  in  that  of  another. 
And  very  often  the  significance  of  a  question  changes 
when  the  theory  in  the  light  of  which  it  is  asked  has 
already  changed. 

Let  us  take  for  example  the  transmutation  of  some 
common  metal,  such  as  quicksilver,  into  gold.  For  those 
who  lived  in  the  days  of  alchemists  this  problem  had  a 
very  important  significance  and  innumerable  researchers 
sacrificed  their  means  and  their  life's  efforts  in  an  at- 
tempt to  solve  it.  The  problem  lost  all  its  meaning,  and 
came  to  be  looked  upon  as  a  fool's  pursuit,  when  the 
dogma  of  the  intransmutability  of  atoms  was  introduced. 
But  now  once  again,  since  Bohr  has  put  forward  his 


98         WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

theory  that  the  gold  atom  is  different  from  the  quick- 
silver atom  only  by  the  lack  of  one  single  electron,  the 
problem  has  become  so  vital  that  it  is  being  newly 
worked  upon  with  the  use  of  the  most  modern  research 
methods.  Here  again  one  sees  the  truth  of  the  old  adage, 
that  experience  is  the  pathfinder  of  scientific  study. 
When  intelligently  worked  out,  even  the  most  useless 
experiments  may  result  in  opening  up  a  way  to  the  most 
important  discoveries. 

It  was  thus  that  those  more  or  less  planless  attempts 
to  make  gold  opened  up  the  way  to  the  introduction  of 
scientific  chemistry.  So  too  from  the  unsolved  problem 
of  the  perpetuum  mobile  finally  arose  the  principle  of 
the  conservation  of  energy.  And  the  long  series  of  vain 
attempts  to  measure  the  movement  of  the  earth  led  at 
last  to  the  suggestion  of  the  conditions  from  which  the 
theory  of  relativity  arose.  Experimental  and  theoretical 
adventures  in  science  are  always  interdependent.  The 
one  cannot  progress  without  the  other. 

It  often  happens  that  when  a  new  advance  in  theo- 
retical science  has  definitely  established  itself  certain 
problems  connected  with  it  are  branded  as  meaningless. 
Not  only  that,  but  attempts  are  also  sometimes  made  to 
prove  such  problems  meaningless  on  a  friori  grounds. 
That  is  a  delusion.  In  itself  neither  the  absolute  motion 
of  the  earth — that  is  to  say,  the  motion  of  the  earth 
in  relation  to  the  light-ether — nor  the  absolute  New- 
tonian space,  is  meaningless,  as  has  often  been  declared 
by  popular  exponents  of  the  relativity  theory.  The 
former  problem  is  meaningless  only  when  you  intro- 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  99 

duce  the  special  theory  of  relativity,  and  the  latter  is 
meaningless  only  when  you  introduce  the  general  rela- 
tivity theory. 

So  when  we  look  back  over  the  centuries  we  see  that 
doctrines  on  the  interpretation  of  nature,  which  were 
held  as  sound  and  good  for  their  time,  fell  from  honor 
when  faced  with  the  light  of  some  new  scientific  theory. 
They  served  their  day  and  then  they  passed.  And 
though  succeeded  by  more  scientifically  enlightened 
dogmas  we  must  remember  that  those  old  theories  had 
sense  and  meaning  for  their  age,  as  other  theories  will 
have  had  sense  and  meaning  for  our  time ;  until  another 
day  comes  when  newer  theories  will  arise  to  take  their 
place. 

The  Law  of  Causality  was  unanimously  accepted  until 
recent  times  as  a  fundamental  principle  in  scientific  re- 
search. But  now  a  battle  of  opinions  is  being  waged 
around  it.  Does  the  principle  of  causality,  as  hitherto  be- 
lieved, hold  good  in  all  its  force  for  every  physical  hap- 
pening? Or  has  it  only  a  summary  and  statistical  signifi- 
cance when  applied  to  the  finer  atoms?  This  question 
cannot  be  decided  by  referring  it  to  any  epistemological 
theory  or  by  putting  it  to  the  test  of  research  measure- 
ments. In  his  attempt  to  build  up  his  hypothetical  pic- 
ture of  the  external  universe  the  physicist  may  or  may 
not,  just  as  he  likes,  base  his  synthesis  on  the  principle  of 
a  strict  dynamic  causality  or  he  may  adopt  only  a  statisti- 
cal causality.  The  important  question  is  how  far  he  gets 
with  the  one  or  the  other.  And  that  can  be  answered 
only  by  choosing  provisionally  one  of  the  two  stand- 


100 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 


points  and  studying  the  conclusions  which  can  be  logi- 
cally derived  from  the  adoption  of  that  standpoint, 
just  as  we  did  when  dealing  with  Positivism. 

In  principle  it  does  not  matter  which  of  the  two  stand- 
points is  chosen  first.  In  practice  one  will  naturally 
choose  that  which  promises  to  turn  out  more  satisfactory 
in  its  logical  results.  And  here  I  must  definitely  declare 
my  own  belief  that  the  assumption  of  a  strict  dynamic 
causality  is  to  be  preferred,  simply  because  the  idea  of 
a  dynamically  law-governed  universe  is  of  wider  and 
deeper  application  than  the  merely  statistical  idea, 
which  starts  off  by  restricting  the  range  of  discovery  5 
because  in  statistical  physics  there  are  only  such  laws  as 
refer  to  groups  of  events.  The  single  events,  as  such,  are 
introduced  and  recognized  expressly  5  but  the  question 
of  their  law-governed  sequence  is  declared  senseless  on 
a  fr'tori  grounds.  That  way  of  procedure  appears  to  me 
to  be  highly  unsatisfactory.  And  I  have  not  been  able  to 
find  the  slightest  reason,  up  to  now,  which  would  force 


us  to  give  up  the  assumption  of  a  strictly  law-governed 
universe,  whether  it  is  a  matter  of  trying  to  discover  the 
nature  of  the  physical,  or  the  spiritual,  forces  around  us. 

It  is  obvious,  of  course,  that  no  strictly  causal  connec- 
tion can  be  deduced  from  a  succession  of  experimental 
experiences.  Between  these  experiences  as  they  succeed 
one  another  we  can  establish  only  a  statistical  relation. 
Even  the  acutest  measurements  are  subject  to  accidental 
and  uncontrollable  mistakes. 

An  experimental  observation  presents,  as  we  have 
seen,  a  complex  result  made  up  of  several  different  ele- 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  101 

ments.  And  even  though  each  element  were  the  direct 
causal  consequence  of  one  other  single  element,  yet  we 
cannot  treat  this  original  element  as  strictly  causal  in  the 
experiment,  independently  of  the  others  j  because  diver- 
sified results  may  follow  from  the  combination  in  which 
each  elemental  factor  is  applied. 

And  here  a  question  arises  which  seems  to  set  a  defi- 
nite impassable  limit  to  the  principle  of  strict  causality, 
at  least  in  the  spiritual  sphere.  This  question  is  of  such  1, 
urgent  human  interest  that  I  think  it  will  be  well  if  I 
treat  it  here  before  I  come  to  a  close.  It  is  the  question 
of  the  freedom  of  the  human  will.  Our  own  conscious- 
ness tells  us  that  our  wills  are  free.  And  the  information 
which  that  consciousness  directly  gives  us  is  the  last  and 
highest  exercise  of  our  powers  of  understanding. 

Let  us  ask  for  a  moment  whether  the  human  will  is 
free  or  whether  it  is  determined  in  a  strictly  causal  way. 
These  two  alternatives  seem  definitely  to  exclude  one 
another.  And  as  the  former  has  obviously  to  be  answered 
in  the  affirmative,  so  the  assumption  of  a  law  of  strict 
causality  operating  in  the  universe  seems  to  be  reduced 
to  an  absurdity  in  at  least  this  one  instance.  In  other 
words,  if  we  assume  the  law  of  strict  dynamic  causality  * 
as  existing  throughout  the  universe,  how  can  we  logi- 
cally exclude  the  human  will  from  its  operation? 

Many  are  the  attempts  that  have  been  made  to  solve 
this  dilemma.  The  purpose  which  in  most  cases  they 
have  to  set  themselves  has  been  to  establish  an  exact 
limit  beyond  which  the  law  of  causality  does  not  apply. 
Recent  developments  in  physical  science  have  come  into 


102        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

play  here,  and  the  freedom  of  the  human  will  has  been 
put  forward  as  offering  logical  grounds  for  the  accept- 
ance of  only  a  statistical  causality  operative  in  the  physi- 
cal universe.  As  I  have  already  stated  on  other  occasions, 
I  do  not  at  all  agree  with  this  attitude.  If  we  should 
accept  it,  then  the  logical  result  would  be  to  reduce  the 
human  will  to  an  organ  which  would  be  subject  to  the 
sway  of  mere  blind  chance.  In  my  opinion  the  question 
.  of  the  human  will  has  nothing  whatsoever  to  do  with 
the  opposition  between  causal  and  statistical  physics.  Its 
importance  is  of  a  much  more  profound  character  and  is 
entirely  independent  of  any  physical  or  biological 
hypothesis. 

I  am  inclined  to  believe,  with  many  famous  philoso- 
phers, that  the  solution  of  the  problem  lies  in  quite  an- 
other sphere.  On  close  examination,  the  above-stated 
alternative — Is  the  human  will  free  or  is  it  determined 
by  a  law  of  strict  causality? — is  based  on  an  inadmis- 
sible logical  disjunction.  The  two  cases  opposed  here  are 
not  exclusive  of  one  another.  What  then  does  it  mean 
if  we  say  that  the  human  will  is  causally  determined? 
It  can  only  have  one  meaning,  which  is  that  every  single 
act  of  the  will,  with  all  its  motives,  can  be  foreseen  and 
predicted,  naturally  only  by  somebody  who  knows  the 
human  being  in  question,  with  all  his  spiritual  and  physi- 
cal characteristics,  and  who  sees  directly  and  clearly 
through  his  conscious  and  subconscious  life.  But  this 
would  mean  that  such  a  person  would  be  endowed  with 
absolutely  clear-seeing  spiritual  powers  of  vision;  in 
other  words  he  would  be  endowed  with  divine  vision. 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  103 

Now,  in  the  sight  of  God  all  men  are  equal.  Even  the 
most  highly  gifted  geniuses,  such  as  a  Goethe  or  a 
Mozart,  are  but  as  primitive  beings  the  thread  of  whose 
innermost  thought  and  most  finely  spun  feelings  is  like 
a  chain  of  pearls  unrolling  in  regular  succession  before 
His  eye.  This  does  not  belittle  the  greatness  of  great 
men.  But  it  would  be  a  piece  of  stupid  sacrilege  on  our 
part  if  we  were  to  arrogate  to  ourselves  the  power  of 
being  able,  on  the  basis  of  our  own  studies,  to  see  as 
clearly  as  the  eye  of  God  sees  and  to  understand  as 
clearly  as  the  Divine  Spirit  understands. 

The  profound  depths  of  thought  cannot  be  pene- 
trated by  the  ordinary  intellect.  And  when  we  say  that 
spiritual  happenings  are  determined,  the  statement 
eludes  the  possibility  of  proof.  It  is  of  a  metaphysical 
character,  just  as  the  statement  that  there  exists  an 
outer  world  of  reality.  But  the  statement  that  spiritual 
happenings  are  determined  is  logically  unassailable,  and 
it  plays  a  very  important  role  in  our  pursuit  of  knowl- 
edge, because  it  forms  the  basis  of  every  attempt  to 
understand  the  connections  between  spiritual  events.  No 
biographer  will  attempt  to  solve  the  question  of  the  mo- 
tives that  govern  the  acts  of  his  hero  by  attributing  these 
to  mere  chance.  He  will  rather  attribute  his  inability  to 
the  lack  of  source  materials  or  he  will  admit  that  his  own 
powers  of  spiritual  penetration  are  not  capable  of  reach- 
ing down  into  the  depths  of  these  motives.  And  in 
practical  everyday  life  our  attitude  to  our  fellow  beings 
is  based  on  the  assumption  that  their  words  and  actions 
are  determined  by  distinct  causes,  which  lie  in  the  indi- 


104        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

vidual  nature  itself  or  in  the  environment,  even  though 
we  admit  that  the  source  of  these  causes  cannot  be  dis- 
covered by  ourselves. 

What  do  we  then  mean  when  we  say  that  the  human 
will  is  free?  That  we  are  always  given  the  chance  of 
choosing  between  two  alternatives  when  it  comes  to  a 
question  of  making  a  decision.  And  this  statement  is  not 
in  contradiction  with  what  I  have  already  said.  It  would 
be  in  contradiction  only  if  a  man  could  perfectly  see 
through  himself  as  the  eye  of  God  sees  through  him; 
for  then,  on  the  basis  of  the  law  of  causality,  he  would 
foresee  every  action  of  his  own  will  and  thus  his  will 
would  no  longer  be  free.  But  that  case  is  logically  ex- 
cluded ;  for  the  most  penetrative  eye  cannot  see  itself, 
no  more  than  a  working  instrument  can  work  upon 
itself.  The  object  and  subject  of  an  act  of  knowing  can 
never  be  identical ;  for  we  can  speak  of  the  act  of  know- 
ing only  when  the  object  to  be  known  is  not  influenced 
by  the  action  of  the  subject  who  initiates  and  performs 
the  act  of  knowing.  Therefore  the  question  as  to 
whether  the  law  of  causality  applies  in  this  case  or  in 
that  is  in  itself  senseless  if  you  apply  it  to  the  action  of 
your  own  will,  just  as  if  somebody  were  to  ask  whether 
he  could  lift  himself  above  himself  or  race  beyond  his 
shadow. 

In  principle  every  man  can  apply  the  law  of  causality 
to  the  happenings  of  the  world  around  him,  in  the  spir- 
itual as  well  as  in  the  physical  order,  according  to  the 
measure  of  his  own  intellectual  powers;  but  he  can  do 
this  only  when  he  is  sure  that  the  act  of  applying  the 


NATURE'S  IMAGE    IN  SCIENCE  105 

law  of  causality  does  not  influence  the  happening  itself. 
And  therefore  he  cannot  apply  the  law  of  causality  to 
his  own  future  thoughts  or  to  the  acts  of  his  own  will. 
These  are  the  only  objects  which  for  the  individual 
himself  do  not  come  within  the  force  of  the  law  of 
causality  in  such  a  way  that  he  can  understand  its  play 
upon  them.  And  these  objects  are  his  dearest  and  most 
intimate  treasures.  On  the  wise  management  of  them 
depend  the  peace  and  happiness  of  his  life.  The  law  of 
causality  cannot  lay  down  any  line  of  action  for  him  and 
it  cannot  relieve  him  from  the  rule  of  moral  responsi- 
bility for  his  own  doings;  for  the  sanction  of  moral 
responsibility  comes  to  him  from  another  law,  which  has 
nothing  to  do  with  the  law  of  causality.  His  own  con- 
science is  the  tribunal  of  that  law  of  moral  responsi- 
bility and  there  he  will  always  hear  its  promptings  and 
its  sanctions  when  he  is  willing  to  listen. 

It  is  a  dangerous  act  of  self-delusion  if  one  attempts 
to  get  rid  of  an  unpleasant  moral  obligation  by  claiming 
that  human  action  is  the  inevitable  result  of  an  inexor- 
able law  of  nature.  The  human  being  who  looks  upon 
his  own  future  as  already  determined  by  fate,  or  the 
nation  that  believes  in  a  prophecy  which  states  that  its 
decline  is  inexorably  decreed  by  a  law  of  nature,  only 
acknowledges  a  lack  of  will  power  to  struggle  and  win 
through. 

And  so  we  arrive  at  a  point  where  science  acknowl- 
edges the  boundary  beyond  which  it  may  not  pass,  while 
it  points  to  those  farther  regions  which  lie  outside  the 
sphere  of  its  activities.  The  fact  that  science  thus  de- 


io6        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

clares  its  own  limits  gives  us  all  the  more  confidence  in 
its  message  when  it  speaks  of  those  results  that  belong 
properly  to  its  own  field.  But  on  the  other  hand  it  must 
not  be  forgotten  that  the  different  spheres  of  activity  of 
the  human  spirit  can  never  be  wholly  isolated  from  one 
another  j  because  there  is  a  profound  and  intimate  con- 
nection between  them  all. 

We  started  on  the  territory  of  a  special  science  and 
have  dealt  with  a  series  of  problems  that  are  of  a  purely 
physical  character  j  but  these  have  led  us  from  the 
world  of  mere  sense-perception  to  the  real  metaphysical 
world.  And  this  world  faces  us  with  the  impossibility  of 
knowing  it  directly.  It  is  a  land  of  mystery.  It  is  a  world 
whose  nature  cannot  be  comprehended  by  our  human 
powers  of  mental  conception  j  but  we  can  perceive  its 
harmony  and  beauty  as  we  struggle  towards  an  under- 
standing of  it.  And  here  on  the  threshold  of  this  meta- 
physical world  we  have  been  brought  face  to  face  with 
the  highest  question  of  all,  that  of  the  freedom  of  the 
human  will.  It  is  a  question  which  each  one  must  medi- 
tate upon  for  himself  if  he  thinks  at  all  seriously  on 
what  the  meaning  of  this  life  may  be. 


CHAPTER  IV 
CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL 

THE  PROBLEM  STATED 


THIS  is  one  of  man's  oldest  riddles.  How  can  the 
independence  of  human  volition  be  harmonized 
with  the  fact  that  we  are  integral  parts  of  a  universe 
which  is  subject  to  the  rigid  order  of  nature's  laws? 

At  first  sight  these  two  aspects  of  human  existence 
seem  to  be  logically  irreconcilable.  On  the  one  hand 
we  have  the  fact  that  natural  phenomena  invariably 
occur  according  to  the  rigid  sequence  of  cause  and 
effect.  This  is  an  indispensable  postulate  of  all  scien- 
tific research,  not  merely  in  the  case  of  those  sciences 
that  deal  with  the  physical  aspects  of  nature,  but  also 
in  the  case  of  the  mental  sciences,  such  as  psychology. 
Moreover,  the  assumption  of  an  unfailing  causal 
sequence  in  all  happenings  is  the  basis  on  which  our 
conduct  of  everyday  life  is  regulated.  But,  on  the  other 
hand,  we  have  our  most  direct  and  intimate  source  of 
knowledge,  which  is  the  human  consciousness,  telling 
us  that  in  the  last  resort  our  thought  and  volition  are 
not  subject  to  this  causal  order.  The  inner  voice  of  con- 
sciousness assures  us  that  at  any  given  moment  we  are 
capable  of  willing  this  or  that  alternative.  And  the 

107 


io8        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

corollary  of  this  is  that  the  human  being  is  generally 
held  responsible  for  his  own  actions.  It  is  on  this  as- 
sumption that  the  ethical  dignity  of  man  is  based. 

How  can  we  reconcile  that  dignity  with  the  principle 
of  causation?  Each  one  of  us  is  an  integral  part  of  the 
world  in  which  we  live.  If  every  other  event  in  the 
universe  be  a  link  in  the  causal  chain,  which  we  call 
the  order  of  nature,  how  can  the  act  of  human  volition 
be  looked  upon  as  independent  of  that  order?  The 
principle  of  causation  is  either  universally  applicable  or 
it  is  not.  If  not,  where  do  we  draw  the  line,  and  why 
should  one  part  of  creation  be  subject  to  a  law  that 
of  its  nature  seems  universal,  and  another  part  be  ex- 
empted from  that  law? 

Among  all  civilized  races  the  profoundest  thinkers 
have  tackled  this  problem  and  have  suggested  innu- 
merable solutions.  I  have  no  intention  of  adding  to  the 
sum-total  here.  My  purpose  in  taking  up  the  question 
in  connection  with  my  own  science  is  that  the  con- 
troversy has  now  entered  the  scientific  field.  From 
suggestions  which  have  been  made  as  to  the  inapplica- 
bility of  the  causal  principle  to  certain  types  of  re- 
search in  physical  science  extensive  conclusions  have 
been  drawn  and  the  age-old  controversy  is  now  being 
waged  more  bitterly  than  ever. 

After  all  the  thought  that  has  been  expended  on  it, 
since  man  first  began  to  reason  over  his  place  in  the 
universe,  one  might  justifiably  assume  that  the  prob- 
lem of  causation  would  be  nearer  to  a  solution  now  than 
formerly,  even  if  we  grant  that  a  complete  and  final 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  109 

solution  is  impossible,  from  the  very  nature  of  the 
question  itself.  And  we  might  reasonably  expect  that 
at  this  stage  of  the  controversy  the  disputants  would 
at  least  be  in  agreement  as  to  the  nature  of  the  funda- 
mental issues  under  discussion.  But  the  opposite  is  the 
case.  Nowadays  it  is  not  merely  the  problem  itself  that 
is  debated ;  but  even  the  very  basic  ideas  involved  in 
it  are  called  into  question — ideas  such  as  the  meaning 
of  the  concept  of  causality  in  itself  and  epistemological 
questions  regarding  the  objects  which  should  be  con- 
sidered to  be  within  the  legitimate  scope  of  human 
knowledge,  the  difference  between  objects  that  are 
sensuously  perceptible  and  objects  that  are  outside  this 
range  and  other  such  questions.  All  this  quarreling  over 
fundamentals  has  added  to  the  confusion. 

The  protagonists  are  mainly  divided  into  two 
schools.  One  school  is  interested  in  the  question  chiefly 
from  the  viewpoint  of  the  advancement  of  knowl- 
edge, holding  that  the  principle  of  strict  causation  is 
an  indispensable  postulate  in  scientific  research,  even 
including  the  sphere  of  mental  activity.  As  a  logical 
consequence  of  this  attitude,  they  declare  that  we  can- 
not except  human  activity  in  any  shape  or  form  from 
the  universal  law  of  causation.  The  other  school  is 
more  concerned  with  the  behavior  of  human  beings 
and  with  the  sense  of  human  dignity,  which  feels  that 
it  would  be  an  unwarrantable  degradation  if  human 
beings,  including  even  the  mentally  and  ethically 
highest  specimens  of  the  race,  were  to  be  considered  as 
inanimate  automata  in  the  hands  of  an  iron  law  of 


no        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

causation.  For  this  school  of  thinkers  the  freedom  of 
the  will  is  the  highest  attribute  of  man.  Therefore  we 
must  hold,  they  say,  that  the  law  of  causation  is  ex- 
cluded from  the  higher  life  of  the  soul,  or  at  least  that 
it  does  not  apply  to  the  conscious  mental  acts  of  the 
higher  specimens  of  humanity. 

Between  these  two  schools  there  is  a  great  number 
of  thinkers  who  will  not  go  the  whole  distance  in  either 
direction.  They  feel  in  a  certain  sense  that  both  parties 
are  right.  They  will  not  deny  the  logigaj  validity  of 
the  one  position  nor  the  ^tjrrgl  validity  of  the  other. 
They  recognize  that  in  the  mental  sciences  the  prin- 
ciple of  causation,  as  a  basis  of  scientific  research,  is 
nowadays  being  pushed  far  beyond  the  borders  of  in- 
animate nature  and  with  advantageous  results.  There- 
fore they  will  not  deny  the  play  of  causality  in  the 
mental  sphere,  though  they  would  like  to  erect  a  bar- 
rier somewhere  within  that  sphere  and  entrench  the 
freedom  of  human  volition  behind  that  barrier. 

Among  those  who  do  not  belong  to  either  of  the 
extreme  schools  perhaps  I  ought  also  to  mention  those 
scientists  who  are  against  the  universal  application  of 
the  principle  of  causality  in  physical  science.  They 
hold  that  it  is  inapplicable  to  the  natural  phenomena 
that  are  studied  in  quantum  physics.  But  most  of  the 
scientists  who  hold  this  do  not  question  the  universal 
validity  of  the  principle  in  itself.  Still  the  attitude 
must  be  mentioned  here;  because,  though  it  does  not 
form  anything  like  a  school  of  thought,  it  indicates  a 
tendency.  And  inasmuch  as  that  tendency  has  been  ex- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  in 

ploited  by  popularizers,  who  speak  of  spontaneity  in 
the  inner  workings  of  nature,  it  deserves  to  be  dealt 
with,  if  for  no  other  purpose  than  to  keep  the  lines 
of  communication  clear  between  serious  science  and  the 
seriously  thinking  public. 

As  to  the  general  controversy  itself,  if  it  did  not 
affect  our  approach  to  physical  science  physicists  as 
such  would  not  have  to  concern  themselves  with  the 
matter.  But  the  controversy  now  affects  the  very  basic 
method  on  which  scientific  research  is  carried  on.  If 
the  basis  of  causation  be  not  valid,  then  how  can  the 
decisions  arrived  at  on  this  basis  be  considered  as  re- 
liable? Therefore  the  controversy  affects  the  general 
claim  to  reliability  which  natural  science  puts  forward. 
That  is  the  reason  why  I  am  discussing  it  here  as  a 
physicist,  in  the  hope  that  what  I  have  to  say  may  help 
to  keep  clear  the  grounds  on  which  my  own  branch 
of  science  rests  its  claim  to  reliability. 

Let  us  first  consider  the  problem  under  its  general 
aspect.  What  is  the  significance  of  the  concept  under- 
lying the  expression  JLaw  of  Causation?  In  everyday 
life  we  are  familiar  "with  tne  idea  ot  a  cause  and,  like 
so  many  everyday  things,  we  imagine  that  this  idea  is 
the  simplest  thing  in  the  world  to  explain.  Common 
sense  and  daily  experience  show  us  that  all  things  and 
events  are  the  products  of  other  things  and  events. 
We  say  of  what  happens  before  our  eyes  that  it  is  the 
effect  of  something  else  and  we  call  that  something 
else  the  cause,  realizing  at  the  same  time  that  several 
causes  may  have  contributed  to  bring  about  one  and 


112 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 


the  same  effect.  On  the  other  hand,  we  realize  that  ef- 
fects themselves  may  be  the  cause  of  subsequent  events. 

When  we  find  ourselves  face  to  face  with  an  event 
which  we  cannot  possibly  refer  to  any  cause  or  series 
of  causes,  and  which  lies  outside  the  range  of  all  the 
causes  that  we  are  familiar  with,  then  what  happens? 
Is  it  perfectly  certain  and  necessary  for  human  thought 
that  for  every  event  in  every  instance  there  must  be 
a  corresponding  cause?  Would  the  thought  involve  a 
logical  contradiction  that  in  this  or  thät  case  the  event 
has  absolutely  happened  of  itself  and  has  no  causal 
relation  whatsoever  to  any  other  event?  Of  course  the 
answer  is  in  the  negative  3  for  it  is  very  easy  to  think 
of  an  event  as  having  no  explanatory  cause  whatsoever. 
In  such  cases  we  speak  of  miracles  and  wonders  and 
magic.  And  the  simple  fact  that  there  exists  a  whole 
range  of  literature  whose  scenes  are  laid  in  wonderland 
is  proof  in  itself  that  the  concept  of  strict  causality  is 
not  an  inherent  necessity  of  human  thought.  Indeed 
the  human  mind  finds  little  difficulty  in  thinking  of 
everything  in  the  world  as  turning  topsy-turvy.  We 
can  say  to  ourselves  that  to-morrow  the  sun  may  rise 
in  the  east,  for  a  change.  We  can  say  to  ourselves  that 
a  miracle  of  nature  may  occur,  contrary  to  all  the  known 
laws  of  nature.  We  can  think  of  the  Niagara  Falls 
for  instance  as  shooting  upwards,  though  this  would 
be  impossible  in  the  world  of  reality.  I  can  think  of 
the  door  of  my  room  in  which  I  am  now  writing  as 
opening  of  its  own  accord.  And  I  can  think  of  historical 
personages  as  entering  the  room  and  standing  beside 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  113 

my  table.  In  the  world  of  reality  to  talk  of  such  events 
may  be  meaningless  and  we  may  call  them  impossible, 
at  least  in  our  everyday  way  of  reasoning.  But  we  must 
distinguish  this  kind  of  impossibility  from  a  logical 
impossibility,  such  as  the  idea  of  a  square  circle  or 
that  the  part  of  something  is  greater  than  the  whole, 
for  no  matter  what  efforts  we  make  to  think  such 
things  we  cannot  think  them,  inasmuch  as  they  entail 
an  inner  contradiction.  We  can  think  of  a  part  and 
we  can  think  of  the  whole  to  which  it  belongs  but  we 
cannot  think  of  the  part  as  greater  than  the  whole. 
This  kind  of  impossibility  is  inherent  in  the  nature  of 
human  thought  itself,  whereas  the  idea  of  something 
happening  outside  the  range  of  causation  is  quite 
logically  coherent. 

Thus  from  the  outset  we  can  be  quite  clear  about 
one  very  important  fact,  namely,  that  the  validity  of 
the  law  of  causation  for  the  world  of  reality  is  a  ques- 
tion that  cannot  be  decided  on  grounds  of  abstract  rea- 
soning. But  reality,  no  matter  what  may  be  said  to  the 
contrary,  is  only  a  particular  and  small  section  of  that 
immense  sphere  over  which  human  thought  can  range. 
This  is  true  even  though  our  powers  of  imagination 
have  always  to  take  their  cue  from  some  real  experi- 
ence. Indeed  experience  is  for  us  the  starting-point  of 
all  thought  j  but  we  possess  the  gift  of  going  beyond 
reality  in  thought.  And  were  it  not  for  this  faculty  of 
the  imaginative  intellect  we  should  have  no  poetry  and 
no  music  and  no  art.  Indeed  it  is  one  of  the  highest 
and  most  precious  gifts  that  man  possesses,  this  power 


114        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

of  lifting  himself  in  thought  into  the  realms  of  light 
whenever  the  weight  of  everyday  life  presses  upon 
him  and  makes  itself  intolerable. 

The  creations  of  art  are  similar  to  those  of  science 
at  least  to  the  extent  that  scientific  research,  in  the 
strictest  sense  of  the  term,  could  never  advance  with- 
out the  creative  force  of  the  imaginative  intellect.  The 
man  who  cannot  occasionally  imagine  events  and  con- 
ditions of  existence  that  are  contrary  to  the  causal  prin- 
ciple as  he  knows  it  will  never  enrich  his  science  by 
the  addition  of  a  new  idea.  And  this  power  of  thinking 
beyond  the  range  of  causation  is  a  prerequisite  not  only 
for  the  construction  of  hypotheses  but  also  for  the  sat- 
isfactory coordination  of  results  that  have  been  arrived 
at  through  scientific  research.  It  is  the  imaginative 
vision  that  puts ;  jp£ward  an  hypothesis.  Then  comes 
experimental  research  to  put~~the  hypotnesis  to  its  test. 
The  results  immediately  arrived  at  through  experiment 
have  to  be  coordinated  so  as  to  form  the  basis  of  a 
theory,  in  the  hope  of  discovering  the  laws  of  nature 
underlying  the  phenomena  that  have  been  studied. 
This  work  again  calls  the  imaginative  powers  into  play 
and  further  experiment  puts  the  laws  thus  constructed 
to  their  final  critical  test. 

To  show  how  the  scientific  mind  must  necessarily 
imagine  alternative  happenings  that  lie  outside  the 
actual  range  of  causation,  when  it  is  seeking  to  estab- 
lish its  conclusions,  let  us  take  a  simple  example  from 
natural  science  as  an  illustration.  Let  us  think  of  a  ray 
of  light  coming  to  us  from  some  distant  star.  Or  in- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  115 

deed  we  can  think  of  it  as  coming  from  some  nearer 
source,  such  as  an  electric  lamp.  But  let  us  think  of  it 
as  passing  through  many  transparent  media  of  differ- 
ent nature  and  different  densities,  such  as  air,  glass, 
water,  etc.,  before  it  finally  reaches  the  eye.  What  route 
will  the  light  choose  in  coming  from  its  point  of  origin 
to  the  eye  of  the  observer?  Generally  speaking,  this 
will  not  be  a  straight  line;  because  when  light  passes 
through  one  medium  after  another  its  direction  is  bent 
from  the  direction  of  the  line  of  entry.  We  are  all 
familiar  with  this  phenomenon  in  the  case  of  a  stick 
put  into  water.  The  line  of  light  coming  from  the  stick 
to  the  eye  is  bent  at  the  point  of  emergence.  And  so 
the  line  of  transmission  for  a  beam  of  light  coming 
from  a  distant  source  to  the  eye  will  be  bent  in  each 
of  the  different  transparent  media  through  which  it 
passes  5  so  that  its  course  will  be  zigzag,  according  to 
the  number  and  varying  densities  of  the  media.  Even 
in  the  atmosphere  itself  the  line  which  a  ray  of  light 
follows  is  quite  irregular,  because  the  atmosphere  pos- 
sesses different  powers  of  deflection  at  different 
heights. 

Now,  can  we  get  any  formula  which  states  the  actual 
route  which  our  imaginary  ray  of  light  follows?  We 
can.  The  answer  is  very  definite.  It  is  contained  in  that 
remarkable  law  of  nature  according  to  which  a  ray  of 
light  leaving  a  distant  source  will  always  choose,  from 
the  many  alternative  routes  at  its  disposal,  that  route 
which  will  bring  it  to  the  eye  of  the  observer  within 
the  shortest  time,  allowing  for  the  fact  that  the  light 


n6        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

has  to  pass  through  the  different  media  at  different 
rates  of  speed.  This  is  called  the  Principle  of  Quick- 
est Arrival.  And  it  has  been  a  very  useful  principle  in 
scientific  research.  But  it  would  have  no  meaning  what- 
soever were  we  not  in  a  position  to  imagine  other  al- 
ternative ways  through  which  the  light  might  travel, 
though  in  reality  it  does  not  travel  along  these  ways 
and  therefore  they  are  causally  impossible,  in  the  sense 
that  light  cannot  actually  come  by  any  other  route. 
All  the  alternative  routes  that  we  may  imagine  are 
possible  only  in  the  abstract  realm  of  the  brain.  They 
are  impossible  in  the  reality  of  nature.  It  is  as  if  the 
light  possessed  a  certain  amount  of  intelligence  and 
acted  by  the  necessity  of  its  own  nature  on  the  laud- 
able principle  of  accomplishing  its  task  in  the  quick- 
est possible  time.  Therefore  it  has  not  the  opportunity 
to  dally  and  try  out  alternative  ways,  for  it  has  to 
decide  at  once  on  the  quickest  way. 

We  have  other  similar  cases  in  natural  science  such, 
for  instance,  as  virtual  motions  which  do  not  obey 
dynamical  laws  and  therefore  in  the  causal  sense  are 
impossible.  But  all  these  fanciful  constructions  play  a 
very  important  role  in  theoretical  science.  They  are 
employed  as  very  useful  instruments  of  thought  in 
the  carrying  out  of  researches  and  the  construction  of 
theories.  Therefore  they  certainly  do  not  involve  any 
contradiction  of  the  laws  of  thought  itself. 

Once  we  have  decided  that  the  law  of  causality  is 
by  no  means  a  necessary  element  in  the  process  of 
human  thought,  we  have  made  a  mental  clearance  for 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  117 

the  approach  to  the  question  of  its  validity  in  the  world 
of  reality.  Now  in  the  first  place  let  us  ask  what  is 
meant  by  the  term,  Causation?  We  might  mean  by  it 
a  regular  interrelation""E>etween  effects  that  follow  one 
another  in  time.  But  we  can  at  once  ask  whether  this 
relation  be  founded  in  the  nature  of  things  themselves, 
or  is  it  totally,  or  partly,  a  product  of  the  imaginative 
faculty?  Might  it  not  be  that  mankind  originally  de- 
veloped this  concept  of  causation  to  meet  the  necessi- 
ties of  a  practical  life,  but  afterwards  found  that  if 
men  were  to  confine  themselves  to  an  outlook  exclu- 
sively based  on  this  principle  life  would  then  turn  out 
to  be  unbearable?  We  need  not  delay  here  to  discuss 
the  various  philosophical  aspects  of  these  questions. 
For  our  present  purpose  it  is  much  more  important  to 
ask  whether  the  causal  connection  between  events  must 
be  considered  as  absolutely  complete  and  always  un- 
broken or  are  there  events  in  the  world  which  do  not 
enter  the  chain  as  connecting  links? 

Let  us  first  see  whether  this  question  can  be  settled 
by  a  systematic  application  ofjdeductive  reasoning.  As 
a  matter  of  fact  some  of  the  most  famous  philosophers 
in  the  history  of  human  thought  have  produced  solu- 
tions of  the  causal  problem  which  were  based  on  purely 
abstract  grounds.  They  took  their  first  stand  on  the 
axiom  ex  nihilo  nihil  fit,  that  nothing  comes  from  noth- 
ing, in  other  words  that  no  event  in  the  world  holds  in 
itself  an  adequate  explanation  of  its  own  existence. 
Reasoning  back  from  this  standpoint  the  philosophers 
of  what  is  generally  called  the  rationalist  school  es- 


n8        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

tablished  as  a  logical  necessity  the  existence  of  a  Su- 
preme Cause.  This  Supreme  Cause  is  the  God  of 
Aristotle  and  the  scholastic  philosophers.  As  a  logical 
consequence  of  the  line  of  reasoning  thus  adopted  it 
was  necessary  to  attribute  to  this  Godhead  the  pos- 
session in  their  plenitude  of  all  the  perfections  that  are 
present  in  the  world.  If  there  be  an  actually  existent 
Supreme  Cause  outside  of  the  world,  who  is  the 
Creator  of  the  world  and  the  Creator  of  all  things  in 
the  world,  then  man  can  deduce  the  nature  of  this  Su- 
preme Cause  only  through  a  study  of  His  handiwork. 
From  this  one  can  easily  see  that  the  nature  to  be  at- 
tributed to  that  Supreme  Cause  must  necessarily  depend 
upon  man's  outlook  on  created  things.  In  other  words, 
the  concept  of  the  Divinity  in  this  case  must  take  its 
color  from  the  world  outlook  either  of  the  individual 
philosopher  in  question  or  of  the  particular  cultural 
background  to  which  he  belongs.  In  the  attempt  which 
the  scholastics  made  to  harmonize  the  Jehovah  of  the 
Jewish  culture  with  the  rational  God  of  Aristotle,  em- 
phasis was  laid  on  the  fact  that  there  is  no  logical  con- 
tradiction whatsoever  in  the  idea  of  the  Creator 
interposing  his  hand  suddenly  within  the  order  of  His 
own  creation,  and  thus  we  have  belief  in  miracles  and 
wonders  established  on  a  philosophical  basis.  There- 
fore in  the  philosophy  of  the  historic  rationalist  school, 
though  the  order  of  nature  is  admitted  as  inevitably 
predetermined  by  the  Supreme  Cause,  yet  the  causal 
chain  in  the  world  itself  may  at  any  time  be  inter- 
rupted by  the  intervention  of  a  supernatural  power. 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  119 

We  pass  now  from  the  Greco-scholastic  to  the  mod- 
ern philosophical  concept  of  the  world.  Rene  Descartes 
is  generally  considered  to  be  the  father  of  modern 
philosophy.  According  to  Descartes,  God  made  all  the 
laws  of  nature  and  all  the  laws  that  govern  the  human 
spirit  by  an  act  of  His  own  free  will  and  for  purposes 
which  are  so  recondite  that  human  thought  is  unable 
to  penetrate  to  their  full  meaning.  Therefore  in  Car- 
tesian philosophy  the  possibility  of  miracles  is  by  no 
means  excluded.  Moreover,  the  logical  consequence  of 
the  inscrutability  of  God's  design  in  the  world  is  that 
we  must  admit  the  possibility  of  events  the  understand- 
ing of  which  lies  entirely  outside  of  the  range  of  the 
human  intellect.  These  may  be  called  mysteries  rather 
than  miracles  in  the  scholastic  sense  of  the  latter  term. 
In  other  words,  as  our  minds  are  not  capable  of  en- 
compassing the  laws  which  guide  the  universe  we  must 
be  content  to  treat  certain  happenings  as  beyond  all  our 
power  of  explanation  and  referable  only  to  the  mys- 
terious ways  of  Divine  Providence.  For  the  purpose  of 
science  this  means  that  practically  we  must  admit  the 
existence  of  breaks  in  the  causal  chain. 

In  contradistinction  to  the  Cartesian  Divinity,  the 
God  of  Baruch  Spinoza  is  a  God  of  harmony  and 
order,  whose  nature  so  interpenetrates  all  creation  that 
the  universal  causal  relation  is  itself  divine  and  there- 
fore absolutely  perfect  and  permitting  of  no  excep- 
tions. In  Spinoza's  view  of  the  world  there  is  no  room 
for  accident  or  miracle.  That  is  to  say,  the  causal  in- 
terrelation is  absolutely  unbroken. 


120        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

The  next  great  name  that  comes  into  view,  when 
looking  over  the  various  world  philosophies  which 
were  founded  on  a  rationalistic  basis,  is  that  of  Gott- 
fried Wilhelm  Leibniz.  According  to  Leibniz  the  world 
was  made  in  fulfillment  of  a  plan  corresponding  to  the 
supreme  wisdom  of  the  Creator.  In  every  created  thing 
God  implanted  the  law  of  its  own  individual  being,  so 
that  each  being  in  the  world  is  independent  of  and 
develops  independently  of  all  other  things,  following 
only  the  law  of  its  own  individual  destiny.  Therefore, 
according  to  Leibniz,  the  causal  interrelation  between 
one  thing  and  another  is  only  apparent.  This  means 
that  we  must  exclude  the  principle  of  causation. 

We  may  conclude,  I  think,  from  these  few  examples 
that  the  philosophical  theories  rationally  deduced  from 
abstract  principles,  as  regards  the  place  of  the  causal 
principle  in  the  world,  are  almost  as  numerous  as  the 
philosophers  themselves.  It  is  obvious  that  along  this 
road  we  can  make  no  progress  towards  a  solution  of 
the  general  problem. 

Now  we  come  to  a  break  in  the  philosophical  tra- 
dition. Whatever  may  be  said  against  the  English  em- 
piricist school  and  its  solipsist 1  consequences  at  least 
it  made  a  break  with  the  naive  conceits  of  the  traditional 
rationalist  school  and  opened  up  the  way  to  the  devel- 
opment of  a  philosophical  outlook  which  is  more  in 
harmony  with  the  scientific  view  of  the  world.  The 
outstanding  characteristic  in  the  teaching  of  the  Eng- 
lish empirical  school  is  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as 

1  Solipsism  is  the  theory  that  the  only  conscious  being  is  myself. 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  121 

certain  knowledge  or  innate  ideas,  such  as  were  pre- 
sumed by  some  of  the  earlier  rationalist  philosophers. 
The  human  mind  as  it  comes  into  the  world  is  an  abso- 
lute blank,  on  which  sense-given  impressions  are  au- 
tomatically recorded  without  any  action  on  the  part 
of  the  mind  itself. 

John  Locke  was  the  founder  of  this  school.  He  rep- 
resents the  first  systematic  attempt  to  estimate  in  a 
critical  way  the  certainty  and  adequacy  of  human 
knowledge  when  confronted  with  the  universe  around 
it.  According  to  Locke  all  ideas  ultimately  depend  on 
experience  and  by  experience  Locke  means  the  sensory 
perceptions  of  the  five  senses.  Beyond  these  five  senses 
there  is  only  the  reflective  consciousness,  which  is  not 
a  sense,  as  having  nothing  to  do  with  objects,  but  as 
Locke  says  "it  may  properly  enough  be  called  an  in- 
ternal sense."  What  we  feel  to  be  warm  or  cold  or  hard 
or  soft  and  what  we  see  to  be  red  or  blue,  that  we 
know;  and  no  other  special  definition  of  it  is  necessary 
or  indeed  possible.  One  often  hears  of  a  delusion  of 
the  senses,  as  may  happen  in  the  case  of  a  mirage,  for 
instance.  This,  however,  does  not  imply  thaFthe  sensa- 
tion itself  is  mistaken,  but  rather  that  the  conclusions 
which  we  draw  from  the  sensory  perception  are  incor- 
rect. What  deceives  us  is  not  the  perceptive  sense  but 
the  rationalizing  intellect. 

Sensory  perception  is  something  entirely  subjective 
and  therefore  from  this  we  cannot  deduce  the  existence 
of  the  object.  Green  is  not  a  property  of  the  leaf  but 
a  sensation  which  we  experience  on  looking  at  the  leaf. 


122        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

And  so  it  is  with  the  other  senses.  Remove  the  sense- 
impressions  and  nothing  of  the  object  will  remain.  John 
Locke  seems  to  have  thought  that  the  sense  of  touch 
plays  a  more  important  role  than  the  other  senses,  be- 
cause it  is  through  this  sense  that  we  perceive  the  me- 
chanical qualities  of  bodies  such  as  thickness,  extension, 
form  and  movement,  and  Locke  seems  to  attribute 
these  qualities  to  something  in  the  bodies  themselves. 
But  the  later  empiricists,  especially  David  Hume,  held 
that  all  mechanical  qualities  of  bodies  existed  only  in 
the  senses  of  the  perceiving  subject. 

In  the  light  of  this  theory  the  so-called  outer  world 
resolves  itself  into  a  complex  of  sense-impressions  and 
the  principle  of  causation  signifies  nothing  more  than 
a  certain  order  experienced  in  the  sequence  of  one 
sensation  after  another.  The  idea  of  order  is  itself  a 
sense-impression  which  must  be  taken  as  something  im- 
mediately given  and  which  does  not  permit  of  further 
analysis,  for  that  order  may  come  to  an  end  at  any  mo- 
ment. Therefore  there  is  no  causation.  One  thing  is 
observed  to  follow  another  but  observation  cannot 
assert  that  it  is  "caused"  by  that  other  thing. 

If  a  rapidly  moving  billiard-ball  strikes  against  an- 
other and  sets  the  latter  in  motion  we  experience  two 
independent  sense-impressions,  one  after  the  other: 
namely  the  sensory  perception  of  the  moving  billiard- 
ball  and  the  sensory  perception  of  the  one  set  in  mo- 
tion by  it.  If  we  stand  beside  the  billiard-table  as  the 
play  goes  on  these  observations  are  repeated  and  we 
can  register  a  certain  regularity  between  the  impres- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  123 

sions.  For  instance,  we  can  perceive  that  the  velocity 
of  the  second  billiard-ball  depends  upon  the  velocity 
and  mass  of  the  billiard-ball  that  strikes  it.  We  can 
discover  also  a  further  order  between  these  two  phe- 
nomena. We  can,  for  instance,  measure  the  noise  of 
the  impact  by  its  force  and  we  can  detect  the  momen- 
tary flattening  on  each  ball  at  the  point  of  contact  with 
the  other  ball  if  we  smear  one  of  the  balls  with  some 
colored  material.  All  these,  however,  are  only  so  many 
sense-perceptions  which  accompany  one  another  regu- 
larly or  displace  one  another  regularly.  But  they  are 
such  that  there  is  no  logical  connecting-link  between 
the  one  and  the  other.  If  we  speak  of  the  force  which 
the  moving  billiard-ball  exercises  on  the  one  that  is  at 
rest,  this  is  only  an  analogy  concept  which  arises 
through  the  muscular  sensation  which  we  feel  if  we 
ourselves  move  the  ball  that  is  at  rest  with  the  naked 
hand  rather  than  through  the  medium  of  the  moving 
billiard-ball.  The  concept  of  force  has  been  very  use- 
ful for  the  formulation  of  the  laws  of  motion,  but 
from  the  viewpoint  of  knowledge  it  helps  nothing 
whatsoever.  And  this  is  because  we  have  no  way  of 
joining  up,  through  a  causal  bond  or  a  logical  bridge, 
the  different  phenomena  of  motion  that  we  have  ex- 
perienced. The  individual  sense-impressions  are  differ- 
ent and  will  remain  different,  no  matter  what  relations 
between  them  may  be  perceived. 

Here  the  meaning  of  the  principle  of  causation, 
taken  fundamentally,  lies  simply  in  the  statement  that 
from  the  same  or  similar  sensory  complexes  as  cause 


124        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  same  or  similar  sensory  complexes  will  follow  as 
an  effect;  but  herein  the  question  as  to  what  may  be 
looked  upon  as  similar  will  on  each  occasion  demand 
special  proof.  Formulated  in  this  way,  the  principle 
of  causation  is  deprived  of  all  deeper  meaning.  But 
this  of  course  does  not  mean  that  the  law  of  causation 
has  no  practical  significance  for  the  human  reason.  All 
it  means  is  that  the  postulate  of  causation  does  not  fur- 
nish us  with  the  grounds  of  any  certain  knowledge. 

How  then  can  the  fact  be  explained  that  in  common 
everyday  life  we  take  the  causal  relation  of  things  as 
something  objective  and  independent?  How  can  this 
be  if  in  reality  we  experience  nothing  more  than  orderly 
successions  of  individual  sense-perceptions?  The  teach- 
ing of  empirical  skepticism  answers  that  this  happens 
through  the  enormous  utility  of  the  causal  concept  and 
through  the  force  of  habit.  Habit  certainly  plays  an 
important  part  in  life.  From  childhood  onwards  it  in- 
fluences our  temperament,  our  wills  and  our  thought. 
We  think  we  understand  a  thing  merely  because  we 
have  become  accustomed  to  looking  at  it.  The  first  time 
*  that  something  new  strikes  us  we  feel  surprised  y  but 
if  the  same  thing  happened  for  the  tenth  time  we  find 
it  quite  a  natural  happening.  If  it  should  happen  a 
hundred  times  we  say  that  it  is  obvious  and  we  even 
go  the  length  of  looking  upon  it  as  a  matter  of  neces- 
sity. Over  one  hundred  years  ago  or  so  mankind  in 
general  was  acquainted  with  no  other  locomotive  force 
except  the  muscular  force  of  man  and  beast.  As  a  con- 
sequence, no  other  form  of  force  was  considered  pos- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  125 

sible.  The  pressure  of  the  air  and  falling  water  was 
recognized  and  applied  to  mechanical  purposes.  But 
here  the  force  itself  was  stationary  and  not  locomotive 
in  the  arbitrary  sense.  Only  men  and  animals  by  their 
muscular  effort  could  move  at  will  from  one  place  to 
another.  A  story  is  told  that  when  the  first  railways 
were  seen  running  through  the  countryside  the  peas- 
ants betted  with  one  another  as  to  how  many  horses 
were  concealed  in  the  engine.  With  steam  and  electric 
motors  everywhere  our  youth  of  to-day  cannot  easily 
understand  the  mentality  of  the  peasant  of  one  hun- 
dred years  ago  who  felt  the  necessity  of  attributing 
locomotive  transport  exclusively  to  a  natural  horse 
power. 

So  far  the  skeptics  are  right  in  saying  that  it  is  by 
force  of  habit  and  custom  that  we  attribute  certain 
happenings  to  certain  causes.  But  at  the  same  time  this 
force  of  habit  cannot  explain  why  we  should  make  the 
attribution  at  all.  In  Fritz  Reuter's  story  Rei's  Nah 
Belligen,  the  peasants  undoubtedly  made  a  ludicrous 
mistake  in  supposing  that  there  were  horses  concealed 
in  the  steam  engine,  just  as  the  ancient  Greek  peasant 
made  a  mistake  in  attributing  the  thunder  to  the  per- 
sonal anger  of  Jupiter.  But  this  is  not  the  point  here. 
The  point  rather  is  to  answer  the  question  why  these 
events  should  be  attributed  to  a  cause  at  all  and  how 
it  is  that  the  concept  of  causation  itself  arises  when  we 
see  one  event  following  another.  The  mere  regular 
succession  of  impressions  does  not  explain  this. 

If  we  go  a  little  deeper  into  the  consideration  of  the 


126        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

empiricist  theory  and  ask  where  it  would  finally  lead 
us  were  we  to  pursue  it  to  its  logical  consequences  we 
shall  thus  be  putting  it  to  a  practical  test.  In  the  first 
place  we  must  bear  in  mind  the  fact  that  when  there 
is  question  of  sensory  perception  as  the  sole  and  ex- 
clusive source  of  knowledge,  then  there  can  be  ques- 
tion only  of  each  one's  personal  sensory  perception 
in  each  one's  own  consciousness.  That  other  men  have 
similar  perceptions  we  can  assume  only  by  analogy;  but, 
on  the  empiricist  theory,  we  cannot  know  this  nor  can 
we  logically  prove  it.  Therefore  if  we  are  to  abide  by 
the  logical  consequences  of  the  empirical  doctrine  and 
exclude  all  arbitrary  assumption,  we  must  confine  our- 
selves, each  one  of  us,  to  the  grounds  of  his  or  her 
own  personal  sense-perceptions.  Then  the  principle  of 
causation  is  only  a  framework  for  our  experiences,  con- 
necting them  with  one  another  as  they  enter  through 
the  senses  and,  being  entirely  unable  to  tell  us  anything 
of  what  is  to  come  next,  it  cannot  tell  us  whether  the 
sequence  of  our  experiences  may  not  be  broken  in  a 
moment.  This  condition  of  affairs  would  seem  to  ob- 
literate every  line  of  distinction  between  the  sensory 
perceptions  arising  from  the  world  of  ordinary  hap- 
penings and  those  that  have  no  foundation  whatsoever 
in  that  world.  Take  the  case  of  sleep  for  instance.  I 
may  dream  all  sorts  of  things  during  the  night  j  but 
the  moment  I  wake  up  the  reality  of  my  surroundings 
gives  the  lie  to  the  dream.  The  empiricist,  however, 
cannot  logically  admit  that.  For  him  there  is  no  wak- 
ing reality  j  because  the  subjective  sensation  is  the  sole 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  127 

source  of  awareness  in  consciousness  and  is  the  sole 
basis  and  criterion  of  knowledge.  Now  the  dreamer 
during  the  dream  believes  automatically  in  its  reality 
and,  according  to  the  empiricists,  the  wide  awake  person 
believes  automatically  in  the  reality  of  his  sense- 
perceptions,  but  has  no  more  reason  than  the  dreamer 
has  for  saying  that  one  set  of  perceptions  is  false  and 
the  other  true. 

On  the  grounds  of  pure  logic  of  course  this  system 
of  thought,  which  is  commonly  called  solipsism,  is  im- 
pregnable. The  solipsist  establishes  his  ego  at  the  cen- 
ter of  creation,  and  he  does  not  consider  any  knowledge 
as  real  or  sound  except  that  which  he  for  the  moment 
is  receiving  through  his  sensory  perception.  Everything 
else  is  derivative  and  secondary.  When  the  solipsist  goes 
to  sleep  at  night  the  world  ceases  to  exist  for  him  the 
moment  his  eyes  and  ears  and  sense  of  smell  and  touch 
become  inactive.  On  rising  in  the  morning  everything 
is  new  to  him  again.  Here  of  course  I  am  only  imagin- 
ing what  a  human  being  would  be  if  he  were  a  logical 
consequence  of  the  empirical  teaching. 

All  this  of  course  amounts  to  a  repudiation  of  com- 
mon sense  j  so  much  so  that  even  the  most  advanced 
skeptics  of  this  school  find  themselves  constantly  com- 
promising between  the  claims  of  common  sense  and 
the  purely  logical  conclusions  of  their  own  philosophic 
system.  In  this  connection  it  is  interesting  to  call  at- 
tention for  a  moment  to  the  figure  of  one  of  the  most 
outstanding  personalities  in  the  subjectivist  school, 
namely,  Bishop  Berkeley.  As  a  student  Berkeley  studied 


128        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

Locke.  But  he  was  of  a  very  deep  religious  nature  and 
launched  a  strong  criticism  against  Locke's  philosophy 
because  of  its  skepticism.  For  Berkeley  all  things  exist 
only  in  the  mind  and  the  external  world  can  be  ac- 
counted for  only  by  saying  that  it  exists  in  the  mind 
of  God.  He  arrives  at  the  existence  of  God  in  this  way: 
There  are  in  our  own  consciousness  impressions  which 
are  independent  of  our  own  wills  and  sometimes  exist 
even  contrary  to  our  wishes.  For  these  impressions  we 
must  seek  a  cause  elsewhere  than  in  ourselves,  and  so 
Berkeley  is  led  to  establish  the  existence  of  God  by 
practically  the  same  line  of  reasoning  as  the  rationalist 
school.  For  him,  however,  mind  and  mind  alone  exists 
— the  Divine  Mind  and  the  human  mind.  The  world 
of  reality  as  we  perceive  it  exists  only  in  our  own  mind. 
Therefore  with  Berkeley  we  have  no  right  to  talk  about 
a  causal  interrelation  between  things  in  the  outer  world 
of  reality. 

To  sum  up,  empiricism  is  unassailable  on  the  funda- 
mental ground  of  a  pure  logic ;  and  its  conclusions  are 
equally  impregnable.  But  if  we  look  at  it  purely  from 
the  viewpoint  of  knowledge  it  leads  into  a  blind  alley, 
which  is  called  solipsism.  In  order  to  escape  from  this 
impasse  there  is  no  other  way  open  but  to  jump  the 
wall  at  some  part  of  it,  and  preferably  at  the  begin- 
ning. This  can  be  done  only  by  introducing,  once  and 
for  all,  a  metaphysical  hypothesis  which  has  nothing 
to  do  with  the  immediate  experience  of  sense-percep- 
tions or  the  conclusions  logically  drawn  from  them. 

Immanuel  Kant,  the  founder  of  the  critical  school, 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  129 

was  the  first  to  recognize  this  truth  clearly  and  to  point 
out  the  way  in  which  the  metaphysical  step  must  be 
taken.  According  to  Kant,  the  sense-impressions  in  our 
consciousness  are  not  the  only  source  of  knowledge. 
The  mind  has  certain  concepts  that  are  independent  of 
all  experience.  These  are  the  so-called  categories  5  and 
in  the  philosophy  of  Kant  they  are  a  necessary  condi- 
tion of  all  knowledge.  Kant  concluded  that  causality 
is  such  a  category.  It  is  one  of  the  ultimate  a  priori 
forms  in  which  the  understanding  spontaneously  orders 
its  experience — something  that  is  not  a  derivative  from 
experience  but  on  the  contrary  is  necessary  to  make 
orderly  experience  itself  possible.  Kant  formulated  the 
principle  of  causality  in  this  way:  "Everything  that 
happens  presupposes  something  from  which  it  follows 
according  to  a  law."  Kant  held  that  this  postulate  is 
independent  of  all  experience.  But  Kant's  proposition 
cannot  be  stated  by  saying  that  everything  which  regu- 
larly follows  something  else  has  a  causal  relation  to 
that  thing.  For  instance,  there  scarcely  can  be  a  more 
regular  succession  than  that  of  night  following  day  5 
but  nobody  would  assert  that  the  day  is  the  cause  of 
the  night.  Succession  therefore  is  not  of  itself,  as  with 
the  empiricists,  the  same  as  a  causal  relation.  In  the 
example  given,  namely  that  of  day  and  night,  we  have 
two  effects  which  follow  from  the  same  cause.  This 
cause  is  twofold.  It  consists  on  the  one  hand  of  the  / 
earth's  rotation  on  its  axis  and,  on  the  other  hand,  of  / 
the  fact  that  the  earth  is  opaque  to  the  sun's  rays. 
In  the  Kantian  system  therefore  the  universal ' 


130        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

validity  of  the  principle  of  causation  is  asserted.  At  the 
same  time,  however,  it  cannot  be  denied  that  Kant's 
teaching,  though  useful  and  conclusive  in  most  of  its 
results,  is  to  a  certain  extent  arbitrary  on  account  of 
its  strong  dogmatic  attitude.  This  is  the  reason  why 
it  became  the  subject  of  so  much  direct  attack  and  has 
been  altered  somewhat  with  the  course  of  time. 

We  need  not  trouble  ourselves  here  with  a  detailed 
description  of  the  development  of  the  philosophical 
side  of  the  causal  problem  since  the  time  of  Kant.  It 
will  be  sufficient  to  point  out  the  main  features  of  this 
development.  The  strongest  opposition  to  the  Kantian 
doctrine  came  from  the  side  of  those  philosophers  who 
maintained  that  it  went  too  far  into  the  metaphysical 
field.  Now  it  is  perfectly  true  of  course  that  we  cannot 
avoid  metaphysics  if  we  are  to  save  ourselves  from 
falling  into  the  deadlock  of  solipsism ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  in  so  far  as  any  system  attempts  to  avoid  the 
metaphysical  extreme  on  the  one  side  and  the  solipsist 
extreme  on  the  other,  it  must  be  somewhat  in  the  na- 
ture of  a  compromise  with  logic  and  therefore  will 
present  certain  weak  features.  It  is  quite  possible,  how- 
ever, to  construct  a  system  on  this  basis  of  compromise 
wherein  the  weaker  features  can  be  sufficiently  strength- 
ened for  all  practical  purposes. 

Kant's  teaching,  and  with  it  the  whole  of  transcen- 
dental philosophy  from  idealism  to  extreme  material- 
ism, is  from  the  outset  based  on  admittedly  metaphysical 
grounds.  In  contradistinction  to  this,  the  positivist  sys- 
tem, founded  by  Auguste  Comte,  has  maintained  itself 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  131 

as  free  as  possible  in  its  various  shapes  and  forms  from 
metaphysical  influences.  It  achieves  this  end  by  making 
the  experience  of  our  own  consciousness  the  only 
legitimate  source  of  knowledge.  According  to  the  posi- 
tivist teaching,  causality  is  not  founded  in  the  nature 
of  things  themselves  but  is,  to  put  it  briefly,  an  experi- 
ence of  the  human  mind.  It  plays  an  important  role 
principally  because  it  has  proved  itself  fruitful  and 
useful.  Thus  the  law  of  causality  is  the  application  of 
this  experience.  Because  we  can  always  exactly  know 
what  we  ourselves  have  discovered  by  our  own  experi- 
ence, the  meaning  of  the  causal  concept  is  quite  clear 
to  us.  But  at  the  same  time  the  possibility  remains  that 
there  may  be  cases  to  which  our  discovery  is  not  ap- 
plicable and  which  therefore  contradict  the  law  of 
causation.  Whereas  Kant  teaches  that  knowledge  with- 
out causality  is  impossible  from  the  very  outset,  be- 
cause the  category  of  the  causal  concept  was  already 
in  the  human  mind  previous  to  any  experience,  the 
positivist  standpoint  is  that  the  creative  mind  of  man 
has  fashioned  the  causal  concept  for  its  own  conven- 
ience. Therefore  it  is  not  a  primal,  inborn  quality  in 
the  mind.  "Man  is  the  measure  of  all  things,"  said 
Protagoras  long  ago.  We  can  twist  and  turn  as  we  will 
but  we  can  never  get  out  of  our  own  skins.  And  what- 
ever tangent  we  may  fly  off  at  into  the  realm  of  the 
absolute  we  are  always  really  moving  around  within  our 
own  orbit,  which  has  been  prescribed  for  us  by  the 
range  of  experience  perceived  in  our  own  conscious- 
ness. To  a  certain  extent  it  is  not  possible  to  gainsay 


132        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

this  positivist  attitude,  though  from  the  standpoint  of 
transcendental  philosophy  there  are  many  objections 
to  it.  And  so  argument  and  counter-argument  follow 
one  another  in  an  endless  interchange.  For  us  the 
denouement  of  the  story  is  the  confirmation  of  our 
previous  conviction,  namely,  that  the  nature  and  uni- 
versal validity  of  the  Law  of  Causation  cannot  be 
definitely  decided  upon  any  grounds  of  purely  abstract 
reasoning.  The  transcendental  and  positivist  viewpoints 
are  irreconcilable  and  they  will  remain  so  as  long  as 
the  race  of  philosophers  lasts. 

If  pure  reasoning  had  the  last  word  in  dealing  with 
such  cases  then  the  outlook  would  be  hopeless  for  any 
satisfactory  settlement  of  the  causative  problem.  But 
philosophy,  after  all,  is  only  one  branch  of  human  ac- 
tivity in  the  study  of  problems  affecting  nature  and 
mankind.  Science  is  another  branch.  And  where  philoso- 
phy has  failed  in  a  given  instance  we  are  perfectly 
justified  in  turning  to  science  and  asking  whether  it 
may  not  have  a  satisfactory  answer  to  suggest. 

Now,  let  us  first  ask  whether  the  various  branches 
of  science  are  divided  against  one  another  on  this  ques- 
tion of  causation,  just  as  philosophy  is  divided?  At 
the  very  threshold  of  this  inquiry  it  may  be  objected 
that  a  problem  which  falls  within  the  scope  of  philoso- 
phy and  which  philosophy  fails  to  solve  cannot  pos- 
sibly be  solved  within  the  limits  of  a  single  science. 
This  objection  is  urged  on  the  grounds  that  philosophy 
furnishes  the  mental  foundations  on  which  scientific 
investigation  rests.  Philosophy  must  precede  every  spe- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  133 

cial  science  and  we  should  be  going  against  the  grain 
of  our  whole  mental  discipline  if  one  of  the  special 
sciences  were  to  take  up  the  treatment  of  general  philo- 
sophic questions. 

That  argument  is  very  often  urged.  But  in  my  opin- 
ion the  weakness  of  it  is  that  it  leaves  out  of  considera- 
tion the  collaboration  which  actually  exists  between 
philosophy  and  the  various  special  sciences.  We  must 
remember  that  the  starting-point  of  all  investigation 
and  the  mental  equipment  used  in  the  pursuit  of  it  are 
fundamentally  the  same  in  the  case  of  philosophy  as 
in  the  case  of  science.  The  philosopher  does  not  oper- 
ate with  a  kind  of  human  understanding  that  is  special 
to  himself.  The  structure  of  thought  which  he  builds 
up  is  not  based  on  any  other  foundation  except  that 
of  his  daily  experience  and  the  opinions  which  he  has 
formed  during  the  course  of  his  professional  studies. 
These  latter  must  largely  correspond  to  his  individual 
talents  and  the  background  of  his  personal  philo- 
sophical development.  In  a  certain  sense  the  philoso- 
pher is  in  a  much  higher  position  than  the  scientific 
specialist,  because  the  latter  confines  observation  and 
research  to  a  much  narrower  range  of  facts  that  are 
systematically  assembled  and  call  for  a  deep  and  con- 
centrated kind  of  probing.  Therefore  the  philosopher 
has  a  better  outlook  on  general  relations  which  do  not 
immediately  interest  the  scientific  specialist  and  which 
may  easily  pass  unobserved  by  the  latter. 

The  difference  between  the  outlook  and  work  of 
these  two  types  of  investigation  may  be  compared  to 


134        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  case  of  two  travelers  who  visit  the  same  district 
together.  The  first  traveler,  let  us  say,  is  interested 
in  the  general  features  of  the  landscape,  the  undula- 
tions of  hill  and  valley,  and  the  varying  patterns  of 
forest  and  meadowland.  The  second  traveler  is  inter- 
ested only  in  the  flora  and  fauna  or  possibly  only  in 
the  mineral  products  of  the  region.  His  eyes  are  watch- 
ing for  particular  specimens  of  the  former,  or  he  may 
select  various  patches  of  ground  for  scientific  examina- 
tion in  the  hope  of  discovering  the  presence  of  mineral 
wealth  beneath.  Now  the  first  traveler  certainly  ac- 
quires a  better  knowledge  of  the  landscape  as  a  whole 
and  can  contrast  it  with  other  landscapes.  From  a  gen- 
eral view  he  may  conclude  in  a  general  way  as  to  the 
mineral  qualities  of  the  soil  and  the  kind  of  vegetation 
or  animal  life  that  characterize  it;  but  his  deductions 
would  be  quite  general  and  will  depend  for  verification 
and  clarity  of  statement  on  the  opinion  supplied  to  him 
by  his  companion.  Therefore  the  work  of  the  one  is 
complementary  to  the  work  of  the  other ;  and  there  may 
be  innumerable  instances  wherein  the  work  of  the  sec- 
ond traveler  will  be  absolutely  necessary  to  the  solution 
of  problems  which  have  baffled  the  man  with  the  more 
general  outlook. 

This  comparison,  like  every  other  comparison,  is  not 
fully  adequate  to  the  situation.  But  at  least  it  brings 
out  this  point,  namely,  that  in  the  case  of  a  definite 
problem  which  philosophy  recognizes  as  fundamental 
and  the  final  solution  of  which  is  the  business  of 
philosophy  alone,  where  philosophy  cannot  come  to  a 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  135 

decisive  formulation  by  the  use  of  its  own  methods  it 
must  seek  information  from  the  special  branches  of 
science  in  regard  to  particular  features  of  the  problem 
at  issue.  Now  if  the  answer  here  turned  out  to  be  defi- 
nite and  final  then  it  must  be  treated  as  such.  It  is  a 
characteristic  mark  of  every  true  science  that  the  gen- 
eral and  objective  knowledge  which  it  arrives  at  has 
a  universal  validity.  Therefore  the  definite  results 
which  it  obtains  demand  an  unqualified  acknowledg- 
ment and  must  always  hold  good.  The  progressive  dis- 
coveries of  science  are  definite  and  cannot  permanently 
be  ignored. 

This  is  shown  very  clearly  in  the  development  of 
natural  science.  By  means  of  wireless  telegraphy  we 
can  now  send  whatever  news  we  wish  to  the  most 
distant  parts  of  the  earth  within  the  infinitesimal  frac- 
tion of  a  second.  Modern  man  can  lift  himself  into 
the  air  in  an  aeroplane  and  transport  himself  from 
one  part  of  the  globe  to  the  other,  over  valley  and 
mountain  and  lake  and  ocean.  By  means  of  X-rays  he 
can  pry  into  the  secret  activities  and  inner  functions  of 
living  organisms  and  can  discover  the  location  of  indi- 
vidual atoms  in  the  crystal.  This  objective  achievement 
which  science  has  accomplished,  in  collaboration  with 
the  technique  that  it  has  fertilized,  has  thrown  into  the 
shade  some  of  the  greatest  discoveries  of  the  philoso- 
phers of  past  times  and  made  a  laughing-stock  of  the 
crude  arts  of  the  magician. 

Were  anybody  to  close  his  eyes  to  such  tangible  re- 
sults and  talk  about  the  collapse  of  science,  people  in 


136        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

general  would  not  think  of  taking  the  trouble  to  refute 
him.  There  is  no  need  whatsoever  to  bring  forward  any 
elaborate  proof  of  the  contribution  to  the  advance- 
ment of  knowledge  which  science  has  to  its  credit.  It  is 
sufficient  merely  to  point  to  the  events  that  are  before 
everybody's  eyes.  One  has  only  to  look  up  when 
sitting  in  one's  garden  and  call  attention  to  the  drone 
of  the  aeroplane  or  to  turn  on  a  switch  in  one's  study 
and  bid  the  skeptic  listen  to  voices  that  are  coming  from 
a  distance  of  thousands  of  miles.  The  worth  of  any 
human  endeavor  is  and  always  must  be  the  results  which 
it  has  obtained. 

Now  let  us  return  to  the  particular  problem  that  we 
are  dealing  with  and  let  us  admit  for  the  moment  the 
competence  and  reliability  of  the  scientific  method  in 
the  treatment  of  it.  Let  us  ask  how  does  science,  in 
each  of  its  different  branches,  actually  regard  the  prob- 
lem of  causation.  Here  it  must  be  remembered  that  I 
am  talking  of  specialized  science  as  such  and  not  of 
the  philosophical  or  epistemological  foundations  on 
which  it  works.  Does  science  as  a  matter  of  fact  occupy 
itself  exclusively  with  data  immediately  given  by 
sensory  impressions  and  their  systematic  organization 
according  to  laws  of  reason?  Or  does  it  at  the  very 
outset  of  its  activities  reach  out  beyond  the  knowledge 
given  us  by  this  immediate  source  and  make,  as  it  were, 
a  jump  into  the  metaphysical  sphere? 

I  do  not  think  that  there  can  be  any  doubt  whatso- 
ever as  to  the  answer.  The  first  alternative  is  ruled  out 
and  the  second  affirmed  in  the  case  of  each  special  sei- 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  137 

ence.  Indeed  it  may  be  said  that  every  individual 
science  sets  about  its  task  by  the  explicit  renunciation 
of  the  egocentric  and  anthropocentric  standpoint.  In 
the  earlier  stages  of  human  thought  mankind  turned 
its  attention  exclusively  to  the  impressions  received 
through  the  senses,  and  primitive  man  made  himself 
and  his  own  interests  the  center  of  his  system  of  rea- 
soning. Confronted  with  the  powers  of  nature  around 
him,  he  thought  that  they  were  animated  beings  like 
himself  and  he  divided  them  into  two  classes,  the  one 
friendly  and  the  other  inimical.  He  divided  the  plant 
world  into  the  categories  of  poisonous  and  non-poison- 
ous. He  divided  the  animal  world  into  the  categories 
of  dangerous  and  harmless.  As  long  as  he  remained 
bound  within  the  limits  of  this  method  of  treating  his 
environment  it  was  impossible  for  him  to  make  any 
approach  towards  real  scientific  knowledge.  His  first 
advance  in  this  knowledge  was  accomplished  only  after 
he  had  taken  leave  of  his  own  immediate  interests  and 
banished  them  from  his  thought.  At  a  later  stage  he 
succeeded  in  abandoning  the  idea  that  the  planet 
whereon  he  lives  is  the  central  point  of  the  universe. 
Then  he  took  up  the  more  modest  position  of  keeping 
as  far  as  possible  in  the  background,  so  as  not  to  in- 
trude his  own  idiosyncrasies  and  personal  ideas  between 
himself  and  his  observations  of  natural  phenomena.  It 
was  only  at  this  stage  that  the  outer  world  of  nature 
began  to  unveil  its  mystery  to  him,  and  at  the  same 
time  to  furnish  him  with  means  which  he  was  able 
to  press  into  his  own  service  and  which  he  could  never 


138        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

have  discovered  if  he  had  continued  looking  for  them 
with  the  candlelight  of  his  own  egocentric  interests. 
The  progress  of  science  is  an  excellent  illustration  of 
the  truth  of  the  paradox  that  man  must  lose  his  soul 
before  he  can  find  it.  The  forces  of  nature,  such  as 
electricity  for  instance,  were  not  discovered  by  men 
who  started  out  with  the  set  purpose  of  adapting  them 
for  utilitarian  purposes.  Scientific  discovery  and  sci- 
entific knowledge  have  been  achieved  only  by  those 
who  have  gone  in  pursuit  of  it  without  any  practical 
purpose  whatsoever  in  view.  The  few  examples  that 
I  have  mentioned  make  this  abundantly  clear.  Hein- 
rich Hertz,  for  instance,  never  dreamt  that  his  dis- 
coveries would  have  been  developed  by  Marconi  and 
finally  evolved  into  a  system  of  wireless  telegraphy. 
And  Roentgen  could  never  have  called  up  a  vision  of 
the  immense  range  of  beneficial  purposes  to  which  the 
X-rays  are  applied  to-day. 

I  have  said  that  the  first  step  which  every  specialized 
branch  of  science  takes  consists  of  a  jump  into  the  region 
of  metaphysics.  In  taking  this  jump  the  scientist  has 
confidence  in  the  supporting  quality  of  the  ground 
whereon  he  lands,  though  no  system  of  abstract  reason- 
ing could  have  previously  assured  him  of  that.  In  other 
words,  the  fundamental  principles  and  indispensable 
postulates  of  every  genuinely  productive  science  are  not 
based  on  pure  logic  but  rather  on  the  metaphysical  hy- 
pothesis— which  no  rules  of  logic  can  refute — that  there 
exists  an  outer  world  which  is  entirely  independent  of 
ourselves.  It  is  only  through  the  immediate  dictate  of 


CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL  139 

our  consciousness  that  we  know  that  this  world  exists. 
And  that  consciousness  may  to  a  certain  degree  be  called 
a  special  sense.  And  one  may  go  even  so  far  as  to  say 
that  the  existence  of  the  exterior  world  strikes  the  con- 
sciousness of  each  individual  in  some  particular  way.  It 
is  as  if  we  looked  at  some  distant  object  through  a  pair 
of  glasses  and  as  if  each  one  were  wearing  glasses  of  a 
slightly  different  shade  of  color.  And  we  must  take 
this  into  account  when  we  deal  scientifically  with  natural 
phenomena.  The  first  and  most  important  quality  of  all 
scientific  ways  of  thinking  must  be  the  clear  distinction 
between  the  outer  object  of  observation  and  the  sub- 
jective nature  of  the  observer. 

Once  the  scientist  has  begun  by  taking  his  leap  into 
the  transcendental  he  never  discusses  the  leap  itself  nor 
worries  about  it.  If  he  did  science  could  not  advance  so 
rapidly.  And  anyhow — which  is  fundamentally  a  con- 
sideration of  no  less  importance — this  line  of  conduct 
cannot  be  refuted  as  inconsistent  on  any  logical  grounds. 

Of  course  there  is  the  positivist  theory  that  man  is  the 
measure  of  all  things.  And  that  theory  is  irrefutable  in 
so  far  as  nobody  can  object  on  logical  grounds  to  the 
action  of  a  person  who  measures  all  things  with  a  human 
rule,  and  resolves  the  whole  of  creation  ultimately  into 
a  complex  of  sensory  perceptions.  But  there  is  another 
measure  also,  which  is  more  important  for  certain  prob- 
lems and  which  is  independent  of  the  particular  method 
and  nature  of  the  measuring  intellect.  This  measure  is 
identical  with  the  thing  itself.  Of  course  it  is  not  an  im- 
mediate datum  of  perception.  But  science  sets  out  con- 


140        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

fidently  on  the  endeavor  finally  to  know  the  thing  in 
itself,  and  even  though  we  realize  that  this  ideal  goal 
can  never  be  completely  reached,  still  we  struggle  on 
towards  it  untiringly.  And  we  know  that  at  every  step 
of  the  way  each  effort  will  be  richly  rewarded.  The  his- 
tory of  science  is  at  hand  to  confirm  our  faith  in  this 
truth. 

Having  once  assumed  the  existence  of  an  independent 
external  world,  science  concomitantly  assumes  the  prin- 
ciple of  causality  as  a  concept  entirely  independent  of 
sense-perception.  In  applying  this  principle  to  the  study 
of  natural  phenomena  science  first  investigates  if  and 
how  far  the  law  of  causal  relation  is  applicable  to  the 
various  happenings  in  the  world  of  nature  and  in  the 
realm  of  the  human  spirit.  Science  finds  itself  here  ex- 
actly on  the  same  footing  which  Kant  took  as  the  start- 
ing-point of  his  theory  of  knowledge.  As  in  the  case  of 
Kantian  philosophy,  so  also  in  the  case  of  each  special 
branch  of  science  the  causal  concept  is  accepted  at  the 
outset  as  belonging  to  those  categories  without  which  no 
progress  in  knowledge  can  be  made.  But  we  must  make 
a  certain  differentiation  here.  Kant  took  not  merely  the 
concept  of  causality  but  also  to  a  certain  degree  the 
meaning  of  the  causal  law  itself  as  an  immediate  datum 
of  knowledge  and  therefore  universally  valid.  Special- 
ized science  cannot  go  thus  far.  It  must  rather  confine 
itself  to  the  question  as  to  what  significance  the  law  of 
causality  can  be  proved  to  have  in  each  individual  case, 
and  thus  through  research  give  practical  meaning  and 
value  to  the  empty  framework  of  the  causal  concept. 


CHAPTER  V 
CAUSATION  AND  FREE  WILL 

THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE 


WE  now  come  to  ask  whether  and  how  far  science  can 
help  us  out  of  the  obscure  wood  wherein  philoso- 
phy has  lost  its  way.  What  is  the  practical  attitude  adopted 
by  the  special  sciences  in  regard  to  the  universal  and  in- 
variable validity  of  the  law  of  causation?  Does  science 
in  its  everyday  investigations  accept  the  principle  of 
causation  as  an  indispensable  postulate?  Does  it  act  upon 
the  assumption  that  there  are  no  loopholes  in  the  caus- 
ally governed  order  of  nature?  Or,  while  using  the 
principle  as  a  working  hypothesis,  does  scientific  practice 
intimate  that  there  are  certain  happenings  in  nature 
where  the  law  of  causation  does  not  function,  and  that 
there  are  regions  in  the  mental  sphere  where  the  causal 
writ  does  not  run?  In  our  endeavor  to  find  a  definite 
answer  to  those  questions  we  shall  have  to  put  them 
singly  to  each  of  the  several  branches  of  specialized 
science.  In  doing  this  of  course  we  shall  have  to  be  con- 
tent with  quite  a  summary  cross-examination.  What  has 
physical  science  to  say  to  our  problem?  What  has  the 
science  of  biology  to  answer?  And  what  have  the  hu- 
manist sciences,  such  as  psychology  and  history,  to  say? 

141 


142        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

Let  us  begin  with  the  most  exact  of  the  natural  sci- 
ences, namely,  physics.  In  classical  dynamics,  among 
which  we  must  include  not  only  mechanics  and  the 
theory  of  gravitation,  but  also  the  Maxwell-Lorentz 
view  of  electrodynamics,  the  law  of  causality  has  been 
given  a  formulation  which  for  exactitude  and  strictness 
may  be  considered  almost  as  ideal,  even  though  it  may 
be  somewhat  one-sided.  It  is  expressed  in  a  system  of 
mathematical  equations  through  which  all  happenings 
in  any  given  physical  picture  can  be  absolutely  predicted 
if  the  time  and  space  conditions  are  known — that  is  to 
say,  if  the  initial  state  be  known  and  the  influences  which 
are  brought  to  bear  upon  the  picture  from  outside.  To 
put  the  matter  in  a  more  concrete  way:  according  to  the 
law  of  causation  as  expressed  in  the  equations  of  classi- 
cal dynamics,  we  can  tell  where  a  moving  particle  or 
system  of  particles  may  be  located  at  any  given  future 
moment  if  we  know  their  location  and  velocity  now  and 
the  conditions  under  which  the  motion  takes  place.  In 
this  way  it  was  made  possible  for  classical  dynamics  to 
reckon  beforehand  all  natural  processes  in  their  indi- 
vidual behavior  and  thus  to  predict  the  effect  from  the 
cause.  The  last  significant  advance  which  classical  dy- 
namics achieved  in  our  day  came  about  through  the  gen- 
eral relativity  theory  of  Einstein.  This  theory  welded 
together  Newtonian  gravitation  and  Galileo's  law  of  in- 
ertia. Several  attempts  have  been  made  recently  to  show 
that  the  relativity  theory  corroborates  the  positivist  atti- 
tude and  in  a  cerain  sense  is  incompatible  with  transcen- 
dental philosophy.  These  attempts  are  entirely  mistaken. 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  143 

For  the  foundation  of  the  relativity  theory  is  not  based 
on  the  rule  that  all  time  and  space  dimensions  have  only 
a  relative  meaning,  which  is  determined  by  the  reference 
system  of  the  observer.  The  foundation  of  the  relativity 
theory  lies  in  the  fact  that  in  the  four-dimensional  space- 
time  manifold  there  is  a  measure,  namely  the  distance 
between  two  points  approximating  with  infinite  close- 
ness. This  is  the  so-called  Tensor  or  Massbestimmung, 
which  for  all  measuring  observers  and  for  all  reference 
systems  has  the  selfsame  value,  and  it  therefore  is  of 
a  transcendental  character  entirely  independent  of  any 
arbitrary  action  of  the  human  will. 

Into  this  harmonized  system  of  classical-relativist 
physics,  however,  the  quantum  hypothesis  has  recently 
introduced  a  certain  disturbance,  and  one  cannot  yet  defi- 
nitely say  what  influence  the  subsequent  development 
of  the  hypothesis  may  have  on  the  formulation  of  fun- 
damental physical  laws.  Some  essential  modification 
seems  to  be  inevitable ;  but  I  firmly  believe,  in  company 
with  most  physicists,  that  the  quantum  hypothesis  will 
eventually  find  its  exact  expression  in  certain  equations 
which  will  be  a  more  exact  formulation  of  the  law  of 
causality. 

Besides  dynamical  laws  applied  to  individual  cases, 
physical  science  recognizes  other  laws  also,  which  are 
called  statistical.  These  latter  express  to  a  fairly  accurate 
degree  the  probability  of  certain  happenings  occurring 
and  therefore  they  allow  for  exceptions  in  particular 
cases.  A  classical  example  of  this  is  the  conduction  of 
heat.  If  two  bodies  of  different  temperatures  be  brought 


144        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

into  contact  with  one  another  then,  according  to  the  two 
laws  of  thermodynamics,  the  heat  energy  will  always 
pass  from  the  warmer  to  the  cooler  body.  We  know 
to-day  from  experiment  that  this  law  is  only  a  proba- 
bility 3  because,  especially  when  the  difference  of  tem- 
peratures between  two  bodies  is  exceptionally  small,  it 
may  well  happen  that  at  one  or  other  particular  point  of 
contact  and  at  one  particular  moment  of  time  the  con- 
duction of  heat  will  take  place  in  the  opposite  direction 
— that  is  to  say,  from  the  cooler  to  the  warmer  body. 
The  second  law  of  thermodynamical,  as  in  the  case  of 
all  statistical  laws,  has  an  exact  significance  only  for 
average  values  arising  from  a  great  number  of  similar 
happenings  and  not  for  each  happening  itself.  If  we  are 
to  consider  the  individual  happening  we  can  speak  only 
of  a  definite  measure  of  probability.  The  case  here  is 
quite  similar  to  the  case  of  a  non-symmetrical  cube  used 
in  playing  with  dice.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  center  of 
gravity  of  the  cube  is  not  at  the  center  of  the  body  but 
lies  definitely  towards  one  of  the  sides ;  then  it  is  likely 
though  by  no  means  certain  that  when  the  cube  is  thrown 
it  will  come  to  rest  on  that  side.  The  smaller  the  dis- 
tance of  the  center  of  gravity  from  the  symmetrical  cen- 
ter of  the  cube  the  more  variable  will  the  result  be. 
Now  if  we  cast  the  dice  sufficiently  often  and  observe 
what  happens  in  each  case,  then  we  can  arrive  at  a  law 
which  will  tell  us  that  the  dice  will  fall  on  a  certain 
side  so  many  times  out  of  a  thousand,  for  instance. 

Let  us  return  to  the  example  of  heat  conduction  and 
ask  whether  the  strict  validity  of  the  causal  law  holds 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  145 

for  individual  cases.  The  answer  is  that  it  does  hold; 
because  more  thoroughgoing  methods  of  investigation 
have  proved  that  what  we  call  transfer  of  heat  from 
one  body  to  another  is  a  very  intricate  process,  unfolding 
itself  through  innumerable  series  of  particular  processes 
which  are  independent  of  one  another  and  which  we  call 
molecular  movements.  And  investigation  has  further 
shown  that  if  we  presuppose  the  validity  of  dynamical 
laws  for  each  of  these  particular  happenings — that  is  to 
say,  the  law  of  strict  causality — then  we  can  arrive  at  the 
causal  results  through  this  type  of  observation.  In  poinF^ 
of  fact,  statistical  laws  are  dependent  upon  the  assump-  I 
tion  of  the  strict  law  of  causality  functioning  in  each  I 
particular  case.  And  the  non-fulfillment  of  the  statisti- 
cal rule  in  particular  cases  is  not  therefore  due  to  the 
fact  that  the  law  of  causality  is  not  fulfilled,  but  rather 
to  the  fact  that  our  observations  are  not  sufficiently  deli- 
cate and  accurate  to  put  the  law  of  causality  to  a  direct 
test  in  each  case.  If  it  were  possible  for  us  to  follow  the 
movement  of  each  individual  molecule  in  this  very  intri- 
cate labyrinth  of  processes,  then  we  should  find  in  each 
case  an  exact  fulfillment  of  the  dynamical  laws. 

In  speaking  of  physical  science  under  this  aspect  we 
must  always  distinguish  between  two  different  methods 
of  research.  One  is  the  macroscopic  method,  which  deals 
with  the  object  of  research  in  a  general  and  summary 
manner.  The  other  is  the  microscopic  method,  which  is 
more  delicate  and  detailed  in  its  procedure.  It  is  only 
for  the  macroscopic  observer — that  is  to  say,  the  man 
who  deals  with  big  quantities  in  a  wholesale  way — that 


146        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

chance  and  probability  exist  in  regard  to  single  elements 
in  the  object  that  he  handles.  The  extent  and  importance 
of  the  chance  elements  is  of  course  dependent  on  the 
measure  of  knowledge  and  skill  which  is  brought  to 
bear  on  the  object.  On  the  other  hand,  for  the  micro- 
scopic investigator  only  accuracy  and  strict  causality  exist. 
His  livelihood  depends,  as  it  were,  on  the  quality  of 
each  individual  item  that  he  deals  with  in  detail.  The 
macroscopic  investigator  reckons  only  with  mass  values 
and  knows  only  statistical  laws.  The  microscopic  investi- 
gator reckons  with  individual  values  and  applies  to  them 
dynamical  law  in  its  full  significance. 

Suppose  we  consider  again  the  example  of  the  dice 
which  I  have  mentioned  already.  And  suppose  we  treat 
it  microscopically.  This  means  that  together  with  the 
nature  of  the  dice  itself — its  non-symmetrical  character 
and  the  exact  location  of  its  center  of  gravity — we  also 
take  into  account  its  initial  position  and  its  initial  velocity 
and  the  influence  of  the  table  on  its  movement,  the  re- 
sistance of  the  air  and  every  other  peculiarity  that  may 
affect  it — supposing  we  could  examine  all  these  mi- 
nutely then  there  could  be  no  question  of  chance  j  be- 
cause eacTf  time  we  can  reckon  the  place  where  the  dice 
would  stop  and  know  in  what  position  it  would  rest. 

Without  going  into  any  further  details,  let  me  say 
that  physical  science  applies  the  macroscopic  method  of 
research  to  all  happenings  where  molecules  and  atoms 
are  concerned.  But  it  naturally  strives  to  refine  its  treat- 
ment towards  the  microscopic  degree  of  delicacy  and 
always  seeks  to  reduce  statistical  laws  to  a  dynamic  and 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  147 

strictly  causal  system.  Therefore  it  may  be  said  here 
I  that  physical  science,  together  with  astronomy  and  chem- 
istry and  mineralogy,  are  all  based  on  the  strict  and  uni- 
versal validity  of  the  principle  of  causality.  In  a  word, 
this  is  the  answer  which  physical  science  has  to  give  to 
the  question  asked  at  the  beginning  of  the  present 
chapter. 

Let  us  come  now  to  the  science  of  biology.  Here  the 
conditions  are  very  much  more  intricate,  because  biology 
deals  with  living  things  and  the  problem  of  life  has 
always  presented  very  serious  difficulties  for  scientific 
research.  Of  course  I  cannot  speak  with  special  authority 
in  this  branch  of  science.  Yet  I  have  no  hesitation  in  say- 
ing that  even  in  the  most  obscure  problems,  such  as  the 
problem  of  heredity,  biology  is  approaching  more  and 
more  to  the  explicit  assumption  of  the  universal  validity 
of  causal  relations.  Just  as  no  physicist  will  in  the  las?' 
resort  acknowledge  the  play  of  chance  in  inanimate  na- 
ture, so  no  physiologist  will  admit  the  play  of  chance  in 
the  absolute  sense,  although  of  course  the  microscopic 
method  of  research  is  very  much  more  difficult  to  carry 
out  in  physiology  than  in  physics.  For  this  latter  reason 
the  majority  of  physiological  laws  are  of  a  statistical 
character  and  are  called  rules.  When  an  exception  occurs 
in  the  application  of  these  empirically  established  rules, 
this  is  not  attributed  to  any  skip  or  failure  in  the  causal 
relation  but  rather  to  a  want  of  knowledge  and  skill  in 
the  way  that  the  rule  is  applied.  The  science  of  biology 
sets  its  face  against  permitting  exceptions  as  such  to 
exist.  What  appear  to  be  exceptions  are  carefully  re- 


148        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

corded  and  collated  and  are  further  studied  until  they 
are  cleared  up  in  the  light  of  causal  relations.  Very  often 
it  happens  that  this  further  study  of  exceptions  shows 
interrelations  which  were  hitherto  unthought  of,  and 
throws  a  new  light  on  the  rules  under  which  the  excep- 
tions were  originally  found  to  occur.  It  very  often  hap- 
pens that  the  universal  causal  relation  is  thus  corrobo- 
rated from  a  new  side,  and  that  is  the  way  in  which 
many  significant  discoveries  have  been  made. 

How  can  we  distinguish  between  what  is  veritably  a 
causal  relation  and  what  is  merely  a  coincidence  or  ex- 
ternal succession  of  one  event  following  another?  The 
answer  is  that  there  is  no  hard  and  fast  rule  for  making 
such  a  distinction.  Science  can  only  accept  the  universal 
validity  of  the  law  of  causation,  which  enables  us  defi- 
nitely to  predict  effects  following  a  given  cause,  and  in 
case  the  predicted  effect  should  not  follow  then  we  know 
that  some  other  facts  have  come  into  play  which  were 
left  out  of  consideration  in  our  reckoning.  A  little  story 
will  illustrate  my  meaning  here.  It  refers  to  the  effi- 
ciency of  artificial  manure  in  agriculture. 

If  I  am  not  mistaken  the  story  is  told  of  Benjamin 
Franklin.  He  was  not  merely  a  first-class  statesman  but 
he  was  also  a  very  able  research  worker  and  discoverer 
in  natural  science.  At  one  time  he  took  a  great  interest 
in  the  problem  of  artificial  manuring  and  clearly  showed 
the  importance  of  its  development  in  agrarian  econom- 
ics. He  put  his  theories  to  the  test  and  achieved  practical 
successes  which  were  quite  satisfying  for  his  own  scien- 
tific bent  of  mind.  But  he  found  it  very  difficult  to  con- 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  149 

vince  his  skeptical  neighbors  that  the  luxuriant  crop  of 
clover  which  they  saw  growing  in  Franklin's  field  was 
due  to  the  use  of  artificial  manure.  For  the  peasant, 
clover  was  clover  and  land  was  land  and  there  were 
good  land  and  bad  land  and  good  weather  conditions 
and  bad  weather  conditions,  and  these  were  the  only 
factors  that  he  recognized  as  causes  of  a  good  crop  or  a 
poor  crop.  Franklin  determined  to  convince  the  peasant 
that  the  art  of  man  could  directly  influence  the  quality 
of  nature's  growth.  At  the  time  of  seed-sowing  he  dug 
in  the  soil  a  series  of  small  furrows  which  formed  alpha- 
betical letters.  These  small  furrows  he  filled  with  rich 
quantities  of  artificial  manure,  while  the  other  parts  of 
the  field  were  left  solely  to  nature's  hand.  As  the  crop 
grew  the  letters  that  corresponded  to  the  manured  fur- 
rows showed  rows  of  clover  much  taller  and  more  lux- 
uriant than  that  in  the  other  parts  of  the  field ;  so  that 
the  passers-by  were  able  to  read  the  sentence:  This  fart 
has  been  manured  with  gypsum.  History  does  not  relate 
whether  the  obstinate  peasants  were  or  were  not  con- 
vinced by  the  proof.  But  that  is  neither  here  nor  there ; 
for  nobody  can  be  forced  on  purely  logical  grounds  to 
acknowledge  the  causal  connection,  because  the  causal 
connection  is  not  logically  demonstrable.  The  point  of 
the  illustration  here  is  that  if  in  a  particular  case  we  ( 
introduce  a  cause  which  of  its  very  nature  "flows  into" 
the  result,  as  the  scholastics  used  to  say,  and  if  the  re- 
sult is  in  full  accord  with  what  was  predicted,  then  we 
can  be  certain  of  the  causal  relation.  In  the  instance  of 
Franklin's  clover  there  could  possibly  be  no  other  ex- 


150        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

planation  except  that  of  the  manuring,  and  this 
explanation,  as  a  cause,  has  a  natural  and  exclusive 
connection  with  the  result. 

Of  course  it  may  be  said  that  the  law  of  causality  is 
only  after  all  an  hypothesis.  If  it  be  an  hypothesis  it  is 
not  an  hypothesis  like  most  of  the  others,  but  it  is  a  fun- 
damental hypothesis  because  it  is  the  postulate  which  is 
necessary  to  give  sense  and  meaning  to  the  application  of 
all  hypotheses  in  scientific  research.  This  is  because  any 
hypothesis  which  indicates  a  definite  rule  presupposes 
the  validity  of  the  principle  of  causation. 

We  now  come  to  those  sciences  which  deal  with  hu- 
man events.  Here  the  method  which  the  scientist  follows 
can  have  nothing  like  the  same  exactitude  as  that  which 
he  follows  in  physics.  The  object  of  his  study  is  the 
human  mind  and  its  influence  on  the  course  of  events. 
The  great  difficulty  here  is  the  meager  supply  of  source 
materials.  While  the  historian  or  the  sociologist  strives 
to  apply  purely  objective  methods  to  his  lines  of  investi- 
gation, he  finds  himself  confronted  on  all  hands  with 
the  want  of  data  whereby  he  might  determine  the  causes 
that  have  led  to  general  conditions  in  the  past  and  lead 
to  the  general  conditions  in  the  world  at  the  present 
moment.  At  the  same  time,  however,  he  has  at  least  one 
advantage  here  which  the  physicist  has  not.  The  his- 
torian or  the  sociologist  is  dealing  with  the  same  kind  of 
activities  as  he  finds  in  himself.  Subjective  observation 
of  his  own  human  nature  furnishes  him  with  at  least  a 
rough  means  of  estimation  in  dealing  with  outside  per- 
*  sonalities  or  groups  of  personalities.  He  can  "feel  into" 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  151 

them  as  it  were  and  may  thus  gain  a  certain  insight  into 
the  characteristics  of  their  motives  and  their  thoughts. 

Let  us  ask  then  what  is  the  attitude  of  the  humanist 
scientist  towards  this  problem  of  causation.  In  the  activi- 
ties of  the  human  mind  and  in  the  play  of  human  emo- 
tions, and  in  the  outer  conduct  that  results  from  these, 
is  there  everywhere  a  rigid  causal  interrelation?  And  is 
all  conduct  in  the  last  resort  to  be  attributed  to  the  causal 
activity  of  circumstances,  such  as  past  events  and  present 
surroundings,  leaving  no  place  whatsoever  for  an  abso- 
lutely spontaneous  action  of  the  human  will?  Or  have 
we  here,  in  contradistinction  to  nature,  at  least  a  certain 
degree  of  freedom  or  arbitrary  volition  or  chance, 
whichever  name  one  wishes  to  choose?  From  time  im- 
memorial this  question  has  been  a  source  of  controversy. 
Those  who  hold  that  the  human  will  is  absolutely  free 
in  its  act  of  volition  generally  assert  that  the  higher  we 
go  in  the  scale  of  natural  being  the  less  noticeable  is  the 
play  of  necessity  and  the  greater  the  play  of  creative 
freedom,  until  we  finally  come  to  the  case  of  human  be- 
ings, who  enjoy  the  full  autonomy  of  the  will. 

Such  an  opinion  cannot  be  spoken  of  as  correct  or 
incorrect  except  by  putting  it  to  the  test  of  historical 
and  psychological  research.  And  here  we  have  the  prob- 
lem in  exactly  the  same  position  as  in  the  case  of  physical 
science.  In  other  words  we  cannot  know  how  far  the  I 
principle  of  causality  is  valid  except  by  putting  it  to  the  J 
test  of  outer  reality.  Of  course,  a  different  terminology  i 
is  used  when  causal  methods  are  applied  in  the  humanist 
sciences.  In  natural  science  a  definite  physical  picture 


152        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

with  given  characteristics  is  the  subject  of  research.  In 
psychology  we  have  a  definite  individual  personality  to 
study.  That  individual  personality  has  inherited  quali- 
ties such  as  bodily  conformation,  intelligence,  imagina- 
tive capacity,  temperament,  personal  tastes  and  so  on. 
Working  on  this  personality  we  have  the  physical  and 
psychic  influences  of  the  environment,  such  as  climate, 
food,  upbringing,  companionship,  family  life,  education, 
reading,  etc.  Now  the  question  is  whether  all  these  data 
determine  the  conduct  of  this  personality  in  all  its  par- 
ticulars and  according  to  definite  laws.  In  other  words  if 
we  suppose,  what  is  impossible  in  practice,  that  we  had  a 
thorough  and  detailed  knowledge  of  all  these  factors 
here  and  now,  could  we  tell  with  certainty,  on  the  causal 
basis,  how  the  individual  will  act  a  moment  hence? 

In  seeking  for  a  sound  and  logical  and  adequate 
answer  to  this  question  we  are  here  in  quite  a  different 
position  from  that  in  which  we  were  when  dealing  with 
natural  science.  Obviously  it  is  extremely  difficult  to 
give  anything  like  a  definite  answer  to  such  a  question 
as  that  asked  above.  One  may  have  opinions  and  make 
suppositions  and  assumptions ;  but  these  do  not  furnish 
logical  grounds  for  an  answer.  Still  I  think  that  it 
may  be  said  definitely  that  the  direction  in  which  the 
humanist  sciences,  such  as  psychology  and  history,  are 
developing  nowadays  furnishes  certain  grounds  for  pre- 
suming that  the  question  should  be  answered  in  the 
affirmative.  The  part  which  force  plays  in  nature,  as 
the  cause  of  motion,  has  its  counterpart  in  the  mental 
sphere  in  motive  as  the  cause  of  conduct.  Just  as  at 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  153 

each  and  every  moment  the  motion  of  a  material  body 
results  necessarily  from  the  combined  action  of  many 
forces,  so  human  conduct  results  with  the  same  necessity 
from  the  interplay  of  mutually  reinforced  or  contra- 
dicting motives,  which  partly  in  the  conscious  and  par- 
tially also  in  the  unconscious  sphere  work  their  way 
forward  towards  the  result. 

Of  course  it  is  perfectly  true  that  many  acts  which 
are  done  by  human  beings  appear  to  be  inexplicable. 
At  times  it  is  an  extraordinarily  difficult  riddle  to  find 
anything  like  reasonable  grounds  for  certain  acts,  and 
other  acts  seem  so  utterly  foolish  as  to  suggest  no 
grounds  at  all.  But  consider  for  a  moment  the  way 
these  acts  appear  to  a  trained  psychologist  and  the  way 
they  appear  to  the  ordinary  man  in  the  street.  What  is 
entirely  puzzling  to  the  latter  is  often  quite  clear  to 
the  former.  Therefore  if  we  could  study  the  acts  of 
the  human  being  at  very  close  and  intimate  quarters, 
we  should  find  that  they  can  be  accounted  for  through 
causes  which  lie  in  the  character  or  in  the  momentary 
emotional  tension  or  in  the  specific  external  environ- 
ment. And  in  those  cases  where  it  is  extremely  difficult 
and  wellnigh  impossible  to  discover  these  explanatory 
causes,  then  we  have  at  least  grounds  for  assuming  that 
if  we  cannot  find  any  motive  as  an  explanation,  we 
must  attribute  this  not  actually  to  the  absence  of  motive 
but  rather  to  the  unsatisfactory  nature  of  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  peculiarities  of  the  situation.  Here  we  have 
the  same  case  as  in  the  throwing  of  the  unsymmetrical 
dice.  We  know  that  the  way  in  which  the  dice  finally 


154        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

comes  to  rest  is  the  net  result  of  all  the  factors  active 
in  the  throwing  of  the  dice,  but  in  the  case  of  a  single 
throw  we  cannot  detect  the  function  of  strict  causality. 
And  so,  even  though  the  motive  of  a  certain  line  of 
human  conduct  may  often  lie  utterly  hidden,  conduct 
entirely  without  motive  is  scientifically  just  as  incom- 
patible with  the  principles  on  which  mental  science  is 
carried  on  as  the  assumption  of  absolute  chance  in  inor- 
ganic nature  is  incompatible  with  the  working  principle 
of  physical  science. 

It  is  not  merely,  however,  that  conduct  is  conditioned 
by  the  motives  which  lead  to  it.  Each  act  has  also  a 
causal  influence  on  subsequent  behavior.  And  so  in  the 
interchange  of  motive  and  conduct  we  have  an  endless 
chain  of  events  following  one  another  in  the  spiritual 
life,  in  which  every  link  is  bound  by  a  strict  causal  re- 
lation not  only  with  the  preceding  link  but  also  with 
the  following  one. 

Attempts  have  been  made  to  find  a  way  to  free  these 
links  from  the  causal  chain.  Hermann  Lotze,  in  open 
contradiction  to  Kant,  put  forward  the  suggestion  that 
such  a  causal  chain  can  have  no  end,  although  it  has  a 
beginning.  In  other  words,  that  circumstances  occur  in 
which  motives  appear  entirely  independently,  not 
caused  by  any  preceding  influence,  so  that  the  conduct 
to  which  these  motives  lead  will  be  the  first  link  in 
a  new  chain.  Such  an  interpretation,  Lotze  held,  must 
be  given  especially  to  the  acts  of  those  choice  spirits 
that  are  called  creative  geniuses. 

Even  though  we  may  not  question  the  possibility  of 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  155 

such  cases  happening  in  the  world  of  reality  yet  we  may 
reasonably  answer  that  the  thoroughgoing  scientific  re- 
search which  has  been  carried  on  in  the  region  of  psy- 
chology would  have  pointed  to  such  a  possibility.  But 
as  far  as  psychological  research  has  gone  there  are  no 
indications  which  might  furnish  a  starting-ground  for 
this  theory  of  the  so-called  free  beginning.  On  the 
contrary,  the  deeper  scientific  research  goes  into  the 
peculiarities  that  have  characterized  even  the  great 
spiritual  movements  of  world  history,  more  and  more 
the  causal  relation  emerges  into  the  open.  The  de- 
pendence of  each  event  upon  preceding  fact  and  pre- 
paratory factors  gradually  begins  to  appear  under  the 
strong  light  of  scientific  investigation,  so  much  so  as 
to  warrant  the  statement  that  present-day  scientific 
procedure  in  psychology  is  founded  practically  exclu- 
sively on  the  principle  of  causal  interrelations  and  the 
assumption  of  an  active  law  of  causality  which  permits 
no  exceptions.  This  means  that  the  postulate  of  com- 
plete determinism  is  accepted  as  a  necessary  condition 
for  the  progress  of  psychological  research. 

Under  these  circumstances  it  is  obvious  that  we 
cannot  erect  a  definite  boundary  and  say:  Thus  far  but 
no  farther.  The  principle  of  causality  must  be  held  to 
extend  even  to  the  highest  achievements  of  the  human 
soul.  We  must  admit  that  the  mind  of  each  one  of 
our  greatest  geniuses — Aristotle,  Kant  or  Leonardo, 
Goethe  or  Beethoven,  Dante  or  Shakespeare — even  at 
the  moment  of  its  highest  flights  of  thought  or  in  the 
most  profound  inner  workings  of  the  soul,  was  subject 


156        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

to  the  causal  fiat  and  was  an  instrument  in  the  hands  of 
an  almighty  law  which  governs  the  world. 

The  average  reader  may  be  easily  taken  aback  by 
such  a  statement.  It  may  sound  derogatory  to  speak 
thus  of  the  creative  achievements  of  the  highest  and 
noblest  of  the  human  race.  But  on  the  other  hand  it 
must  be  remembered  that  we  ourselves  are  only  com- 
mon mortals,  and  that  we  could  never  hope  to  be  in 
a  position  to  follow  out  the  delicate  play  of  cause  and 
circumstance  in  the  soul  of  the  genius.  There  is  nothing 
derogatory  in  saying  that  they  are  subject  to  the  law 
of  cause  and  effect,  though  it  would  be  derogatory,  of 
course,  if  this  were  interpreted  in  the  sense  that  the 
ordinary  mortal  is  capable  of  following  the  workings 
of  that  law  in  the  case  of  supremely  gifted  souls.  No- 
body would  feel  it  disrespectful  if  one  were  to  say  that 
some  superhuman  intelligence  could  understand  a 
Goethe  or  a  Shakespeare.  The  whole  point  lies  in  the 
inadequacy  of  the  observer.  Just  so  the  macroscopic 
physicist  is  entirely  unable  to  pursue  microscopic  work- 
ings in  natural  phenomena,  yet,  as  we  have  seen,  this 
does  not  mean  that  the  law  of  causality  is  not  valid 
for  these  microscopic  happenings. 

Where  is  the  sense  then,  it  may  here  be  asked,  in 
talking  of  definite  causal  relations  in  regard  to  cases 
wherein  nobody  in  the  world  is  capable  of  tracing  their 
function? 

The  answer  to  that  question  is  simple  enough.  As 
has  been  said  again  and  again,  the  concept  of  causality 
is  something  transcendental,  which  is  quite  independent 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  157 

of  the  nature  of  the  researcher,  and  it  would  be  valid 
even  if  there  were  no  perceiving  subject  at  all.  We 
shall  see  more  clearly  the  inner  meaning  of  the  causal 
concept  if  we  consider  the  following: — 

At  this  present  moment  of  time  and  space  the  human 
intellect  as  we  know  it  may  possibly  not  be  the  highest 
type  of  intellect  in  existence.  Higher  intelligences  may 
exist  in  other  places  or  may  appear  in  other  epochs. 
And  the  intellectual  level  of  these  beings  may  be  as 
much  above  ours  as  ours  is  above  the  protozoa.  Then 
it  may  well  happen  that  before  the  penetrating  eye  of 
such  intelligences  even  the  most  fleeting  moment  of 
mortal  thought,  as  well  as  the  most  delicate  vibration 
in  the  ganglia  of  the  human  brain,  could  be  followed 
in  each  case,  and  that  the  creative  work  of  our  mortal 
geniuses  could  be  proved  by  such  an  intelligence  to 
be  subject  to  unalterable  laws,  just  as  the  telescope  of 
the  astronomer  traces  the  links  of  the  manifold  move- 
ment of  the  spheres. 

Here,  as  everywhere  else,  we  must  differentiate  be- 
tween the  validity  of  the  causal  principle  and  the  prac- 
ticability of  its  application.  Under  all  circumstances  the 
law  of  causation  is  valid,  because  of  its  transcendental 
character.  But  as  its  application  can  be  carried  out  in 
full  detail  only  by  the  microscopic  observer  in  natural 
science,  so  in  the  region  of  the  human  mind  the  law 
can  be  applied  only  by  an  intelligence  that  is  far  supe- 
rior to  the  object  of  research.  The  smaller  the  distance 
between  the  investigator  and  the  object  in  this  case,  the 
more  uncertain  and  fallible  will  be  the  causal  and  sei- 


i58        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

entific  treatment.  The  whole  problem  lies  in  the  diffi- 
culty, indeed  the  impossibility,  with  which  we  are  faced 
in  trying  to  understand  the  behavior  of  a  genius  from 
the  standpoint  of  causation.  Even  a  congenial  spirit 
in  such  cases  would  have  to  be  content  with  presump- 
tions and  analogies  j  but  to  the  average  blockhead  the 
genius  will  ever  remain  a  closed  book  signed  with  the 
seven  seals. 

The  conclusion,  therefore,  is  that  the  highest  types 
of  human  intelligence  are  subject  to  the  causal  law 
in  the  processes  that  result  in  even  their  greatest 
achievements.  That  is  the  first  part  of  our  conclusion. 
And  the  second  part  is  that  in  principle  we  must  reckon 
with  the  possibility  that  a  day  will  come  when  the  more 
profound  and  increasingly  more  refined  development 
of  scientific  research  will  be  able  to  understand  the 
mental  workings  not  only  of  the  ordinary  mortal  but 
also  of  the  highest  human  genius  in  their  causal  rela- 
tions; because  scientific  thought  is  identical  with  causal 
thought,  so  much  so  that  the  last  goal  of  every  science 
is  the  full  and  complete  application  of  the  causal  prin- 
ciple to  the  object  of  research. 

From  all  that  I  have  said  what  conclusion  are  we  to 
draw  in  regard  to  Free  Will?  In  the  midst  of  a  world 
where  the  principle  of  causation  prevails  universally, 
what  room  is  there  for  the  autonomy  of  human  voli- 
tion? This  is  an  important  question,  especially  to-day, 
because  of  a  widespread  tendency  unwarrantably  to 
extend  the  tenets  of  scientific  determinism  to  human 
conduct  and  thus  shelve  responsibility  from  the  shoul- 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  159 

ders  of  the  individual.  We  have  had  an  example  of 
this  in  some  modern  interpreters  of  historical  develop- 
ment who  would  hold  that  the  destiny  of  a  group  of 
individuals,  forming  a  nation  or  a  civilization,  is  deter- 
mined by  blind  fate.  Therefore  in  the  last  analysis  the 
responsibility  for  such  a  destiny  does  not  rest  with  the 
individual.  Is  this  attitude  a  legitimate  deduction  from 
all  that  I  have  said?  In  other  words,  amid  the  all- 
round  causal  sequence  in  natural  phenomena  is  there 
still  room  for  the  free  and  responsible  act  of  the  will 
of  the  individual? 

Before  directly  answering  that  question  I  may  point 
to  a  notable  characteristic  of  everyday  life  which  may 
help  us  in  forming  a  decision.  Though  chance  and 
miracle  in  the  absolute  sense  are  fundamentally  ex- 
cluded from  science,  yet  science  is  confronted  to-day, 
more  than  ever  before  perhaps,  with  a  widespread 
belief  in  miracle  and  magic.  Such  belief,  which  has 
been  so  universal  in  former  ages,  repeats  itself  with 
the  passing  of  the  centuries  in  innumerable  forms.  This 
means  that  science  is  repeatedly  called  upon  to  give  the 
scientific  causal  explanation  of  facts  that  are  popularly 
interpreted  in  the  light  of  some  belief.  Belief  in  miracle 
is  a  very  important  element  in  the  cultural  history  of 
the  human  race.  It  has  brought  untold  blessings  and 
has  inspired  noble  men  to  the  greatest  of  heroic  deeds. 
But  where  it  has  degenerated  into  fanaticism  it  has 
also  been  the  cause  of  untold  evil. 

In  view  of  the  remarkable  progress  of  physical 
science  during  our  own  time  and  the  universal  exten- 


i6o        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

sion  of  its  benefits  amongst  civilized  nations,  we  might 
naturally  assume  that  one  of  the  achievements  of 
science  would  have  been  to  restrict  belief  in  miracle. 
But  it  does  not  seem  to  do  so.  The  tendency  to  believe 
in  the  power  of  mysterious  agencies  is  an  outstanding 
characteristic  of  our  own  day.  This  is  shown  in  the 
popularity  of  occultism  and  spiritualism  and  their  in- 
numerable variants.  Though  the  extraordinary  results 
of  science  are  so  obvious  that  they  cannot  escape  the 
notice  of  even  the  most  unobservant  man  in  the  street, 
yet  educated  as  well  as  uneducated  people  often  turn 
to  the  dim  region  of  mystery  for  light  on  the  ordinary 
problems  of  life.  One  would  imagine  that  they  would 
turn  to  science,  and  it  is  probably  true  that  those  who 
do  so  are  more  intensely  interested  in  science  and  are 
perhaps  greater  in  number  than  any  corresponding 
group  of  people  in  former  times ;  but  still  the  fact 
remains  that  the  drawing  power  of  systems  which  are 
based  on  the  irrational  is  at  least  as  strong  and  as  wide- 
spread as  ever  before,  if  not  more  so.  The  Monist 
League  which  was  formed  some  years  ago  with  so 
much  eclat  and  promise,  for  the  purpose  of  establishing 
a  world  outlook  based  on  purely  scientific  grounds,  has 
certainly  not  achieved  any  success  corresponding  to  the 
rival  systems. 

How  is  this  peculiar  fact  to  be  explained?  Is  there, 
in  the  last  analysis,  some  basically  sound  foothold  for 
this  belief  in  miracle,  no  matter  how  bizarre  and  illogi- 
cal may  be  the  outer  forms  it  takes?  Is  there  something 
in  the  nature  of  man,  some  inner  realm,  that  science 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  161 

cannot  touch?  Is  it  so  that  when  we  approach  the  inner 
springs  of  human  action  science  cannot  have  the  last 
word?  Or,  to  speak  more  concretely,  is  there  a  point 
at  which  the  causal  line  of  thought  ceases  and  beyond 
which  science  cannot  go? 

This  brings  us  to  the  kernel  of  the  problem  in 
regard  to  free  will.  And  I  think  that  the  answer  will 
be  found  automatically  suggested  by  the  questions 
which  I  have  just  asked. 

The  fact  is  that  there  is  a  point,  one  single  point  in 
the  immeasurable  world  of  mind  and  matter,  where 
science  and  therefore  every  causal  method  of  research 
is  inapplicable,  not  only  on  practical  grounds  but  also 
on  logical  grounds,  and  will  always  remain  inapplicable. 
This  point  is  the  individual  ego.  It  is  a  small  point  in 
the  universal  realm  of  being ;  but  in  itself  it  is  a  whole 
world,  embracing  our  emotional  life,  our  will  and  our 
thought.  This  realm  of  the  ego  is  at  once  the  source  ' 
of  our  deepest  suffering  and  at  the  same  time  of  our 
highest  happiness.  Over  this  realm  no  outer  power  of 
fate  can  ever  have  sway,  and  we  lay  aside  our  own 
control  and  responsibility  over  ourselves  only  with  the 
laying  aside  of  life  itself. 

And  yet  there  is  a  way  in  which  the  causal  method 
can  be  applied  within  the  limits  of  this  inner  realm. 
In  principle  there  is  no  reason  whatsoever  why  the 
individual  should  not  make  himself  the  observer  of 
what  has  happened  within  himself.  In  other  words,  he 
can  look  back  over  the  experiences  through  which  he 
has  passed  and  endeavor  to  link  them  up  in  their  causal 


i62        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

relations.  There  is  no  reason  indeed,  at  least  in  prin- 
ciple, why  he  should  not  scrutinize  each  experience — 
by  which  I  mean  each  decision  and  line  of  conduct 
which  he  has  taken — and  study  it  from  the  viewpoint 
of  finding  out  the  cause  from  which  it  resulted.  Of 
course  that  is  an  extremely  difficult  task;  but  it  is  the 
only  soundly  scientific  way  of  dealing  with  our  own 
lives.  In  order  to  carry  out  this  plan  of  action  the  facts 
of  our  own  lives  which  we  now  place  under  observation 
would  have  to  be  distanced  in  the  past,  so  that  our 
present  complex  of  living  emotions  and  inclinations 
would  not  enter  as  factors  into  the  observation.  If  we 
could  possibly  carry  out  the  plan  in  this  detached  way, 
then  each  experience  through  which  we  have  passed 
would  make  us  immeasurably  more  intelligent  than  we 
were  before,  so  intelligent  indeed  that  in  relation  to  our 
earlier  condition  we  should  rise  to  the  level  of  the 
super-intelligence  postulated  by  Laplace.  You  remem- 
ber that  Laplace  held  that  if  there  were  a  super- 
intelligence  standing  entirely  outside  of  the  facts 
occurring  in  the  universe,  this  intelligence  would  be 
able  to  see  causal  relations  in  all  the  happenings  of  the 
world  of  man  and  nature,  even  the  most  intricate  and 
microscopic.  It  is  only  by  aiming  at  this  sort  of  distance 
that  the  individual  could  establish  the  required  detach- 
ment of  the  perceiving  subject  from  the  object  of  his 
research,  which  we  have  already  seen  to  be  an  inevitable 
condition  for  the  application  of  the  causal  method  in 
research.  The  nearer  we  are  to  events  in  time  the  more 
difficult  it  is  to  trace  their  causal  structure.  And  the 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  163 

nearer  we  are  to  the  events  of  our  own  personal  experi- 
ence the  more  difficult  it  is  for  us  to  study  ourselves 
in  the  light  of  these  happenings;  for  the  activities  of 
the  observer  are  here  partly  the  object  of  research  and, 
in  so  far  as  that  is  so,  the  causal  connection  is  prac- 
tically impossible  to  establish.  I  am  not  preaching  a 
moral  sermon  here  or  suggesting  what  ought  to  be 
aimed  at  for  the  sake  of  the  moral  uplift  of  one's  own 
being.  I  am  only  treating  the  case  of  individual  free- 
dom from  the  viewpoint  of  its  logical  coherence  with 
the  principle  of  causation,  and  I  am  saying  that  in 
frincifle  there  is  no  reason  why  we  should  not  discover 
the  causal  connections  in  our  own  personal  conduct, 
but  that  in  practice  we  never  can  do  so  because  this 
would  mean  that  the  observing  subject  would  also  be 
the  object  of  research.  And  that  is  impossible;  for  no 
eye  can  see  itself.  But  in  so  far  as  any  man  is  not 
entirely  to-day  that  which  he  was  years  ago  there  is 
a  relative  degree  to  which  he  might  subject  his  own 
experiences  to  causal  scrutiny;  and  I  have  mentioned 
this  as  illustrative  of  the  general  principle. 

It  will  occur  to  many  readers  to  ask  if  thus  in  rela- 
tion to  the  chain  of  causality  the  freedom  of  the  indi- 
vidual will,  here  and  now,  is  only  apparent  and  results 
solely  from  the  defects  of  our  own  understanding.  That 
way  of  putting  the  case  is,  I  am  convinced,  entirely  mis- 
taken. We  might  illustrate  the  mistake  by  saying  that 
it  is  like  the  mistake  of  suggesting  that  the  inability  of 
a  runner  to  outrun  his  own  shadow  is  due  to  his  lack 
of  speed.  The  fact  that  the  individual  here  and  now, 


i64        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

in  regard  to  his  own  living  present  act,  cannot  be  sub- 
ject to  the  law  of  causation  is  a  truth  that  is  based  on 
a  perfectly  sound  logical  foundation  of  an  a  friori 
kind,  such  as  the  axiom  that  the  part  is  never  greater 
than  the  whole.  The  impossibility  of  the  individual  con- 
templating his  own  activity  here  and  now  under  the 
light  of  the  causal  principle  would  hold  good  even  in 
the  case  of  the  super-intelligence  postulated  by  Laplace. 
For,  even  though  this  super-intelligence  might  be  able 
to  trace  the  causal  structure  in  the  achievements  of  the 
most  gifted  geniuses  of  the  human  race,  yet  that  same 
super-intelligence  would  have  to  renounce  the  idea  of 
studying  the  activities  of  its  own  ego  at  the  moment  it 
contemplated  the  activities  of  our  mortal  ego.  If  there 
be  a  Supreme  Wisdom  whose  celestial  nature  is  in- 
finitely elevated  above  ours,  and  who  can  see  every 
convolution  in  our  brains  and  hear  every  pulse  beat  of 
each  human  heart,  as  a  matter  of  course  such  a  Supreme 
Wisdom  sees  the  succession  of  cause  and  effect  in  every- 
thing we  do.  But  this  does  not  in  the  least  invalidate 
our  own  sense  of  responsibility  for  our  own  actions. 
From  this  standpoint  we  are  on  an  equal  footing  with 
the  saints  and  confessors  of  the  most  sublime  religions. 
We  cannot  possibly  study  ourselves  at  the  moment  or 
within  the  environment  of  any  given  activity.  Here 
is  the  place  where  the  freedom  of  the  will  comes  in 
and  establishes  itself,  without  usurping  the  right  of 
any  rival.  Being  emancipated  thus,  we  are  at  liberty 
to  construct  any  miraculous  background  that  we  like 
in  the  mysterious  realm  of  our  own  inner  being,  even 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  165 

though  we  may  be  at  the  same  time  the  strictest 
scientists  in  the  world,  and  the  strictest  upholders  of 
the  principle  of  causal  determinism.  It  is  from  this 
autarchy  of  the  ego  that  the  belief  in  miracles  arises, 
and  it  is  to  this  source  that  we  are  to  attribute  the 
widespread  belief  in  irrational  explanations  of  life.  The 
existence  of  that  belief  in  the  face  of  scientific  advance 
is  a  proof  of  the  inviolability  of  the  ego  by  the  law  of 
causation  in  the  sense  which  I  have  mentioned.  I  might 
put  the  matter  in  another  way  and  say  that  the  freedom 
of  the  ego  here  and  now,  and  its  independence  of  the 
causal  chain,  is  a  truth  that  comes  from  the  immediate 
dictate  of  the  human  consciousness. 

And  what  holds  good  for  the  present  moment  of 
our  being  holds  good  also  for  our  own  future  conduct 
in  which  the  influences  of  our  present  ego  plays  a  part. 
The  road  to  the  future  always  starts  in  the  present. 
It  is,  here  and  now,  part  and  parcel  of  the  ego.  And 
for  that  reason  the  individual  can  never  consider  his 
own  future  purely  and  exclusively  from  the  causal 
standpoint.  That  is  the  reason  why  fancy  plays  such  a 
part  in  the  construction  of  the  future.  It  is  in  actual 
recognition  of  this  profound  fact  that  people  have  re- 
course to  the  palmist  and  the  clairvoyant  to  satisfy 
their  individual  curiosity  about  their  own  future.  It  is 
also  on  this  fact  that  dreams  and  ideals  are  based,  and 
here  the  human  being  finds  one  of  the  richest  sources 
of  inspiration. 

I  might  mention  here  in  passing  that  this  practical 
inapplicability  of  the  law  of  causation  extends  beyond 


i66        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

the  individual.  It  extends  to  our  relations  with  our 
fellow-men.  We  are  too  much  a  part  of  the  life  of 
our  fellow  beings  to  be  in  a  position  to  study  them 
from  the  viewpoint  of  motives,  which  means  the  causal 
viewpoint.  No  ordinary  human  being  can  put  himself 
in  the  position  of  the  super-intelligence  imagined  by 
Laplace  and  consider  himself  capable  of  tracing  all  the 
inner  springs  of  action  from  which  the  conduct  of  his 
fellow-men  originates.  On  the  other  hand,  however,  I 
would  mention  here  again  a  phase  of  the  causal  appli- 
cation corresponding  to  that  which  I  have  already 
spoken  of  in  relation  to  the  individual's  capacity  for 
scientifically  observing  his  own  past  experience.  To  a 
relative  degree  it  is  possible  to  study  the  motives  on 
which  other  people  act,  just  as  they  are  studied  by  the 
psychologist  or  the  alienist.  In  all  such  cases  there  is 
to  a  certain  degree  the  requisite  distance  between  the 
researcher  and  the  object  of  his  research.  And  therefore 
to  this  extent  there  is  no  logical  incoherence  in  the  idea 
of  a  person  studying  Jthe  activities  of  his  fellow  beings. 
Indeed  all  who  wish  to  influence  others  do  so  in  every- 
day life,  which  is  largely  the  secret  of  political  suc- 
cess. It  is  the  secret  of  all  the  power  for  good  which 
so  many  people  exercise  in  relation  to  their  fellow 
beings.  Most  of  us  remember  from  childhood  per- 
sonalities whom  we  shirked  because  of  some  sort  of 
innate  feeling  of  insecurity  in  their  presence,  and  on 
the  other  hand  most  of  us,  I  imagine,  have  memories 
of  acquaintances  to  whose  influence  we  were  willingly 
amenable  because  we  felt  a  certain  reverence  towards 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  167 

s 

them.  And  everybody  is  more  or  less  familiar  with  the  ^ 
feeling  of  withdrawal  which  comes  over  one  in  the 
presence  of  a  person  who  is  suspected  of  seeing  too 
clearly  into  the  inner  lives  of  others.  All  these  imme- 
diate reactions  bear  witness  to  a  sort  of  instinctive 
recognition  that  our  own  lives  are  in  the  last  analysis 
subject  to  causation,  though  the  ego  as  regards  its 
immediate  destiny  cannot  be  subject  to  that  law. 

Science  thus  brings  us  to  the  threshold  of  the  ego 
and  there  leaves  us  to  ourselves.  Here  it  resigns  us  to 
the  care  of  other  hands.  In  the  conduct  of  our  own 
lives  the  causal  principle  is  of  little  help;  for  by  the  j 
iron  law  of  logical  consistency  we  are  excluded  fromj 
laying  the  causal  foundations  of  our  own  future  or 
foreseeing  that  future  as  definitely  resulting  from  the  \ 
present. 

But  mankind  has  need  of  fundamental  postulates 
for  the  conduct  of  everyday  existence,  and  this  need 
is  far  more  pressing  than  the  hunger  for  scientific 
knowledge.  A  single  deed  often  has  far  more  signifi- 
cance for  a  human  being  than  all  the  wisdom  of  the 
world  put  together.  And  therefore  there  must  be  an-  ' 
other  source  of  guidance  than  mere  intellectual  equip- 
ment. The  law  of  causation  is  the  guiding  rule  of 
science;  but  the  Categorical  Imperative — that  is  to  say, 
the  dictate  of  duty — is  the  guiding  rule  of  life.  Here 
intelligence  has  to  give  place  to  character,  and  scientific 
knowledge  to  religious  belief.  And  when  I  say  religious 
belief  here  I  mean  the  word  in  its  fundamental  sense. 
And  the  mention  of  it  brings  us  to  that  much  discussed 


i68        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

question  of  the  relation  between  science  and  religion. 
It  is  not  my  place  here  nor  within  my  competency  to 
deal  with  that  question.  Religion  belongs  to  that  realm 
that  is  inviolable  before  the  law  of  causation  and  there- 
fore closed  to  science.  The  scientist  as  such  must  recog- 
nize the  value  of  religion  as  such,  no  matter  what  may 
be  its  forms,  so  long  as  it  does  not  make  the  mistake  of 
opposing  its  own  dogmas  to  the  fundamental  law  upon 
which  scientific  research  is  based,  namely,  the  sequence 
of  cause  and  effect  in  all  external  phenomena.  In  con- 
junction with  the  question  of  the  relations  between 
religion  and  science,  I  might  also  say  that  those  forms 
of  religion  which  have  a  nihilist  attitude  to  life  are 
out  of  harmony  with  the  scientific  outlook  and  con- 
tradictory to  its  principles.  All  denial  of  life's  value 
for  itself  and  for  its  own  sake  is  a  denial  of  the  world 
of  human  thought,  and  therefore  in  the  last  analysis 
a  denial  of  the  true  foundation  not  only  of  science 
but  also  of  religion.  I  think  that  most  scientists  would 
agree  to  this,  and  would  raise  their  hands  against 
religious  nihilism  as  destructive  of  science  itself. 

There  can  never  be  any  real  opposition  between 
religion  and  science  -y  for  the  one  is  the  complement 
of  the  other.  Every  serious  and  reflective  person 
realizes,  I  think,  that  the  religious  element  in  his  na- 
ture must  be  recognized  and  cultivated  if  all  the 
powers  of  the  human  soul  are  to  act  together  in  perfect 
balance  and  harmony.  And  indeed  it  was  not  by  any 
accident  that  the  greatest  thinkers  of  all  ages  were 
also  deeply  religious  souls,  even  though  they  made  no 


THE  ANSWER  OF  SCIENCE  169 

public  show  of  their  religious  feeling.  It  is  from  the  $ 
cooperation  of  the  understanding  with  the  will  that  / 
the  finest  fruit  of  philosophy  has  arisen,  namely,  the 
ethical  fruit.  Science  enhances  the  moral  values  of  life, 
because  it  furthers  a  love  of  truth  and  reverence —  * 
love  of  truth  displaying  itself  in  the  constant  endeavor 
to  arrive  at  a  more  exact  knowledge  of  the  world  of 
mind  and  matter  around  us,  and  reverence,  because 
every  advance  in  knowledge  brings  us  face  to  face 
with  the  mystery  of  our  own  being. 


CHAPTER  VI 

FROM  THE  RELATIVE  TO  THE 
ABSOLUTE 

1HOPE  the  reader  will  not  be  frightened  away  by 
the  sound  of  this  title.  I  should  have  chosen 
another  terminology  if  I  could  have  found  one  better 
suited  to  my  purpose.  But  the  above  title  is  the  most 
expressive  I  can  find  to  indicate  an  outstanding  feature 
of  scientific  development  which  I  wish  to  describe 
here.  This  feature  has  been  remarkably  characteristic 
of  physical  science  during  the  past  hundred  years.  The 
line  of  progress  has  been  from  the  relative  to  the 
absolute.  We  need  not  delay  here  to  discuss  the  various 
meanings  given  to  these  words  in  scientific  and  semi- 
scientific  parlance  nowadays.  I  am  using  them  as  the 
man  in  the  street  uses  them  in  everyday  life.  And  the 
meaning  in  which  we  are  to  take  them  here  will  best 
be  made  clear  by  getting  directly  into  touch  with  the 
facts  to  which  that  meaning  is  applicable. 

Let  us  begin  with  the  discussion  of  one  of  the  most 
elementary  concepts  in  chemistry — atomic  weights.  The 
idea  of  the  atom  itself  dates  from  the  time  of  the 
Grecian  philosophers.  And  indeed  the  word  itself,  in 
Greek,  means  that  which  cannot  be  divided.  The  art  of 

170 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  171 

measuring  atomic  weights,  however,  dates  from  the  dis- 
covery of  a  fundamental  principle  in  stoechiometry. 
Stoechiometry,  by  the  way,  is  another  Greek  word.  It 
is  the  name  which  is  given  to  the  science  of  estimating 
chemical  elements.  Now,  the  stoechiometrical  principle 
to  which  I  have  just  referred  is  that  all  chemical  com- 
pounds result  from  definite  ratios  between  the  weight 
of  one  element  and  another  in  the  compound.  For 
instance,  one  gram  of  hydrogen  unites  with  eight  grams 
of  oxygen  to  form  water.  And  if  one  gram  of  hydro- 
gen be  united  with  35.5  grams  of  chlorine  the  resulting 
compound  will  be  hydrochloric  acid.  If  we  take  one 
gram  of  hydrogen  as  the  unit  of  measurement,  we 
say  that  eight  grams  is  the  equivalent  weight  of  oxygen 
and  35.5  grams  the  equivalent  weight  of  chlorine.  And 
so  for  every  chemical  element  in  every  compound 
which  it  can  form  with  another  element  we  can  ascertain 
its  equivalent  weight.  Of  course  the  measurement  is 
based  on  the  choice  of  hydrogen  as  a  unit,  and  in  that 
sense  of  measurement  it  is  somewhat  arbitrary.  That  is 
not  all,  however.  Its  validity  is  restricted  to  those  spe- 
cial elements  with  which  hydrogen  combines  in  order 
to  form  a  compound.  The  equivalent  weight  of  oxygen 
as  8  is  valid  only  in  its  relation  to  water.  If  instead  of 
water  we  take  hydrogen  peroxide  then  the  equivalent 
weight  of  the  oxygen  will  be  16.  In  principle  there  are 
no  grounds  whatsoever  for  preferring  one  of  these 
numbers  to  the  other.  Every  element  therefore,  gen- 
erally speaking,  has  a  varying  equivalent  weight.  In 
principle  it  has  as  many  equivalent  weights  as  there 


172        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

are  combinations  into  which  it  can  enter.  If  there  be  an 
element  which  does  not  enter  into  any  known  combina- 
tion then  there  is  no  term  of  reference  whereby  its 
equivalent  weight  can  be  established.  Now  the  inter- 
esting fact  is  that  in  the  different  combinations  into 
which  an  element  may  enter  with  other  elements  to 
form  a  compound,  the  elements  will  always  be  in  rela- 
tion to  one  another  according  to  their  equivalent  weight 
numbers,  or  a  simple  multiple  of  these.  This  is  called 
the  law  of  multiple  proportions,  and  it  states  that  when- 
ever two  elements  combine  in  more  proportions  than 
one,  the  quantities  of  A,  let  us  say,  which  combine 
with  a  definite  quantity  of  B  are  connected  by  a  simple 
multiple.  Thus  a  quantity  of  chlorine  having  the 
equivalent  weight  of  35.5  combines  not  only  with  one 
gram  of  hydrogen,  to  form  hydrochloric  acid,  but  also 
with  eight  grams  of  oxygen,  to  form  chloroxide,  while 
it  combines  with  one  gram  of  hydrogen  to  form  hydro- 
chloric acid.  Therefore  there  are  key  numbers  which 
can  always  be  used  to  describe  the  proportions  of  vari- 
ous elements  present  in  the  various  compounds.  To  put 
the  matter  in  a  plainer  way,  in  every  compound  sub- 
stance the  proportional  weight  of  each  element  may  be 
represented  by  a  fixed  number,  or  by  this  number  mul- 
tiplied by  two,  three,  four  or  five  and  so  on.  Unless  we 
are  to  attribute  to  some  inconceivable  law  of  chance  this 
extraordinarily  simple  and  regular  scheme  into  which 
the  various  compound  substances  fit  perfectly,  we  must 
admit  that  the  idea  of  equivalent  weight  must  be  con- 
sidered as  having  an  independent  significance,  irrespec- 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  173 

tive  of  the  combination  which  the  element  can  make 
with  other  elements.  Therefore  in  a  certain  sense  this 
equivalent  weight  must  be  looked  upon  as  something 
Absolute. 

This  is  what  happens  in  the  actual  world  of  fact. 
But  a  difficulty  which  remained  for  a  long  time  in- 
soluble in  chemistry  arose  from  the  fact  that  some 
elements  are  not  constant  in  their  valency  but  may  com- 
bine with  other  elements  in  different  ratios,  such  as 
hydrogen  with  oxygen,  so  that  one  might  take  either 
8  or  16  as  indicating  the  equivalent  weight  of  oxygen. 
This  difficulty  could  not  be  overcome  until  a  new  idea 
was  introduced  which  was  foreign  to  stoechiometry. 
This  idea  is  contained  in  Avogadro's  Law,  which  was 
founded  on  facts  discovered  by  Gay-Lussac,  namely, 
that  two  elements  in  a  gaseous  state  combine  with  one 
another  not  only  in  definite  weight  ratios  but  also  in 
definite  volume  ratios  under  equal  pressure  and  tem- 
perature. Avogadro's  Law  states  that  equal  volumes  of 
different  gases  at  the  same  temperature  and  pressure 
contain  the  same  number  of  molecules,  that  is  to  say, 
the  volume  of  a  gram  molecule  is  constant  for  all 
gases.  Therefore,  from  the  many  equivalent  weights 
which  might  be  assigned  to  each  element  it  was  pos- 
sible to  select  one  definite  weight,  which  was  called  the 
molecular  weight ;  because  the  molecular  weight  of  two 
gases  was  found  to  be  in  constant  ratio  to  their  densities. 
Here  there  was  no  longer  any  question  of  chemical 
reaction  but  only  of  chemical  substances.  Therefore  the 
rule  could  be  applied  to  elements  such  as  perfect  gas, 


174        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

which  it  is  difficult  or  impossible  to  combine  with  other 
substances. 

According  to  the  Avogadrian  Law  the  molecules  of 
chemical  elements  often  enter  into  the  molecules  of 
the  combination  not  with  their  whole  weight  but  only 
with  a  fraction  of  it.  For  instance,  the  molecule  of 
steam  is  made  up  of  one  whole  molecule  of  hydrogen 
and  half  a  molecule  of  oxygen,  whereas  the  molecule 
of  hydrochloric  acid  is  made  up  of  half  a  molecule 
of  chlorine  and  half  a  molecule  of  hydrogen.  Therefore 
from  the  molecular  weight  we  come  to  the  atomic 
weight  of  an  element  as  the  smallest  fraction  which  is 
found  in  a  combination  of  elements.  This  atomic  weight 
expresses  the  relative  weights  of  each  species  of  matter. 

Although  in  Avogadro's  Law  the  concept  of  atomic 
weight  has  a  certain  absolute  significance,  at  the  same 
time  it  has  quite  a  relative  connotation.  The  Avogadrian 
atomic  weight  is  only  a  relative  number.  Therefore 
it  cannot  be  determined  except  by  an  arbitrary  refer- 
ence to  the  atomic  weight  of  some  special  element  or 
other,  such  as  Hydrogen  =  i  or  Oxygen  =  1 6.  With- 
out reference  to  some  such  given  term,  the  number 
describing  the  atomic  weight  would  have  no  meaning. 
Therefore  it  has  for  a  long  time  been  the  aim  of 
chemical  researchers  to  free  the  concept  of  atomic 
weight  from  this  restriction  and  try  to  give  it  a  wider 
and  more  absolute  meaning.  This  problem,  however,  is 
not  very  important  for  the  practical  chemist ;  because 
in  the  chemical  analysis  of  substances  there  is  always 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  175 

the  question  of  relative  proportions  among  the  com- 
bining elements. 

In  every  science  it  occasionally  happens  that  there 
arises  a  conflict  between  two  classes  of  people  whom  I 
may  designate  respectively  as  purists  and  pragmatists. 
The  former  strive  always  after  a  perfect  coordination 
of  the  accepted  axioms  of  their  science,  submitting  them 
to  an  ever  more  and  more  rigid  analysis,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  eliminating  every  contingent  and  foreign  ele- 
ment. On  the  other  hand,  the  pragmatists  try  to  amplify 
the  accepted  first  principles  by  the  introduction  of  new 
ideas  and  thus  send  out  feelers  in  all  directions  for 
the  purpose  of  making  progress.  They  do  not  mind  if 
the  mongrel  be  mated  with  the  pure-bred,  provided 
something  can  be  achieved  through  the  combination, 
which  otherwise  could  not  be  achieved.  In  the  science 
of  chemistry  also  there  are  purists  who  set  themselves 
against  any  attempt  to  make  the  concept  of  atomic 
weight  something  more  than  that  of  a  merely  relative 
number.  But  there  are  also  leading  chemists  who  find 
it  at  least  practical  to  treat  the  atomic  idea  as  it  is 
treated  in  mechanical  physics,  that  is  to  say,  to  con- 
sider the  atoms  as  minute  and  independent  particles 
occupying  definite  and  measurable  dimensions  in  the 
molecule,  and  being  either  divided  or  regrouped  ac- 
cording as  the  molecule  undergoes  chemical  changes. 
During  my  time  in  Munich,  in  the  beginning  of  the 
eighties,  I  remember  being  very  much  impressed  by  the 
polemic  that  then  raged  in  the  university  laboratory. 
Among  the  puritan  chemists  the  leader  was  then 


176        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

Hermann  Kolbe  of  Leipzig,  who  hurled  his  sacred 
anathema  against  the  mechanical-atomic  interpretation  : 
which  was  involved  in  the  building  up  of  chemical 
formulas  for  the  constitution  of  various  substances. 
When  results  were  somewhat  slow  in  being  obtained  by 
that  process  he  generally  grew  all  the  more  violent 
against  the  principle  adopted.  In  the  circumstances 
von  Baeyer  did  the  wisest  thing  that  could  be  done. 1 
He  kept  silent  and  awaited  results,  until  finally  success 
crowned  his  efforts. 

A  similar  condition  of  affairs  was  reproduced  re- 1 
cently  when  the  controversy  arose  over  the  atom  model 
suggested  by  Niels  Bohr,  which  indeed  demands  a  far 
greater  concession  on  the  part  of  orthodox  theorists! 
than  the  earlier  hypothesis  of  the  atomic  structure  of 
chemical  elements. 

On  the  philosophical  side  also  there  are  purists  who 
have  maintained  a  long-standing  attitude  of  opposition! 
to  the  atomic  theory.  Ernst  Mach  was  the  most  out- 1 
standing  leader  of  this  school.  During  his  life  he  never 
seemed  to  tire  of  using  the  weapon  of  conceptual; 
analysis,  and  occasionally  also  his  irony,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  discrediting  the  rather  naive  and  rudimentary 
views  of  those  who  then  championed  the  atomic  prin-; 
ciple.  He  believed  that  the  revival  of  the  old  atomic 
doctrine  and  the  dressing  of  it  in  modern  form  signified 
a  retrogression,  and  hindered  rather  than  helped  the 
philosophical  development  of  modern  physics. 

Ludwig  Boltzmann,  as  leading  representative  of  the 
atomic  physicists,  boldly  endeavored  to  hold  his  ground 

I 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  177 

against  Mach ;  but  the  contest  was  rather  difficult  from 
his  side,  because  the  purist  sticks  to  his  logical  weapons. 
He  takes  his  stand  on  logical  deductions  from  the  ac- 
cepted principles  of  science,  whereas  the  pragmatist 
scientist  is  striking  out  into  new  ground ;  and  in  order 
to  open  that  up  he  must  break  away  from  the  logical 
line  of  the  old  ideas.  The  pragmatist  must  face  failure 
again  and  again,  and  is  always  open  to  the  jibes  of  the 
orthodox  "I  told  you  so."  What  the  puritan  objects 
to  is  the  introduction  of  new  ideas  and  theorems  from 
outer  sources,  especially  while  those  are  in  the  stage 
of  not  having  produced  any  results  in  practice.  Now,  no 
theorem  or  working  hypothesis  can  arise  ready-made, 
like  Pallas  Athene  from  the  head  of  Jupiter.  Every 
hypothesis  which  eventually  has  proved  to  be  useful 
and  to  have  led  to  valuable  discoveries  at  first  occurred 
only  vaguely  to  the  mind  of  its  inventor.  When  Archi- 
medes jumped  out  of  his  bath  one  morning  and  cried 
Eureka  he  obviously  had  not  worked  out  the  whole 
principle  on  which  the  specific  gravity  of  various  bodies 
could  be  determined  5  and  undoubtedly  there  were 
people  who  laughed  at  his  first  attempts.  That  is  per- 
haps why  most  scientific  pioneers  are  so  slow  to  disclose 
the  nature  of  their  first  insights  when  they  believe 
themselves  to  be  on  a  track  of  a  new  discovery.  They 
would  have  to  stand  against  the  massed  batteries  of 
the  purists,  which  would  not  be  a  very  advisable  posi- 
tion for  any  one  to  take  up  who  has  to  follow  the 
lead  of  his  own  instinct  painfully  and  painstakingly 
and  refuse  to  be  discouraged  when  his  attempts  end  in 


178        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

failure.  For  every  hypothesis  in  physical  science  has 
to  go  through  a  period  of  difficult  gestation  and  par- 
turition before  it  can  be  brought  out  into  the  light  of 
day  and  handed  to  others,  ready-made  in  scientific 
form  so  that  it  will  be,  as  it  were,  fool-proof  in  the 
hands  of  outsiders  who  wish  to  apply  it. 

Even  when  a  scientific  theory  has  established  its 
right  to  existence  by  reason  of  the  results  it  has  pro- 
duced, the  purist  often  takes  a  long  time  to  come 
round.  And  that  is  because  the  success  of  a  new  theory 
in  physics  cannot  be  decided  according  to  its  logical 
consistency  with  accepted  notions,  but  rather  by  the 
test  whether  or  not  it  explains  and  coordinates  certain 
facts  already  ascertained,  but  which  cannot  be  explained 
on  any  other  grounds  except  that  of  the  new  hypothesis. 
Of  course  the  purists  have  always  the  old  refuge  to 
fall  back  upon.  They  appeal  to  the  element  of  chance. 
And  on  that  stand  some  of  them  will  remain,  while 
others  will  take  up  an  intermediate  position  of  qualifie  1 
skepticism  j  but  the  pragmatist  finds  that  the  hypothesis 
in  question  has  worked  out  a  clear  solution  of  certain 
puzzles  and  he  accepts  it  for  what  it  does.  Instead  o 
looking  backwards  he  begins  to  look  forward  with 
view  to  finding  whether  the  hypothesis  may  not  be 
applied  in  other  directions  also.  It  was  thus  with  th 
fate  of  the  quantum  hypothesis,  for  instance.  It  was 
originally  formulated  to  explain  a  puzzle  of  radiation 
which  had  long  existed  5  but  in  the  hands  of  Einstei 
it  was  soon  applied  to  explain  the  constitution  of  ligh 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  179 

and,  in  the  hands  of  Niels  Bohr,  to  explain  the  structure 
of  the  atom. 

It  was  just  in  this  way  that  the  existence  of  an  abso- 
lute atomic  weight  came  to  be  finally  established.  Here 
I  need  not  go  into  details  to  tell  how  so  many  lines  of 
research  led  finally  to  the  discovery  of  the  absolute 
atomic  weight.  Among  these  many  lines  I  may  men- 
tion the  development  of  the  kinetic  theory  for  gases 
and  fluids,  the  laws  governing  the  radiation  of  heat 
and  light,  the  discovery  of  the  cathode  rays  and  radio- 
activity, and  the  measurement  of  the  elementary  elec- 
trical quantum.  To-day  no  physicist  would  question  the 
fact  that  the  weight  of  an  atom  of  hydrogen,  setting 
aside  the  unavoidable  errors  of  measurement,  amounts 
to  1.649  quadrillionths  of  a  gram.  The  value  of  this 
number  is  entirely  independent  of  the  atomic  weight 
of  other  chemical  elements,  and  in  this  sense  it  can 
be  called  an  absolute  quantity. 

All  this  of  course  is  already  a  matter  of  common 
knowledge.  And  I  have  mentioned  it  here  in  order  to 
illustrate  a  characteristic  feature  in  the  development 
of  scientific  research.  This  phenomenon  shows  itself 
under  the  most  varied  circumstances.  Axioms  are  in- 
struments which  are  used  in  every  department  of  sci- 
ence, and  in  every  department  there  are  purists  who 
are  inclined  to  oppose  with  all  their  might  any  expan- 
sion of  the  accepted  axioms  beyond  the  boundary  of 
their  logical  application. 

I  shall  now  suggest  another  case  for  consideration. 
But  this  is  by  no  means  so  simple  as  that  which  I  have 


i8o        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

already  treated.  In  fact  it  is  still  the  center  of  con- 
tention. 

Let  us  begin  with  a  concept  of  energy.  The  term 
"energy"  represents  the  work  that  can  be  done  by 
forces  acting  on  matter.  And  the  Principle  of  the  Con- 
servation of  Energy,  which  was  formulated  in  the 
middle  of  last  century,  was  a  development  from  the 
concept  of  force  in  Newtonian  mechanics.  According  to 
the  Principle  of  the  Conservation  of  Energy,  in  every 
mechanical  process  the  amount  of  energy  which  the 
moving  force  puts  into  the  body  moved  is  compensatec 
for  by  a  loss  of  potential  energy  on  the  part  of  the 
acting  force.  Two  kinds  of  energy  were  thus  recog- 
nized, namely  potential  energy  and  kinetic  energy,  the 
former  being  the  energy  possessed  by  bodies  at  rest 
and  the  latter  being  the  energy  of  moving  bodies. 
There  is  no  such  thing  then  as  absolutely  lost  energy, 
but  only  a  change  from  one  kind  of  energy  to  another. 
And  the  loss  sustained  by  one  kind  of  energy,  the 
potential,  is  compensated  for  by  the  gain  in  the  other 
kind  of  energy,  the  kinetic.  In  this  connection  the 
purist  might  reasonably  maintain  that  the  formulation 
of  the  Principle  of  the  Conservation  of  Energy  is  valic 
only  for  a  difference  of  energy,  and  that  the  concept 
of  energy  does  not  refer  to  the  state  of  a  body  or,  as 
we  say  in  scientific  language,  the  state  of  a  physica 
system,  but  rather  to  a  change  in  that  state.  Therefore 
the  energy  value  remains  an  indefinite  superaddec 
factor.  And  the  question  of  its  measurement  would  have 
no  meaning  in  physical  science.  It  would  have  the  same 

I 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  181 


relation  to  the  physicist  as  the  altitude  above  sea-level 
would  have  for  the  architect  who  is  building  a  house. 
It  is  not  the  latter's  business  to  bother  himself  about 
this  altitude.  He  has  to  confine  himself  to  the  altitude 
of  the  house  itself  and  that  of  the  various  floors  of 
which  it  is  composed.  Such  is  the  objection  that  a  purist 
might  urge. 

His  standpoint  would  be  quite  sound  if  the  Principle 
of  the  Conservation  of  Energy  were  the  only  axiom 
employed  in  physical  science.  But  this  is  not  the  case. 
And  therefore  we  cannot  reject  offhand  the  suggestion 
that  it  may  be  well  to  introduce  into  the  concept  of 
energy  that  of  another  axiom,  if  the  result  would  be 
that  the  state  of  a  physical  picture  here  and  now  could 
thus  be  fully  determined.  If  we  could  do  that  then  it 
is  obvious  that  the  concept  of  energy  would  be  very 
much  simplified  by  the  addition  of  something  else  to 
the  Principle  of  Conservation.  As  a  matter  of  fact 
that  is  what  has  been  done  to-day.  For  any  physical 
system  in  a  given  state  we  can  find  a  definite  expres- 
sion for  the  magnitude  of  its  energy,  without  any 
superadded  factor  whatsoever. 

Let  us  first  take  electromagnetic  energy  in  a  vacuum. 
Here  there  is  an  axiom  which  establishes  the  absolute 
value  of  that  energy.  It  states  that  the  energy  of  an 
electromagnetic  neutral  field  is  equal  to  Zero.  This 
law  is  neither  obvious  in  itself  nor  can  it  be  deduced 
from  the  Principle  of  the  Conservation  of  Energy. 
Only  a  few  years  ago  Nernst  formulated  the  hypoth- 
esis that  in  the  so-called  neutral  field  there  is  a  certain 


i82        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

stationary  energy  radiation  of  tremendous  magnitude. 
This  is  called  the  radiation  of  the  Zero  point.  It  can- 
not be  detected  in  the  observation  of  ordinary  processes 
because  it  streams  through  all  bodies  equally,  just  as 
the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  represents  a  very  im- 
portant force  which  plays  no  part  in  most  of  the 
movements  that  we  observe,  because  the  pressure  is 
equal  in  all  directions.  Such  a  radiation  hypothesis  is 
perfectly  reasonable,  and  validity  can  be  decided  upon 
only  by  the  question  of  what  results  follow  from  its 
application.  For  this  application,  however,  it  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  furnish  a  special  reference  system 
that  is  immobile,  namely  that  in  which  the  Zero  radia- 
tion is  equal  in  all  directions.  Through  the  absolute 
energy  of  the  neutral  field  the  absolute  energy  of  every 
other  electromagnetic  field  is  thereby  established. 

Coming  now  to  the  energy  of  matter,  for  this  we 
can  also  obtain  a  definite  absolute  value.  But  the  energy 
of  a  body  at  rest  is  not  equal  to  Zero  as  might  prob- 
ably be  imagined,  following  the  analogy  of  the  electro- 
magnetic neutral  field.  The  energy  of  a  body  at  rest 
is  equal  to  its  mass  multiplied  by  the  square  of  the 
velocity  of  light.  This  is  the  so-called  rest  energy  of 
the  body,  and  is  caused  by  its  mechanical  constitution 
and  its  temperature.  If  the  body  be  set  in  motion  by 
some  force  this  energy  value,  which  is  of  an  enormous 
amount,  does  not  make  itself  felt  because  the  phe- 
nomenon of  motion  here  arises  from  only  a  differen- 
tiation of  energy.  Such  a  conception  could  never  have 
arisen  from  the  energy  principle  itself.  As  a  matter  of 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  183 

fact  it  arises  from  the  special  theory  of  relativity,  and 
it  is  a  remarkable  coincidence  that  it  is  just  the  theory 
of  relativity  which  has  led  to  the  determination  of  an 
absolute  value  for  the  energy  of  a  physical  system. 
This  apparent  paradox  is  explained  by  the  simple  fact 
that  in  the  relativity  theory  there  is  the  question  of 
dependence  on  the  reference  system  selected,  whereas 
here  there  is  the  question  of  dependence  on  the  physical 
state  of  the  body  under  observation. 

"Doesn't  it  in  reality  sound  quite  nonsensical  to  say 
that  the  energy  of  an  atom  of  oxygen  is  sixteen  times 
greater  than  that  of  an  atom  of  hydrogen?"  the  purist 
might  ask.  We  might  answer  that  there  would  be  no 
sense  in  such  a  statement  if  we  could  not  speak  of  the 
hypothetical  transformation  of  oxygen  into  hydrogen 
without  involving  a  logical  contradiction  in  the  thought 
itself.  But  the  idea  of  oxygen  being  one  day  changed 
into  hydrogen  does  not  involve  any  logical  contradic- 
tion. Now,  it  is  a  mistake  in  these  matters  to  speak  of 
something  as  nonsensical  unless  it  can  be  shown  to  be 
logically  incoherent ;  and  it  would  therefore  seem  more 
advisable  to  wait  and  see  whether  a  day  may  not  come 
when  the  problem  of  this  transformation  of  oxygen 
into  hydrogen  may  assume  a  reasonable  significance. 
There  are  already  signs  that  this  time  is  at  hand. 

As  in  the  case  of  electromagnetic  and  kinetic  energy 
so,  too,  in  all  departments  of  physics,  mechanics  as  well 
as  electrodynamics,  the  movement  has  been  away  from 
dealing  with  differentials  of  energy  towards  dealing 
with  absolute  values  of  it.  And  this  direction  has  in- 


i84        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

variably  led  to  important  results.  When  considering  the 
phenomenon  of  heat  radiation,  for  instance,  it  was 
always  the  strict  rule  to  deal  only  with  the  difference 
between  the  radiation  absorbed  and  that  emitted  5  be- 
cause all  the  heat  rays  that  a  body  absorbs  it  can  also 
give  out.  But  in  the  theory  of  Prevost  these  two  proc- 
esses were  separated  from  one  another  and  each  of 
them  given  an  independent  meaning.  In  galvanism 
only  the  potential  difference  was  measured ;  but  the 
absolute  value  of  the  potential  was  also  recognized 
because  the  potential  energy  of  all  electric  charges 
at  infinite  distances  was  declared  to  be  equal  to  Zero. 
For  the  emission  of  monochromatic  radiation  in  the 
case  of  an  atom  the  measurement  of  the  frequency 
emitted  gave  only  a  difference  of  the  atomic  energy 
before  and  after  the  emission.  But  by  first  separating 
the  two  factors  of  this  difference — the  so-called  terms 
— and  then  examining  each  separately,  Niels  Bohr  and 
Arnold  Sommerfeld  were  able  to  discover  a  clew  for 
the  solution  of  the  mystery,  Niels  Bohr  in  the  case 
of  visible  rays  and  Arnold  Sommerfeld  for  the 
Roentgen  rays. 

It  is  not,  however,  merely  in  its  dealings  with  the 
problem  of  energy  that  progress  from  the  differential 
to  the  integral  is  characteristic  of  physical  science.  We 
find  the  same  feature  showing  itself  in  every  other 
branch  of  physical  research.  Thus  the  older  elasticity 
theory  of  body  force  is  now  referred  back  to  sur- 
face forces.  In  electrodynamics  electric  and  magnetic 
penderometer  forces  are  resolved  into  the  so-called 


PROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  185 

Maxwellian  tension.  The  thermodynamic  measure- 
ments of  temperature  and  pressure  are  resolved  into 
the  thermodynamical  potential.  In  each  of  these  cases 
the  progress  signifies  a  new  stage  in  the  evolution  of 
theoretical  physics. 

But  there  is  one  evolutionary  struggle  going  on 
which  deserves  a  little  more  detailed  notice  because  it 
is  still  in  an  undecided  phase.  It  is  the  problem  of 
trying  to  find  an  absolute  value  for  entropy.  In  the 
original  definition  of  entropy  put  forward  by  Rudolf 
Clausius,  if  we  are  to  measure  the  entropy  of  a  body 
there  must  be  a  reversible  process  of  some  kind  to 
enable  us  to  determine  the  difference  of  entropy  be- 
tween the  initial  state  and  the  final  state  of  the  process. 
In  the  light  of  this  theory  the  concept  of  entropy 
originally  referred  not  to  a  state  but  rather  to  a  change 
of  state,  exactly  as  was  the  case  in  regard  to  atomic 
weight  and  energy.  Indeed,  the  earlier  scientific  notion 
was  that  the  concept  of  entropy  had  a  physical  signifi- 
cance only  where  there  could  be  a  reversible  process. 
It  did  not  take  long,  however,  before  a  broader  con- 
cept was  put  forward  and  entropy  began  to  be  looked 
upon  as  a  characteristic  or  inherent  quality  in  the  state 
of  a  body  here  and  now.  In  this  new  way  of  looking 
at  the  case,  however,  there  still  remained  an  undefined 
additive  constant,  because  one  could  still  measure  only 
the  difference  of  entropy.  Were  we  to  follow  the  lead 
suggested  by  the  Einstein  experiments,  and  base  the 
concept  of  entropy  on  the  statistical  laws  governing  the 
oscillations  of  a  physical  picture  in  relation  to  its 


i86        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

thermodynamic  state  of  equilibrium,  even  then  we 
should  only  arrive  at  a  measurement  of  differences, 
involved  in  a  change  of  entropy,  but  never  at  the 
absolute  value  of  entropy  itself. 

Is  there  then  any  way  whereby  we  can  hope  to  find 
an  absolute  value  for  entropy  as  has  been  found  for 
energy?  I  do  not  think  that  the  question  can  be  an- 
swered on  the  basis  of  an  analogy  between  these  two 
cases.  When  such  suggestions  come  to  the  fore  I  am 
always  inclined  to  take  my  stand  with  the  purists,  who 
hold  that  it  is  senseless  to  try  to  arrive  at  the  values 
of  both  termini  from  the  value  of  the  difference.  If 
we  are  to  keep  our  outlook  clear  we  must  always  be 
very  careful  as  to  what  can  or  cannot  be  deduced  from 
a  definition.  In  this  regard  the  criterion  of  the  purists 
is  indispensable.  We  must  do  them  the  honor  of  saying 
that  they  are  the  conscientious  wardens  of  order  and 
purity  in  scientific  methods.  There  is  nothing  more 
seductively  dangerous  in  scientific  work  than  the  intro- 
duction of  extraneous  analogies  into  the  problem  at 
issue.  That  is  a  warning  which  needs  to  be  sounded 
to-day  even  more  insistently  than  before.  But  at  the 
same  time  we  must  bear  in  mind  the  fact  that  physics 
is  not  a  deductive  science,  and  that  its  body  of  first 
principles  is  by  no  means  fixed  and  unalterable.  If  a 
new  axiom  be  suggested  which  we  might  introduce, 
then  instead  of  rejecting  it  at  once  it  ought  to  be  put 
into  quarantine,  as  one  might  say,  and  examined  on 
its  own  merits  for  a  clean  bill  of  health.  That  clean 
bill  of  health  which  will  give  it  a  right  to  citizenship 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  187 

in  physical  science  must  be  drawn  up  entirely  free  from 
prejudice  as  to  the  alien  status  of  the  axiom.  The  claim 
of  the  axiom  must  be  adjudicated  on  the  grounds  of 
its  ability  to  serve  the  cause  of  science  in  some  direction 
where  service  is  needed,  and  where  the  native  axioms 
are  unable  to  discharge  such  service.  Once  the  new 
axiom  has  shown  that  it  can  solve  hitherto  insoluble 
problems,  or  at  least  produce  a  working  hypothesis  for 
their  explanations,  then  it  has  a  perfect  right  to  be 
admitted. 

Before  indicating  a  definite  line  along  which  the 
question  I  have  given  above  may  eventually  be  an- 
swered, I  will  call  attention  to  the  difference  between 
reversible  and  irreversible  processes,  as  from  this  we 
shall  understand  the  Boltzmann  hypothesis  which 
would  suggest  the  answer.  Suppose  we  take  a  piece 
of  iron  heated  to  a  very  high  temperature  and  plunge 
it  into  a  vessel  of  cold  water.  The  heat  of  the  iron 
will  pass  to  the  water  until  both  iron  and  water  are 
of  an  equal  temperature.  This  is  called  thermal  equi- 
librium, which  results  after  all  such  cases  of  disturbance 
if  there  be  nothing  to  prevent  the  conduction  of  the 
heat. 

Now  let  us  take  two  vertical  tubes  of  glass  which  are 
open  at  the  upper  ends  and  have  the  lower  ends  con- 
nected by  a  piece  of  rubber  tubing.  If  we  pour  some 
heavy  liquid  such  as  mercury  into  one  of  the  glass 
tubes  the  liquid  will  flow  through  the  rubber  into  the 
second  tube  and  rise  in  it  until  the  level  of  the  surfaces 
on  both  tubes  is  the  same.  Now  supposing  we  lift  one 


188        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

of  the  tubes  somewhat,  the  level  is  disturbed  5  but  the 
fluid  will  fall  back  immediately  when  we  replace  the 
tube  and  will  again  be  the  same  height  in  both.  Between 
this  instance  and  that  of  the  bar  of  iron  in  the  vessel 
of  water  there  is  a  certain  analogy.  In  each  case  a  certain 
difference  brings  about  a  change.  In  the  case  of  the  tube 
which  we  raise  a  little  higher  than  the  other  there  is  a 
change  of  level,  and  in  the  case  of  the  iron  and  water 
there  is  at  the  moment  of  immersion  a  difference  be- 
tween the  temperatures.  If  in  each  case  we  allow  the 
total  mass  to  rest  sufficiently  long  the  differences  will 
disappear  and  a  condition  of  equilibrium  will  result. 

As  a  matter  of  fact  the  analogy  between  these  two 
cases  is  only  apparent.  All  experiments  which  have 
been  made  warrant  us  in  definitely  asserting  that  the 
action  of  the  liquid  in  the  tubes  follows  a  dynamical 
law,  but  that  the  energy  of  temperature  follows  a 
statistical  law. 

To  understand  this  apparent  paradox  we  must  re- 
member that  the  sinking  of  the  heavy  liquid  is  a  neces- 
sary consequence  of  the  Principle  of  Conservation  of 
Energy.  For  if  the  liquid  at  a  higher  level  were  to  rise 
still  higher  irrespective  of  any  external  agency,  and  the 
liquid  of  the  lower  level  to  sink  still  lower,  energy 
would  be  created  out  of  nothing.  That  is  to  say,  new 
energy  would  appear  and  thus  be  entirely  contrary  to 
the  principle.  The  temperature  case  is  different.  Heat 
could  flow  in  the  reverse  process  from  cold  water  to  hot 
iron,  and  the  Principle  of  Conservation  of  Energy  still 
hold  good  3  because  heat  itself  is  a  form  of  energy,  and 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  189 

the  principle  only  demands  that  the  quantity  of  heat 
given  up  by  water  be  equal  to  that  absorbed  by  the  iron. 

Now  the  two  operations  show  the  following  different 
characteristics.  The  falling  liquid  moves  faster  the  fur- 
ther it  falls.  When  the  level  in  one  tube  corresponds 
to  the  level  in  the  other  the  liquid  does  not  come  to 
rest,  but  moves  beyond  the  equilibrium  point  on  account 
of  its  inertia,  so  that  the  liquid  originally  at  the  higher 
level  is  now  at  a  lower  level  than  that  rising  in  the 
corresponding  tube.  The  velocity  of  the  falling  liquid 
will  gradually  sink  to  zero  in  tube  No.  1  and  then  the 
reverse  process  sets  in,  that  is  to  say,  the  lowering  of  the 
level  in  tube  No.  2.  If  loss  of  kinetic  energy  at  the  air 
surface,  and  that  due  to  friction  at  the  walls  of  the  tube 
could  be  eliminated,  the  liquid  would  oscillate  upwards 
and  downwards  indefinitely  over  and  under  its  position 
of  equilibrium.  Such  a  process  is  called  reversible. 

Now  in  the  case  of  heat  the  condition  is  quite  other- 
wise. The  smaller  the  difference  of  temperature  between 
the  hot  iron  and  the  water  the  slower  is  the  transmission 
of  heat  from  the  one  to  the  other,  and  calculation  shows 
that  an  infinitely  long  time  passes  before  an  equal  tem- 
perature is  reached.  This  means  that  there  is  always 
some  difference  of  temperature  no  matter  how  much 
time  be  allowed  to  elapse.  There  is  no  oscillation  of 
heat  therefore  between  two  bodies.  The  flow  is  always 
in  one  direction  and  therefore  represents  an  irreversible 
process. 

This  difference  between  reversible  and  irreversible 
processes  is  fundamental  in  physical  science.  Reversible 


190        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

processes  include  gravitation,  mechanical  and  electrical 
oscillations,  sound  waves  and  electromagnetic  waves 
Irreversible  processes  are  found  in  the  conduction  of 
heat  and  electricity,  radiation  and  all  chemical  reactions 
in  so  far  as  the  velocity  is  ascertainable.  It  was  to  explain 
this  case  that  Clausius  formulated  his  second  law  of 
thermodynamics.  The  significance  of  the  law  is  that  it 
ascribes  direction  to  each  irreversible  process.  It  was  L. 
Boltzmann,  however,  who  introduced  the  atomic  theory 
here  and  thus  explained  the  meaning  of  the  second  law, 
and  at  the  same  time  of  all  irreversible  processes  which 
hitherto  had  presented  difficulties  that  could  not  be  ex- 
plained in  classical  dynamics. 

According  to  this  atomic  theory  the  thermal  energy 
of  a  body  is  the  sum-total  of  a  small,  rapid,  and  un- 
regulated movement  of  its  molecules.  The  temperature 
corresponds  to  the  medium  kinetic  energy  of  the  mole- 
cules, and  the  transfer  of  heat  from  a  hotter  to  a  colder 
body  depends  upon  the  fact  that  the  kinetic  energies  of 
the  molecules  are  averaged  because  of  their  frequent 
collision  with  one  another.  It  must  not  be  supposed,  how- 
ever, that  when  two  individual  molecules  strike  together 
the  one  with  the  greater  kinetic  energy  is  slowed  down 
and  the  other  accelerated,  for  if — to  take  an  example — 
a  rapidly  moving  molecule  of  one  system  is  struck 
obliquely  by  a  slower  moving  molecule  its  velocity  is 
increased  while  that  of  the  slower  moving  molecule 
is  still  further  diminished.  But,  taken  on  the  whole, 
unless  the  circumstances  are  quite  exceptional  the  kinetic 
energies  must  mix  to  a  certain  amount,  and  this  mixing 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  191 

is  what  appears  as  an  equalizing  of  the  temperature  of 
the  two  bodies. 

Boltzmann,  however,  did  not  press  his  hypothesis  very 
strongly  before  the  notice  of  scientists  and  there  was 
great  hesitancy  about  accepting  it,  but  nowadays  it  is 
fully  accepted.  It  is  now  generally  agreed  that  heat 
movement  of  molecules  and  conduction  of  heat,  like 
all  other  irreversible  phenomena,  does  not  obey  dy- 
namical laws  but  statistical  laws.  The  latter  are  the  laws 
of  probability. 

Now  in  the  case  under  consideration  it  is  not  at  all 
difficult  to  say  what  the  idea  is  that  lies  behind  the 
assumption  of  an  absolute  value  for  entropy.  And  if 
a  new  axiom  can  serve  that  idea  we  ought  to  admit  it. 
As  to  the  idea  of  absolute  value  for  entropy,  if  we 
follow  Boltzmann  and  consider  entropy  as  a  measure 
for  thermodynamic  probability,  then  when  a  physical 
state  such  as  a  volume  of  gas,  with  various  degrees  of 
freedom  and  endowed  with  a  definite  energy,  has 
reached  a  condition  of  thermodynamic  equilibrium,  the 
entropy  in  such  a  case  will  be  nothing  more  than 
the  number  of  the  multiform  states  which  such  a  system 
can  assume  under  given  conditions.  And  if  the  entropy 
thus  considered  possesses  an  absolute  value  this  means 
that  the  number  of  possible  states  under  the  given  con- 
ditions is  quite  definite  and  finite. 

At  the  time  of  Clausius  and  Helmholtz  and  Boltz- 
mann such  an  assertion  would  have  been  considered 
entirely  out  of  the  question.  The  differential  equations 
of  classical  dynamics  were  then  looked  upon  as  the  sole 


192        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

fundamentals  of  physical  science.  Therefore  it  was 
necessary  to  consider  physical  states  as  continuous,  and 
all  possibilities  of  change  as  infinite  in  their  measurable 
quantities.  Since  the  introduction  of  the  quantum  hy- 
pothesis the  state  of  affairs  is  different,  and  I  feel  that 
we  have  not  long  to  wait  before  it  will  be  possible  to  speak 
in  quite  a  different  way  of  a  definite  number  of  possible 
states  and  of  absolute  measures  of  entropy  correspond- 
ing to  them,  without  thereby  running  up  too  violently 
against  the  accepted  physical  notions  of  the  time.  Indeed 
the  new  quantum  axiom  has  already  produced  results 
that  can  favorably  compare  with  the  most  fruitful 
theories  of  the  past.  In  the  case  of  radiant  heat  it  has 
led  to  the  formulation  of  laws  of  energy  which  explain 
the  normal  spectrum.  In  the  laws  of  thermodynamics 
it  has  found  its  expression  in  the  theory  established 
by  W.  Nernst,  which  has  been  corroborated  on  many 
sides  5  and  the  basis  of  the  quantum  hypothesis  has  been 
so  far  expanded  that  from  it  we  can  deduce  not  only 
the  existence  but  also  the  numerical  values  of  the  so- 
called  chemical  constants.  In  regard  to  the  constitution 
of  the  atom  the  ideas  of  Niels  Bohr  have  been  the 
starting-point  for  the  establishment  of  the  so-called 
stationary  electronic  orbits,  and  thus  the  ground  was 
prepared  for  solving  the  riddle  of  the  spectroscopic 
phenomena.  Indeed,  unless  all  signs  be  misleading,  a 
process  seems  to  be  developing  which  may  be  called 
the  reduction  of  all  physical  theories  to  arithmetical 
terms,  because  a  large  number  of  physical  dimensions 
which  hitherto  had  been  looked  upon  as  continuous 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  193 

have  been  shown  under  the  microscopic  examination  of 
a  sharper  analysis  to  be  discontinuous  and  numerable. 
Along  these  lines  the  measurements  which  have  been 
arrived  at  by  L.  S.  Ornstein,  the  head  of  the  Physical 
Institute  at  Utrecht,  are  indicative.  These  measurements 
show  that  the  ratio  of  intensity  of  the  components  of 
spectral  multiplets  can  be  given  in  simple  integral  num- 
bers. And  Max  Born's  interesting  attempt  to  supplant 
the  differential  calculus  of  physical  mechanics  by  equa- 
tions of  finite  differences  points  in  the  same  direction. 

The  outstanding  cases  that  I  have  here  chosen  point 
to  a  definite  Drang  or  fundamental  urge  which  seems  to 
characterize  the  advance  of  physical  science.  In  these 
cases  the  movement  has  undoubtedly  been  from  the 
relative  to  the  absolute.  Now  comes  the  question:  How 
far  can  we  say  that  this  advance  is  definitely  character- 
istic of  the  progress  of  physical  science  as  a  whole?  It 
would  be  saying  too  much,  perhaps,  if  I  were  to  answer 
the  question  by  an  unqualified  affirmative.  Indeed  I  can 
easily  imagine  that  some  of  my  readers  may  be  of  the 
opposite  view,  and  may  already  be  thinking  in  their  own 
minds  that  this  chapter  could  be  written  in  the  reverse 
direction  and  called  "From  the  Absolute  to  the  Rela- 
tive." They  certainly  would  find  material  at  hand  which 
at  least  on  the  surface  offers  tempting  ground  to  stand 
upon.  It  might,  for  instance,  be  urged  that  the  concept 
of  atomic  weight  could  be  taken  as  pointing  in  a  direc- 
tion contrary  to  that  which  I  have  suggested.  My  im- 
aginary opponent  might  say  that  the  numeral  which  I 
have  indicated  as  representing  the  absolute  weight  of  an 


194        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

atom  is  by  no  means  absolute.  In  view  of  the  fact  that 
an  element  generally  possesses  several  isotopes  with  a 
different  atomic  weight,  the  measured  atomic  weight 
presents  a  more  or  less  contingent  addition  which  is  a 
sort  of  average  value,  that  is  quite  dependent  on  the 
ratio  of  the  various  isotopes  in  the  compound  under 
analysis.  Even  if  we  were  to  take  only  one  single  isotope 
into  consideration,  from  the  standpoint  of  our  present 
knowledge  it  would  be  quite  unscientific  to  consider 
this  as  something  absolute.  The  most  modern  opinion, 
which  is  backed  up  by  the  Rutherford  experiment  of 
bombarding  the  nucleus  of  the  atom,  would  seem  to 
be  in  the  direction  of  reviving  Prout's  hypothesis  and 
referring  the  constitution  of  all  chemical  elements  to 
the  basic  atom  of  hydrogen.  Therewith  the  concept  of 
atomic  weight  would  fundamentally  be  a  relative  num- 
ber. Having  thus  gained  what  at  least  appears  to  be  a 
signal  victory  in  this  one  instance,  my  opponent  might 
play  his  trump  card  and  throw  the  Einstein  General 
Theory  of  Relativity  on  the  table.  He  might  very  well 
urge  that  to  talk  of  the  concepts  of  space  and  time  as 
something  absolute  belongs  to  the  past  and  signifies 
retrogression  rather  than  progress.  In  other  words,  one 
of  the  most  signal  advances  in  modern  physics  is 
stamped  with  the  idea  of  the  relative  rather  than  the 
absolute. 

The  first  and  most  obvious  reply  to  such  a  criticism 
is  to  call  attention  to  the  danger  of  applying  scientific 
terms  to  facts  and  meanings  for  which  they  were  never 
intended.  I  have  already  shown  how  the  theory  of 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  195 

relativity  has  actually  led  to  the  discovery  of  an  absolute 
measure  by  which  the  energy  of  a  body  at  rest 
may  be  formulated.  Therefore  it  is  clear  that  the  term, 
Relativity ,  does  not  refer  to  physics  as  a  whole  and 
must  not  be  taken  out  of  its  special  scientific  context. 
It  would  be  quite  superficial  to  take  the  relativity  of 
time  and  space,  and  halt  firmly  within  the  confines  of 
that  concept  without  asking  whither  it  leads.  As  a  matter 
of  fact  the  concept  of  relativity  is  based  on  a  more 
fundamental  absolute  than  the  erroneously  assumed 
absolute  which  it  has  supplanted.  Over  and  over  again 
in  the  history  of  science  it  has  happened  that  concepts 
which  at  one  time  were  looked  upon  as  absolute  were 
subsequently  shown  to  be  only  of  relative  value  j  and 
this  is  exactly  what  has  happened  in  regard  to  the 
former  concept  of  space  and  time.  But  when  an  absolute 
concept  is  thus  relativized,  this  does  not  mean  that  the 
quest  of  the  absolute  becomes  eliminated  from  scientific 
progress.  It  rather  means  that  a  more  fundamental  con- 
cept takes  its  place  and  a  more  fundamental  advance  is 
thus  achieved.  If  we  admit  the  concept  of  relativity  at 
all  we  must  admit  the  acceptance  of  an  absolute,  because 
it  is  out  of  this  that  the  relative  concept  as  such  arises. 
Supposing,  for  instance,  a  scientific  researcher  worked 
for  years  and  years  on  the  problem  of  discovering  the 
cause  of  some  special  event  in  nature  and  found  all  his 
efforts  baffled,  would  he  thereby  be  justified  in  declaring 
that  the  event  has  no  cause  at  all?  The  fact  is  that  we 
cannot  relativize  everything  any  more  than  we  can  de- 
fine and  explain  everything.  There  are  fundamentals 


196        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

that  cannot  be  defined  or  explained,  because  they  form 
the  bedrock  of  all  our  knowledge.  Every  definition  must 
necessarily  rest  on  some  concept  which  does  not  call  for 
definition  at  all.  And  it  is  the  same  with  every  form  of 
proof.  We  cannot  define  a  thing  except  in  terms  that  are 
already  known  and  accepted,  and  we  cannot  prove  any- 
thing except  from  something  that  is  already  admitted. 
If  we  wish  to  establish  a  truth  by  the  inductive  method 
it  must  be  on  the  basis  of  accepted  facts.  And  if  we 
wish  to  establish  a  truth  by  the  process  of  deductive 
reasoning  the  principle  from  which  the  deduction  pro- 
ceeds must  be  accepted  as  absolute.  Therefore  the 
relativist  concept  must  necessarily  have  the  concept  of 
the  absolute  as  its  foundation.  If  we  once  remove  the 
absolute,  then  the  whole  relativist  theory  will  fall  to  the 
ground,  just  as  an  overcoat  would  fall  if  the  peg  on 
which  it  hangs  should  disappear.  These  considerations 
are  quite  sufficient,  I  think,  to  suggest  the  reply  which 
might  be  given  to  the  counter  argument  of  my  im- 
aginary disputant. 

If  eventually  it  should  turn  out  possible  to  refer  the 
atomic  weights  of  all  elements  to  the  atomic  weight  of 
hydrogen,  then  we  should  have  achieved  one  of  the 
most  fundamental  results  in  the  history  of  the  scientific 
investigation  of  matter.  The  significance  of  it  would 
be  that  in  the  light  of  this  explanation  matter  could 
be  proved  to  have  one  simple  origin.  Then  the  two 
factors  of  the  hydrogen  atom,  namely,  the  positively 
charged  hydrogen  nucleus  (the  so-called  proton)  and 
the  negatively  charged  electron,  together  with  the  ele- 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  197 

mental  quantum  of  action,  would  represent  the  founda- 
tion-stones on  which  the  structure  of  the  physical  world 
is  built.  Now  these  quantities  should  be  considered  as 
absolute  as  long  as  they  do  not  depend  upon  one  another 
or  something  outside  of  them.  There  we  should  have 
the  absolute  once  again,  only  at  a  higher  level  and  in  a 
simpler  form.  If  we  like  to  unroll  the  thread  of  this 
thought  a  little  further,  we  might  ask,  what  is  the 
foundation  on  which  the  great  relativist  theory  is  built? 
Einstein  explained  that  our  concepts  of  space  and  time, 
which  were  recognized  by  Newton  and  Kant  as  absolute 
forms  of  all  knowledge,  really  possessed  only  a  relative 
significance,  inasmuch  as  they  depended  on  an  arbitrary 
selection  of  the  reference  system  and  the  means  of 
measurement.  It  is  a  familiar  fact  that  we  cannot  ob- 
serve the  motion  of  any  body  without  reference  to  some 
other  body.  It  was  to  meet  this  difficulty  that  Newton 
adopted  the  hypothesis  of  absolute  space.  The  "fixed" 
stars  were  used  to  define  absolute  space.  The  stars, 
however,  are  not  fixed  even  relatively  to  one  another. 
Therefore  the  concept  of  absolute  space  and  the  refer- 
ence points  according  to  which  it  was  "fixed"  were  quite 
arbitrary.  This  explanation  goes  perhaps  to  the  deepest 
root  of  our  scientific  thought.  If  from  space  and  time  we 
should  take  away  the  concept  of  the  absolute,  this  does 
not  mean  that  the  absolute  is  thereby  banished  out  of 
existence,  but  rather  that  it  is  referred  back  to  something 
more  fundamental.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this  more 
fundamental  thing  is  the  four-dimensional  manifold 
which  is  constituted  by  the  welding  together  of  time 


198        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

and  space  into  a  single  continuum.  Here  the  standard 
of  reference  and  measurement  is  independent  of 
arbitrary  choice  and  is  absolute. 

It  only  takes  a  little  reflection  to  realize  the  fact  that 
the  much  misunderstood  relativity  theory  by  no  means 
gets  rid  of  the  absolute  but,  on  the  contrary,  that  it  has 
brought  out  the  absolute  into  sharper  definition,  inas- 
much as  it  points  out  how,  and  how  far,  physical  science 
is  based  on  the  existence  of  an  absolute  in  the  outer 
world.  If  we  should  say,  as  several  epistemologists  do, 
that  the  absolute  is  to  be  found  only  in  the  individual's 
sensory  data  of  perception,  then  there  ought  to  be  as 
many  kinds  of  physical  science  as  there  are  physicists, 
and  we  should  be  utterly  unable  to  explain  how  it  is 
that  up  to  now  each  discoverer  in  physical  science  has 
been  standing  on  the  shoulders  of  his  predecessors,  as  it 
were,  and  has  taken  their  findings  as  the  basis  of  his 
work.  Indeed  it  is  exclusively  on  the  basis  of  cooperative 
labor  and  the  acceptance  by  others  of  the  findings  of  the 
various  individual  researchers,  that  we  can  explain  the 
structure  of  physical  science  as  we  have  it  to-day.  That 
we  do  not  construct  the  external  world  to  suit  our  own 
ends  in  the  pursuit  of  science,  but  that  vice  versa  the 
external  world  forces  itself  upon  our  recognition  with 
its  own  elemental  power,  is  a  point  which  ought  to  be 
categorically  asserted  again  and  again  in  these  positivistic 
times.  From  the  fact  that  in  studying  the  happenings  of 
nature  we  strive  to  eliminate  the  contingent  and  acci- 
dental and  to  come  finally  to  what  is  essential  and 
necessary,  it  is  clear  that  we  always  look  for  the  basic 


FROM  RELATIVE  TO  ABSOLUTE  199 

thing  behind  the  dependent  thing,  for  what  is  absolute 
behind  what  is  relative,  for  the  reality  behind  the 
appearance  and  for  what  abides  behind  what  is  transi- 
tory. In  my  opinion,  this  is  characteristic  not  only  of 
physical  science  but  of  all  science.  Further,  it  is  not 
merely  a  characteristic  of  all  kinds  of  human  endeavor 
to  attain  to  the  knowledge  of  any  subject,  but  it  is  also 
characteristic  of  those  branches  of  human  effort  that 
strive  to  formulate  ideas  of  the  good  and  the  beautiful. 

Here  I  am  going  wide  of  my  purpose ;  for  the  plan 
I  had  in  mind  at  the  beginning  of  this  essay  was  not 
to  make  assertions  and  then  prove  them,  but  rather 
to  call  attention  to  certain  actual  changes  which  have 
taken  place  in  the  course  of  scientific  development  and 
allow  the  bare  presentation  of  facts  to  leave  its  own 
impression  on  the  mind  of  the  reader. 

Before  closing  I  should  like  to  raise  the  most  difficult 
question  of  all.  It  is  this:  How  can  we  say  that  a  scientific 
concept,  to  which  we  now  ascribe  an  absolute  character, 
may  not  at  some  future  date  show  itself  to  have  only  a 
certain  relative  significance  and  to  point  to  a  further 
absolute?  To  that  question  only  one  answer  can  be  given. 
After  all  I  have  said,  and  in  view  of  the  experiences 
through  which  scientific  progress  has  passed,  we  must 
admit  that  in  no  case  can  we  rest  assured  that  what  is 
absolute  in  science  to-day  will  remain  absolute  for  all 
time.  Not  only  that,  but  we  must  admit  as  certain  the 
truth  that  the  absolute  can  never  finally  be  grasped  by 
the  researcher.  The  absolute  represents  an  ideal  goal 
which  is  always  ahead  of  us  and  which  we  can  never 


200        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

reach.  This  may  be  a  depressing  thought  -y  but  we  must 
bear  with  it.  We  are  in  a  position  similar  to  that  of  a 
mountaineer  who  is  wandering  over  uncharted  spaces, 
and  never  knows  whether  behind  the  peak  which  he  sees 
in  front  of  him  and  which  he  tries  to  scale  there  may 
not  be  another  peak  still  beyond  and  higher  up.  Yet 
it  is  the  same  with  us  as  it  is  with  him.  The  value  of  the 
journey  is  not  in  the  journey's  end  but  in  the  journey 
itself.  That  is  to  say,  in  the  striving  to  reach  the  goal 
that  we  are  always  yearning  for,  and  drawing  courage 
from  the  fact  that  we  are  always  coming  nearer  to  it. 
To  bring  the  approach  closer  and  closer  to  truth  is  the 
aim  and  effort  of  all  science. 

Here  we  can  apply  the  saying  of  Gotthold  Ephraim 
Lessing:  "Not  the  possession  of  truth  but  the  effort  in 
struggling  to  attain  to  it  brings  joy  to  the  researcher." 
We  cannot  rest  and  sit  down  lest  we  rust  and  decay. 
Health  is  maintained  only  through  work.  And  as  it 
is  with  all  life  so  it  is  with  science.  We  are  always 
struggling  from  the  relative  to  the  absolute. 


EPILOGUE 
A  SOCRATIC  DIALOGUE 

Interlocutors:    PLANCK  EINSTEIN  MURPHY 


Note: — The  following  is  an  abridgment  of  stenographic  re  forts 
made  by  an  attendant  secretary  during  various  conversations 

murphy:  I  have  been  collaborating  with  our  friend, 
Planck,  on  a  book  which  deals  principally  with  the 
problem  of  causation  and  the  freedom  of  the 
human  will. 

einstein:  Honestly  I  cannot  understand  what  people 
mean  when  they  talk  about  the  freedom  of  the 
human  will.  I  have  a  feeling,  for  instance,  that 
I  will  something  or  other ;  but  what  relation  this 
has  with  freedom  I  cannot  understand  at  all.  I 
feel  that  I  will  to  light  my  pipe  and  I  do  it;  but 
how  can  I  connect  this  up  with  the  idea  of  free- 
dom? What  is  behind  the  act  of  willing  to  light 
the  pipe?  Another  act  of  willing?  Schopenhauer 
once  said:  Der  Mensch  kann  was  er  will;  er  kann 
aber  nicht  wollen  was  er  will  (Man  can  do  what  he 
wills  but  he  cannot  will  what  he  wills). 

murphy:  But  it  is  now  the  fashion  in  physical  science 
to  attribute  something  like  free  will  even  to  the 
routine  processes  of  inorganic  nature. 

einstein:  That  nonsense  is  not  merely  nonsense.  It  is 
objectionable  nonsense. 

201 


202        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

murphy:  Well,  of  course,  the  scientists  give  it  the  name 
of  indeterminism. 

einstein:  Look  here.  Indeterminism  is  quite  an  illogical 
concept.  What  do  they  mean  by  indeterminism? 
Now  if  I  say  that  the  average  life-span  of  a  radio- 
active atom  is  such  and  such,  that  is  a  statement 
which  expresses  a  certain  order,  Gesetzlichkeit,  But 
this  idea  does  not  of  itself  involve  the  idea  of 
causation.  We  call  it  the  law  of  averages  j  but  not 
every  such  law  need  have  a  causal  significance.  At 
the  same  time  if  I  say  that  the  average  life-span 
of  such  an  atom  is  indetermined  in  the  sense  of 
being  not  caused,  then  I  am  talking  nonsense.  I 
can  say  that  I  shall  meet  you  to-morrow  at  some 
indetermined  time.  But  this  does  not  mean  that 
time  is  not  determined.  Whether  I  come  or  not 
the  time  will  come.  Here  there  is  question  of 
confounding  the  subjective  with  the  objective 
world.  The  indeterminism  which  belongs  to  quan- 
tum physics  is  a  subjective  indeterminism.  It  must 
be  related  to  something,  else  indeterminism  has  no 
meaning,  and  here  it  is  related  to  our  own  inability 
to  follow  the  course  of  individual  atoms  and  fore- 
cast their  activities.  To  say  that  the  arrival  of  a 
train  in  Berlin  is  indetermined  is  to  talk  nonsense 
unless  you  say  in  regard  to  what  it  is  indetermined. 
If  it  arrives  at  all  it  is  determined  by  something. 
And  the  same  is  true  of  the  course  of  atoms.  , 

murphy:  In  what  sense  then  do  you  apply  determinism 
to  nature?  In  the  sense  that  every  event  in  nature 


EPILOGUE  203 

proceeds  from  another  event  which  we  call  the 
cause? 

Einstein:  I  should  hardly  put  it  that  way.  In  the  first 
place,  I  think  that  much  of  the  misunderstanding 
encountered  in  all  this  question  of  causation  is  due 
to  the  rather  rudimentary  formulation  of  the 
causal  principle  which  has  been  in  vogue  until 
now.  When  Aristotle  and  the  scholastics  defined 
what  they  meant  by  a  cause,  the  idea  of  objective 
experiment  in  the  scientific  sense  had  not  yet 
arisen.  Therefore  they  were  content  with  defining 
the  metaphysical  concept  of  cause.  And  the  same 
is  true  of  Kant.  Newton  himself  seems  to  have 
realized  that  this  pre-scientific  formulation  of  the 
causal  principle  would  prove  insufficient  for 
modern  physics.  And  Newton  was  content  to 
describe  the  regular  order  in  which  events  happen 
in  nature  and  to  construct  his  synthesis  on  the 
basis  of  mathematical  laws.  Now  I  believe  that 
events  in  nature  are  controlled  by  a  much  stricter 
and  more  closely  binding  law  than  we  suspect 
to-day,  when  we  speak  of  one  event  being  the 
cause  of  another.  Our  concept  here  is  confined  to 
one  happening  within  one  time-section.  It  is 
dissected  from  the  whole  process.  Our  present 
rough  way  of  applying  the  causal  principle  is 
quite  superficial.  We  are  like  a  child  who  judges 
a  poem  by  the  rhyme  and  knows  nothing  of  the 
rhythmic  pattern.  Or  we  are  like  a  juvenile 
learner  at  the  piano,  just  relating  one  note  to  that 


204        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

which  immediately  precedes  or  follows.  To  an 
extent  this  may  be  very  well  when  one  is  dealing 
with  very  simple  and  primitive  compositions  j  but 
it  will  not  do  for  the  interpretation  of  a  Bach 
Fugue.  Quantum  physics  has  presented  us  with 
very  complex  processes  and  to  meet  them  we 
must  further  enlarge  and  refine  our  concept  of 
causality. 

murphy:  You'll  have  a  hard  job  of  it,  because  you'll 
be  going  out  of  fashion.  If  you  will  permit  me  to 
make  a  little  speech  I  shall  do  so,  not  so  much 
because  I  like  to  listen  to  my  own  talk,  though 
of  course  I  do — what  Irishman  doesn't? — but 
rather  because  I  should  like  to  have  your  reactions 
to  it. 

Einstein:  Gewiss. 

murphy:  The  Greeks  made  the  workings  of  fate  or 
destiny  the  basis  of  their  drama ;  and  drama  in 
those  days  was  a  liturgical  expression  of  the  pro- 
found irrationally  perceiving  consciousness.  It  was 
not  merely  a  discussion,  like  a  Shavian  play.  You 
remember  the  tragedy  of  Atreus,  where  fate,  or 
the  ineluctable  sequence  of  cause  and  effect,  is  the 
sole  simple  thread  on  which  the  drama  hangs. 

einstein:  Fate,  or  destiny,  and  the  principle  of  causa- 
tion are  not  the  same  thing. 

murphy:  I  know  that.  But  scientists  live  in  the  world 
just  like  other  people.  Some  of  them  go  to  political 
meetings  and  the  theater  and  mostly  all  that  I 
know,  at  least  here  in  Germany,  are  readers  of 


EPILOGUE  205 

current  literature.  They  cannot  escape  the  influ- 
ence of  the  milieu  in  which  they  live.  And  that 
milieu  at  the  present  time  is  characterized  largely 
by  a  struggle  to  get  rid  of  the  causal  chain  in 
which  the  world  has  entangled  itself. 

einstein:  But  isn't  mankind  always  struggling  to  get 
rid  of  that  causal  chain? 

murphy:  Yes,  but  that  is  not  to  the  point  just  at  the 
moment.  Anyhow  I  doubt  if  the  politician  ever 
contemplates  the  consequences  of  the  causal  se- 
quence he  sets  afoot  by  his  foolishness.  He  is  too 
nimble  himself  and  can  slip  out  through  the  links. 
Macbeth  was  not  a  politician.  And  that  is  where 
he  failed.  He  realized  that  the  assassination  could 
not  trammel  up  the  consequence.  But  he  did  not 
think  of  how  to  escape  from  the  sequential  shackles 
until  it  was  too  late.  And  this  is  because  he  was 
not  a  politician.  My  point  here  is  that  there  is  a 
universal  recognition  at  the  moment  of  this  in- 
exorable sequence.  People  are  realizing  what  Ber- 
nard Shaw  told  them  long  ago — which  of  course 
had  been  told  on  innumerable  occasions  previously 
— when  he  wrote  Caesar  and  Cleofatra.  You  re- 
member Caesar's  speech  to  the  Queen  of  Egypt 
after  her  orders  to  slay  Photinus  had  been  carried 
out,  though  Caesar  had  guaranteed  his  safety. 

"Do  you  hear?"  says  Caesar.  "Those  knockers 
at  your  gate  are  also  believers  in  vengeance  and 
in  stabbing.  You  have  slain  their  leader  j  it  is 
right  that  they  shall  slay  you.  If  you  doubt  it,  ask 


206        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

your  four  councillors  here.  And  then  in  the  name 
of  right  shall  I  not  slay  them  for  murdering  their 
Queen,  and  be  slain  in  my  turn  by  their  country- 
men as  the  invader  of  their  Fatherland?  Can  Rome 
do  less  than  slay  these  slayers  too,  to  show  the 
world  how  Rome  avenges  her  sons  and  her  honor? 
And  so,  to  the  end  of  history,  murder  shall  breed 
murder,  always  in  the  name  of  right  and  honor 
and  peace,  until  the  gods  are  tired  of  blood  and 
[create  a  race  that  shall  understand." 


People  realize  this  terrible  truth  nowadays,  not 
indeed  because  they  see  that  blood  will  have  blood 
but  because  they  see  that  in  robbing  your  neighbor 
you  rob  yourself ;  for  robbery  will  have  robbery 
just  as  blood  will  have  blood.  The  so-called  victors 
in  the  world  war  robbed  the  vanquished  and  they 
now  know  that  in  doing  so  they  robbed  themselves. 
So  now  we  have  a  condition  of  all-round  misery. 
People  at  large  see  that  5  but  they  haven't  the 
courage  to  face  it  and  they  race,  like  Macbeth,  to 
the  witches'  cauldron.  In  this  case  unfortunately 
science  is  one  of  the  ingredients  thrown  into  the 
cauldron  to  give  them  the  solvent  they  are  looking 
for.  Instead  of  boldly  admitting  the  mess,  the 
tragedy,  the  crime,  everybody  wants  to  try  to  prove 
himself  innocent,  and  looks  for  the  proof  by  try- 
ing to  find  an  alibi  for  the  consequences  of  his 
own  deeds.  Look  at  that  string  of  hungry  people 
coming  to  your  door  every  day  for  bread.  Able- 
bodied  fellows  who  want  to  exercise  man's  privi- 


EPILOGUE  207 

lege,  which  is  to  work.  You  have  them  also 
parading  the  streets  of  London,  with  their  Dis- 
tinguished Conduct  Medals  on  their  breasts, 
shouting  for  bread.  And  you  have  the  same  in 
New  York  and  Chicago  and  Rome  and  Turin. 
The  comfortable  person  who  sits  in  his  easy  chair 
says  to  himself  "This  has  nothing  to  do  with  us." 
And  he  says  that  because  he  knows  it  has.  Then  he 
takes  up  his  popular  writers  of  physics  and  gives 
a  sigh  of  contentment  when  he  is  told  that  nature 
knows  no  such  thing  as  the  law  of  consequences. 
What  more  do  you  want?  Here  is  Science?  and 
Science  is  the  modern  counterpart  of  religion.  It  is 
your  comfortable  bourgeois  who  has  endowed 
scientific  institutions  and  laboratories.  And,  say 
what  you  will,  scientists  would  not  be  human  if 
they  did  not,  at  least  unconsciously,  share  in  the 
same  spirit. 

Einstein:  Ach  das  kann  man  nicht  sagen. 

murphy:  Yes.  That  can  man  very  well  say.  You  re- 
member your  own  picture  of  the  self-seekers  in 
the  temple  of  science,  whom  you  admit  have  built 
even  a  great  portion  of  the  structure,  while  you 
acknowledge  that  only  a  few  have  found  favor 
with  the  angel  of  God.  I  am  inclined  to  think  that 
the  struggle  of  science  at  the  present  moment  is 
the  effort  to  keep  its  thought-scheme  clear  of  the 
confusion  which  the  popular  spirit  would  bring 
into  it.  It  is  much  the  same  struggle  as  the  old 
theologians  had.  At  the  Renaissance,  however,  they 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

succumbed  to  the  fashion  of  the  time  and  intro- 
duced foreign  ideas  and  methods  into  their  science, 
which  finally  resulted  in  the  scholastic  break-up. 

The  decline  of  scholasticism  dates  from  the 
time  when  the  mob  started  running  after  the 
philosophers  and  theologians.  Remember  how  they 
rushed  helter-skelter  to  hear  Abelard  in  Paris, 
though  it  is  obvious  that  they  could  not  understand 
his  distinctions.  Public  flattery  was  more  the  cause 
of  his  downfall  than  any  merely  private  influences. 
He  would  not  have  been  human  if  he  had  not  been 
tempted  to  think  himself  above  his  science,  and  he 
succumbed  to  the  temptation.  I  am  not  so  sure  that 
many  scientists  are  not  in  his  place  to-day.  Some 
of  the  glistening  webs  of  fancy  that  they  weave 
seem  very  much  akin  to  the  sophistic  distinctions 
of  the  scholastic  decadence. 

The  older  philosophers  and  theologians  were 
aware  of  this  danger  and  they  contrived  to  offset 
it.  They  had  their  esoteric  bodies  of  doctrine 
which  were  disclosed  only  to  the  initiated.  We 
have  the  same  sort  of  protection  evidenced  in 
other  branches  of  culture  to-day.  The  Catholic 
Church  has  widely  maintained  its  ritual  and 
dogmas  within  the  forms  and  formulations  of  a 
language  which  the  populace  does  not  understand. 
The  sociologists  and  financial  experts  have  a 
jargon  that  is  all  their  own  and  it  saves  them 
from  being  found  out.  The  majesty  of  the  law  is 
upheld  in  like  manner  and  the  medical  craft  could 


EPILOGUE  209 

not  survive  if  it  prescribed  its  medicines  and  de- 
scribed its  diseases  in  the  vernacular.  But  all  these 
do  not  matter  because  none  of  all  these  sciences 
or  arts  or  crafts  is  vital.  Physical  science  is  or- 
ganically vital  at  the  moment  and  for  that  reason 
it  seems  to  be  suffering  from  

einstein:  But  I  can  think  of  nothing  more  objection- 
able than  the  idea  of  science  for  the  scientists. 
It  is  almost  as  bad  as  art  for  the  artists  and 
religion  for  the  priests.  There  is  certainly  some- 
thing in  what  you  say.  And  I  believe  that  the 
present  fashion  of  applying  the  axioms  of  physical 
science  to  human  life  is  not  only  entirely  a  mis- 
take but  has  also  something  reprehensible  in  it. 
I  find  that  the  problem  of  causality  which  is 
to-day  under  discussion  in  physics  is  not  a  new 
phenomenon  in  the  field  of  science.  The  method 
which  is  being  used  in  quantum  physics  has 
already  had  to  be  applied  in  biology,  because  the 
biological  processes  in  nature  could  not  in  them- 
selves be  traced  so  that  their  connection  would 
be  clear,  and  for  that  reason  biological  rules  have 
always  been  of  a  statistical  character.  And  I  do 
not  understand  why  so  much  pother  ought  to  be 
made  if  the  principle  of  causation  should  undergo 
a  restriction  in  modern  physics,  for  this  is  not  a 
new  situation  at  all. 

murphy:  Of  course  it  has  not  brought  about  any  new 
situation  5  but  biological  science  is  not  vital  in  the 
way  that  physical  science  is  vital  at  the  moment. 


2io        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

People  are  no  longer  very  much  interested  whether 
we  were  descended  from  monkeys  or  not,  except 
certain  animal  enthusiasts  who  think  the  idea  rather 
rough  on  the  monkey.  And  there  is  not  that  public 
interest  in  biology  such  as  there  was  in  the  time  of 
Darwin  and  Huxley.  The  center  of  gravity  of  the 
public  interest  has  shifted  to  physics.  That  is  why 
the  public  reacts  in  its  own  way  to  any  new  for- 
mulation in  physics. 

Einstein:  I  am  entirely  in  agreement  with  our  friend 
Planck  in  regard  to  the  stand  which  he  has  taken 
on  this  principle,  but  you  must  remember  what 
Planck  has  said  and  written.  He  admits  the  im- 
possibility of  applying  the  causal  principle  to  the 
inner  processes  of  atomic  physics  under  the  present 
state  of  affairs;  but  he  has  set  himself  definitely 
against  the  thesis  that  from  this  Unbrauchbarkeit 
or  inapplicability  we  are  to  conclude  that  the 
process  of  causation  does  not  exist  in  external 
reality.  Planck  has  really  not  taken  up  any  definite 
standpoint  here.  He  has  only  contradicted  the  em- 
phatic assertions  of  some  quantum  theorists  and  I 
agree  fully  with  him.  And  when  you  mention 
people  who  speak  of  such  a  thing  as  free  will  in 
nature  it  is  difficult  for  me  to  find  a  suitable  reply. 
The  idea  is  of  course  preposterous. 

murphy:  You  would  agree  then,  I  imagine,  that  physics 
gives  no  ground  whatsoever  for  this  extraordinary 
application  of  what  we  may  for  convenience's  sake 
call  Heisenberg^  principle  of  indeterminacy. 


EPILOGUE 


211 


einstein:  Of  course  I  agree. 

murphy:  But  then  you  know  that  certain  English  phy- 
sicists of  very  high  standing  indeed  and  at  the 
same  time  very  popular  have  promulgated  with 
emphasis  what  you  and  Planck  call,  and  many 
others  with  you,  unwarranted  conclusions. 

einstein:  You  must  distinguish  between  the  physicist 
and  the  litterateur  when  both  professions  are  com- 
bined into  one.  In  England  you  have  a  great 
English  literature  and  a  great  discipline  of  style. 
What  I  mean  is  that  there  are  scientific  writers  in 
England  who  are  illogical  and  romantic  in  their 
popular  books,  but  in  their  scientific  work  they  are 
acute  logical  reasoners. 

What  the  scientist  aims  at  is  to  secure  a  logically 
consistent  transcript  of  nature.  Logic  is  for  him 
what  the  laws  of  proportion  and  perspective  are  to 
the  painter,  and  I  believe  with  Henri  Poincare 
that  science  is  worth  pursuing  because  it  reveals  the 
beauty  of  nature.  And  here  I  will  say  that  the 
scientist  finds  his  reward  in  what  Henri  Poincare 
calls  the  joy  of  comprehension,  and  not  in  the 
possibilities  of  application  to  which  any  discovery 
of  his  may  lead.  The  scientist,  I  think,  is  content 
to  construct  a  perfectly  harmonious  picture  on  a 
mathematical  pattern,  and  he  is  quite  satisfied  to 
connect  up  the  various  parts  of  it  through  mathe- 
matical formulas  without  asking  whether  and  how 
far  these  are  a  proof  that  the  law  of  causation 
functions  in  the  external  world. 


2i2        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

murphy:  Let  me  call  your  attention,  Professor,  to  a 
phenomenon  that  happens  sometimes  down  there 
on  the  lake  when  you  are  sailing  your  yacht.  Of 
course  it  doesn't  happen  very  often  on  the  placid 
waters  of  Caputh,  because  you  have  flat  lands 
all  around  and  therefore  no  sudden  wind  squalls. 
But  if  you  are  sailing  close  to  the  wind  on  one  of 
our  northern  lakes,  you  are  always  running  the 
risk  of  keeling  over  rather  suddenly  under  the 
onslaught  of  an  unexpected  air  current.  What  I 
am  coming  to  is,  that  I  think  the  positivist  might 
easily  get  in  his  shot  here  and  hit  you  between 
wind  and  water.  If  you  say  that  the  scientist  is 
content  to  secure  mathematical  logic  in  his  mental 
construct,  then  you  will  quickly  be  quoted  in  sup- 
port of  the  subjective  idealism  championed  by 
modern  scientists  such  as  Sir  Arthur  Eddington. 

einstein:  But  that  would  be  ridiculous. 

murphy:  Of  course  it  would  be  an  unjustifiable  conclu- 
sion j  but  you  have  already  been  widely  quoted  in 
the  British  Press  as  subscribing  to  the  theory  that 
the  outer  world  is  a  derivative  of  consciousness. 
I  have  had  to  call  this  to  the  attention  of  a  friend 
of  mine  in  England,  Mr.  Joad,  who  has  written 
an  excellent  book  called  Philosophical  Aspects  of 
Science.  The  book  is  a  contradiction  of  the  attitudes 
taken  up  by  Sir  Arthur  Eddington  and  Sir  James 
Jeans  and  your  name  is  mentioned  as  corroborating 
their  theories. 


EPILOGUE  213 

einstein:  No  physicist  believes  that.  Otherwise  he 
wouldn't  be  a  physicist.  Neither  do  the  physicists 
you  have  mentioned.  You  must  distinguish  be- 
tween what  is  a  literary  fashion  and  what  is  a 
scientific  pronouncement.  These  men  are  genuine 
scientists  and  their  literary  formulations  must  not 
be  taken  as  expressive  of  their  scientific  convictions. 
Why  should  anybody  go  to  the  trouble  of  gazing 
at  the  stars  if  he  did  not  believe  that  the  stars  were 
really  there?  Here  I  am  entirely  at  one  with 
Planck.  We  cannot  logically  prove  the  existence 
of  the  external  world,  any  more  than  you  can 
logically  prove  that  I  am  talking  with  you  now  or 
that  I  am  here.  But  you  know  that  I  am  here  and 
no  subjective  idealist  can  persuade  you  to  the 
contrary. 

murphy:  That  point,  of  course,  was  fully  elucidated 
long  ago  by  the  scholastics,  and  I  cannot  help 
thinking  that  much  of  the  confusion  in  the  nine- 
teenth century  and  to-day  would  have  been  spared 
if  the  break  with  the  philosophical  tradition  had 
not  been  so  abysmal  in  the  seventeenth  century. 
The  scholastics  put  the  case  for  the  modern 
physicist  very  clearly  in  describing  mental  images 
of  external  reality  as  existing  fundamentaliter  in  rey  \\ 
formaliter  in  mente. 

I  forget  how  the  discussion  on  this  particular  topic  broke 
off.  In  the  stenogram  the  next  paragraph  opens  with 
Planck.  There  has  recently  been  a  great  deal  of  dis- 


214        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

cussion  in  the  Press,  I  said  to  him,  about  what  is  called 
the  bankruptcy  of  science.  Is  it  that  the  general  public 
here  feels,  somehow  or  other,  that  all  the  great  scientific 
achievements  of  Germany  seem  to  have  been  of  no 
avail  in  securing  the  prestige  of  the  nation  abroad?  Of 
course  there  is  the  larger  background  also  of  the  general 
skepticism  which  is  a  universal  feature  of  the  world  in 
our  day.  This  attacks  religion  and  art  and  literature 
as  well  as  science. 

planck :  The  churches  appear  to  be  unable  to  supply 
that  spiritual  anchorage  which  so  many  people  are 
seeking.  And  so  the  people  turn  in  other  directions. 
The  difficulty  which  organized  religion  finds  in 
appealing  to  the  people  nowadays  is  that  its  appeal 
necessarily  demands  the  believing  spirit,  or  what  is 
generally  called  Faith.  In  an  all-round  state  of 
skepticism  this  appeal  receives  only  a  poor  re- 
sponse. Hence  you  have  a  number  of  prophets 
offering  substitute  wares. 

murphy:  Do  you  think  that  science  in  this  particular 
might  be  a  substitute  for  religion? 

planck:  Not  to  a  skeptical  state  of  mindj  for  science 
demands  also  the  believing  spirit.  Anybody  who 
has  been  seriously  engaged  in  scientific  work  of  any 
kind  realizes  that  over  the  entrance  to  the  gates 
of  the  temple  of  science  are  written  the  words: 
Ye  must  have  faith.  It  is  a  quality  which  the 
scientists  cannot  dispense  with. 

The  man  who  handles  a  bulk  of  results  obtained 


EPILOGUE  215 

from  an  experimental  process  must  have  an  im- 
aginative picture  of  the  law  that  he  is  pursuing. 
He  must  embody  this  in  an  imaginary  hypothesis. 
The  reasoning  faculties  alone  will  not  help  him 
forward  a  step,  for  no  order  can  emerge  from  that 
chaos  of  elements  unless  there  is  the  constructive 
quality  of  mind  which  builds  up  the  order  by  a 
process  of  elimination  and  choice.  Again  and  again 
the  imaginary  plan  on  which  one  attempts  to  build 
up  that  order  breaks  down  and  then  we  must  try 
another.  This  imaginative  vision  and  faith  in  the 
ultimate  success  are  indispensable.  The  pure 
rationalist  has  no  place  here. 

murphy:  How  far  has  this  been  verified  in  the  lives 
of  great  scientists?  Take  the  case  of  Kepler,  whose 
300th  anniversary  we  were  celebrating,  you  re- 
member, that  evening  when  Einstein  gave  his 
lecture  at  the  Academy  of  Science.  Wasn't  there 
something  about  Kepler  having  made  certain  dis- 
coveries, not  because  he  set  out  after  them  with 
his  constructive  imagination,  but  rather  because  he 
was  concerned  about  the  dimensions  of  wine  barrels 
and  was  wondering  which  shapes  would  be  the 
most  economic  containers? 

planck  :  These  stories  circulate  in  regard  to  nearly 
everybody  whose  name  is  before  the  public.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  Kepler  is  a  magnificent  example  of 
what  I  have  been  saying.  He  was  always  hard  up. 
He  had  to  suffer  disillusion  after  disillusion  and 
even  had  to  beg  for  the  payment  of  the  arrears  of 


2i6        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

his  salary  by  the  Reichstag  in  Regensburg.  He  had 
to  undergo  the  agony  of  having  to  defend  his  own 
mother  against  a  public  indictment  of  witchcraft. 
But  one  can  realize,  in  studying  his  life,  that  what 
rendered  him  so  energetic  and  tireless  and  pro- 
ductive was  the  profound  faith  he  had  in  his  own 
science,  not  the  belief  that  he  could  eventually 
arrive  at  an  arithmetical  synthesis  of  his  astro- 
nomical observations,  but  rather  the  profound  faith 
in  the  existence  of  a  definite  plan  behind  the  whole 
of  creation.  It  was  because  he  believed  in  that  plan 
that  his  labor  was  felt  by  him  to  be  worth  while 
and  also  in  this  way,  by  never  allowing  his  faith 
to  flag,  his  work  enlivened  and  enlightened  his 
dreary  life.  Compare  him  with  Tycho  de  Brahe. 
Brahe  had  the  same  material  under  his  hands  as 
Kepler,  and  even  better  opportunities,  but  he  re- 
mained only  a  researcher,  because  he  did  not  have 
the  same  faith  in  the  existence  of  the  eternal  laws 
of  creation.  Brahe  remained  only  a  researcher ,  but 
Kepler  was  the  creator  of  the  new  astronomy. 

Another  name  that  occurs  to  me  in  this  connec- 
tion is  that  of  Julius  Robert  Mayer.  His  discoveries 
were  hardly  noticed,  because  in  the  middle  of  last 
century  there  was  a  great  deal  of  skepticism,  even 
among  educated  people,  about  the  theories  of 
natural  philosophy.  Mayer  kept  on  and  on,  not 
because  of  what  he  had  discovered  and  could  prove, 
but  because  of  what  he  believed.  It  was  only  in 
1869  tnat  tne  Society  of  German  Physicists  and 


EPILOGUE  217 

Physicians,  with  Helmholtz  at  their  head,  recog- 
nized Mayer's  work. 

murphy:  You  have  often  said  that  the  progress  of 
science  consists  in  the  discovery  of  a  new  mystery 
the  moment  one  thinks  that  something  funda- 
mental has  been  solved.  The  quantum  theory  has 
opened  up  this  big  problem  of  causation.  And  I 
really  do  not  think  that  the  matter  can  be  answered 
very  categorically.  Of  course  it  is  easy  enough  to 
see  that  those  who  take  up  a  definite  stand  and  say 
that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  causality  are  illogical, 
in  the  sense  that  you  cannot  prove  any  such  state- 
ment either  by  experiment  or  by  appeal  to  the 
direct  dictates  of  consciousness  and  common  sense 
in  its  defense.  But,  all  the  same,  it  seems  to  me 
that  the  burden  is  on  the  determinists  at  least  to 
indicate  the  direction  in  which  the  old  formulation 
of  causality  will  have  to  be  revised  in  order  to 
meet  the  needs  of  modern  science. 

planck  :  As  to  the  first  point,  that  about  the  discovery 
of  new  mysteries.  This  is  undoubtedly  true.  Science 
cannot  solve  the  ultimate  mystery  of  nature.  And 
that  is  because,  in  the  last  analysis,  we  ourselves 
are  part  of  nature  and  therefore  part  of  the  mys- 
tery that  we  are  trying  to  solve.  Music  and  art  are, 
to  an  extent,  also  attempts  to  solve  or  at  least  to 
express  the  mystery.  But  to  my  mind  the  more 
we  progress  with  either  the  more  we  are  brought 
into  harmony  with  all  nature  itself.  And  that  is  one 
of  the  great  services  of  science  to  the  individual. 


2i8        WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

murphy:  Goethe  once  said  that  the  highest  achieve- 
ment to  which  the  human  mind  can  attain  is  an  at- 
titude of  wonder  before  the  elemental  phenomena 
of  nature. 

planck :  Yes,  we  are  always  being  brought  face  to  face 
with  the  irrational.  Else  we  couldn't  have  faith. 
And  if  we  did  not  have  faith  but  could  solve  every 
puzzle  in  life  by  an  application  of  the  human 
reason,  what  an  unbearable  burden  life  would  be. 
We  should  have  no  art  and  no  music  and  no 
wonderment.  And  we  should  have  no  science ;  not 
only  because  science  would  thereby  lose  its  chief 
attraction  for  its  own  followers — namely,  the  pur- 
suit of  the  unknowable — but  also  because  science 
would  lose  the  cornerstone  of  its  own  structure, 
which  is  the  direct  perception  by  consciousness  of 
the  existence  of  external  reality.  As  Einstein  has 
said,  you  could  not  be  a  scientist  if  you  did  not 
know  that  the  external  world  existed  in  reality  j 
I  but  that  knowledge  is  not  gained  by  any  process  of 
reasoning.  It  is  a  direct  perception  and  therefore 
in  its  nature  akin  to  what  we  call  Faith.  It  is  a 
metaphysical  belief.  Now  that  is  something  which 
the  skeptic  questions  in  regard  to  religion ;  but  it  is 
the  same  in  regard  to  science.  However,  there  is 
this  to  be  said  in  favor  of  theoretical  physics,  that 
it  is  a  very  active  science  and  does  make  an  appeal 
to  the  lay  imagination.  In  that  way  it  may,  to  some 
extent,  satisfy  the  metaphysical  hunger  which 
religion  does  not  seem  capable  of  satisfying 


EPILOGUE  219 

nowadays.  But  this  would  be  entirely  by  stimulat- 
ing the  religious  reaction  indirectly.  Science  as  such 
can  never  really  take  the  place  of  religion.  This 
is  explained  in  the  penultimate  chapter  of  the  book. 

murphy:  And  now  for  the  second  part  of  the  question, 
that  of  the  direction  in  which  the  traditional  for- 
mulation of  the  causality  principle  may  be  revised. 
Einstein  talks  about  the  development  of  our  facul- 
ties of  perception  as  science  goes  on. 

planck :  What  exactly  does  he  mean? 

murphy:  Perhaps  I  had  better  put  it  in  my  own  way. 
Take  for  instance  the  modern  phenomenon  of 
speed.  Fifty  years  ago  the  average  tempo  of 
locomotion  was  that  of  a  trotting  horse.  Now  it 
is  even  more  than  that  of  the  railway  train.  If  we 
strike  a  mean  between  the  railway  train  and  the 
motor  car  and  the  aeroplane,  we  had  better  say 
sixty  miles  an  hour  instead  of  six  miles  an  hour, 
as  in  the  days  of  horse  locomotion.  You  remember 
when  bicycles  first  became  popular.  People  were 
running  down  children  and  women  on  the  roads 
day  after  day.  Now  you  could  not  run  down  your 
grandmother  with  a  bicycle.  She'd  be  out  of  the 
way  too  quickly.  You  remember  that  when  motors 
first  careered  along  the  roads  the  horses  took 
fright.  Now  even  the  horses  have  developed  their 
faculties  to  harmonize  their  perceptions  with  the 
idea  of  the  new  speed.  There  can  be  no  doubt  but 
that  modern  mankind  has  developed  some  faculty 
or  other  in  regard  to  this  new  phenomenon  of 


WHERE  IS  SCIENCE  GOING? 

speed.  Now  I  think  Einstein's  idea  is  that  this  sort 
of  thing  will  go  on  developing,  and  that  scientists 
will  arise  who  will  have  a  much  keener  perception 
than  the  scientists  of  to-day.  They  will,  of  course, 
also  have  more  delicate  instruments.  But  the  point 
is  that  what  we  need  to  develop  are  the  perceptive 
faculties  themselves.  It  may  be  that  a  race  of 
scientists  trained  in  the  laboratory  will  be  able 
eventually  to  perceive  the  profound  and  manifold 
operation  of  causation  in  nature,  just  as  the  great 
musical  genius  perceives  inner  harmonies  which  the 
philistine  cannot  even  dream  of,  and  just  as  the 
music-lover  can  perceive  keenly  the  beauty  of  a 
Beethoven  symphonic  structure,  which  the  peasant 
could  not  appreciate  at  all,  because  he  is  accustomed 
only  to  his  simple  folk  melodies.  The  development 
of  the  powers  of  perception  therefore  is  one  of  the 
main  tasks  we  have  to  meet.  That  seems  to  be 
Einstein's  idea. 

tck:  Of  course  it  is  clear.  There  is  no  doubt  what- 
soever that  the  stage  at  which  theoretical  physics 
has  now  arrived  is  beyond  the  average  human 
faculties,  even  beyond  the  faculties  of  the  great 
discoverers  themselves.  What,  however,  you  must 
remember  is  that  even  if  we  progressed  rapidly  in 
the  development  of  our  powers  of  perception  we 
could  not  finally  unravel  nature's  mystery.  We 
could  see  the  operation  of  causation,  perhaps,  in 
the  finer  activities  of  the  atoms,  just  as  on  the 
old  basis  of  the  causal  formulation  in  classical 


EPILOGUE 


221 


mechanics  we  could  perceive  and  make  material 
images  of  all  that  was  observed  as  occurring  in 
nature. 

Where  the  discrepancy  comes  in  to-day  is  not 
between  nature  and  the  principle  of  causality,  but 
rather  between  the  picture  which  we  have  made  of 
nature  and  the  realities  in  nature  itself.  Our  picture 
is  not  in  perfect  accord  with  our  observational  re- 
sults -j  and,  as  I  have  pointed  out  over  and  over 
again,  it  is  the  advancing  business  of  science  to 
bring  about  a  finer  accord  here.  I  am  convinced  that 
the  bringing  about  of  that  accord  must  take  place, 
not  in  the  rejection  of  causality,  but  in  a  greater 
enlargement  of  the  formula  and  a  refinement  of 
it,  so  as  to  meet  modern  discoveries. 


974U58